JP7295567B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine that outputs an audio signal amplified to a level corresponding to a volume set by a volume to a speaker (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-30651 A

By the way, since the game machine emits a notification sound from the speaker to notify the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of an abnormal state, when the volume is turned down to reduce the volume, the notification sound is produced in addition to the volume of the effect sound. There is also a problem that the sound volume becomes low and it is difficult for store clerks and the like in the hall to notice the occurrence of the abnormal state.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and its object is to make it difficult for store clerks, etc., to notice the occurrence of an abnormal state due to the notification sound even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced. To provide a game machine capable of preventing this.

Effective solutions for achieving the above objectives are shown below. In addition, the operation etc. will be explained as necessary. Also, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like are shown as appropriate in the embodiments of the invention, but they are not limited in any way.

(Solution 1)
a main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
a sound output means for outputting a notification sound for notifying an abnormal state of the game machine and an effect sound according to the progress of the game;
an image display means;
effect control means for controlling the sound output from the sound output means and the image displayed by the image display means based on the command received from the main control means;
player volume control means operable by the player to change the volume output from the sound output means;
In a gaming machine comprising
The effect control means has a plurality of sound setting units,
The plurality of sound setting units include sound data of a performance sound whose volume can be changed according to the operation of the player's volume adjustment means, and a notification that the volume cannot be changed according to the operation of the player's volume adjustment means. The sound data of the sound is set individually as sound data,
Synthesizing means for synthesizing the sound data set in the plurality of sound setting units, and synthesized volume value setting means for setting a second volume setting value after being synthesized by the synthesizing means,
The plurality of sound setting units are configured as data setting areas within one control element,
The one control element synthesizes the sound data set in the plurality of sound setting units to set the second volume setting value,
When the notification sound is output, the one control element synthesizes the sound data of the effect sound and the sound data of the notification sound,
A first volume setting value that can be changed according to the operation of the player volume adjusting means is set in the sound setting portion in which the sound data of the effect sound is set among the plurality of sound setting portions,
A first volume setting value of effect sound data set in the sound setting unit can be changed by a player operating the player volume adjustment means,
The effect sound or the notification sound is output from the sound output means at a volume reflecting the second volume setting value,
When the notification sound is being output, the effect sound is muted, and when the output of the notification sound is canceled, the output at the volume set by the player's volume control means is resumed. A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine of the present invention, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of an abnormal state with difficulty due to the notification sound.

It is a perspective view showing a state in which the body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko game machine according to the embodiment, and the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a right side view of the pachinko game machine. It is a plan view of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine. 1 is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame, a body frame, a game board, and a door frame, which constitute a pachinko game machine, viewed from behind; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame, a body frame, a game board, and a door frame, which constitute a pachinko game machine, viewed from the front; FIG. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. FIG. 4 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure between an upper shaft support metal fitting of a body frame and an upper support metal fitting of an outer frame; (A) is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of (A) viewed from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect|action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is exploded and viewed from the front; It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame base unit, and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a back perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit exploded and viewed from behind; (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit when it is exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit, which is disassembled and viewed from the rear; It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit being exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and viewed from behind; It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate unit and was seen from behind. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit when it is exploded and viewed from the front right upper side; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit when it is exploded and viewed from the lower right front side; It is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a pressing operation portion of the operation unit is pressed; It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the handle|steering-wheel apparatus in a door frame, and was seen from the back. Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame, viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame, as seen from the rear; FIG. 4 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed; (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case removed. It is a front view which shows arrangement|positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system|strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the main body frame, and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the main-body frame, and was seen from the back. 4 is a front perspective view of a body frame base in the body frame; FIG. Fig. 4 is a rear perspective view of a body frame base in the body frame; It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled a prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled a prize ball unit, and was seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit exploded from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball device in the prize ball unit, and was seen from the back. It is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotator in the prize ball device. It is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening and closing unit in the body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board unit in the body frame. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the body frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit when it is exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit when it is exploded and viewed from behind; (A) is a front view of a launch power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover of the body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover of the body frame. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the body frame, and (B) is a front perspective view of the lock device in the body frame. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a glass door sliding rod and a body frame sliding rod slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the lock device. FIG. 4C is a front perspective view of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the lock device and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation|movement of the sliding rod for glass doors in a lock device, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view showing a game board attached to the body frame with the door frame of the pachinko game machine removed. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at from behind. It is a front view showing an enlarged function display unit on the game board in a state of being attached to the pachinko game machine. FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 89 and the like, seen from the front. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear of FIG. 92; FIG. 93 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 92 ; It is a detailed front view of the game board. FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 95 as seen from the front. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. 98 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 97; It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to and output from a game ball lending device connection terminal plate that relays electrical connections between a payout control board that constitutes the main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 98 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 97; 3 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; FIG. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control part. It is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 104 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 103; It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board; FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a launch control input circuit; 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board; FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a drive circuit for the firing solenoid; 1 is a circuit diagram showing a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group; FIG. It is a figure which shows the characteristic of a DC/DC converter. 114 is a timing chart of predetermined points in the drive circuit for the firing solenoid of FIG. 113; 4 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a sub-liquid crystal drive substrate; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship (characteristic curve) between the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume and the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device, and (b) is a diagram showing the brightness adjustment of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device. 1 is a schematic diagram showing FIG. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board; 121 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 120 to the peripheral control boards; It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on processing of FIG. 123; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control unit power-on. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing in FIG. 126. FIG. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process subsequent to FIG. 127 . It is a flow chart which shows an example of due-out control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball removal switch operation determination process. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a rotation angle switch history creation process; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of sprocket fixed position determination skip processing; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a ball slanting determination process; It is a flow chart which shows an example of prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flow chart which shows an example of prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stock monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a payout ball withdrawal determination setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of payout setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball extraction setting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of a ball-slip motion setting process; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of retry operation monitoring processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of mismatch counter reset determination processing; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of error cancellation switch operation determination processing. It is a timing chart showing signal processing (A) at the time of payout operation by ball lending, input signal confirmation processing (B) from the CR unit. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of rotation detection switch history creation processing; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a rotation detection piece of a driven gear and a pair of rotation detection switches associated with clockwise rotation of a dial operation portion in the rotary operation unit; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a rotation detection piece of a driven gear and a pair of rotation detection switches associated with counterclockwise rotation of a dial operation portion in the rotary operation unit; (A) is a table showing ON/OFF states of a pair of rotation detection switches associated with clockwise rotation of a dial operation portion in a rotary operation unit; (B) is a list view associated with counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation portion; FIG. 3 is a list showing ON/OFF of a pair of rotation detection switches; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram (range near the maximum value) showing the operation of an initial value update type counter; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram (a range closer to the minimum value side) showing the operation of an initial value update type counter;

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko game machine according to the embodiment, and the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko gaming machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko game machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame, which constitute the pachinko game machine, viewed from behind, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board and the door frame as seen from the front.

1 to 7, a pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and an outer frame 2 pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable, and the front side is open. a box-shaped body frame 3; a game board 4 having a game area 1100 attached and fixed to the body frame 3 from the front side and into which game balls as game media are driven; A door frame 5 is pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side of the user. The door frame 5 of the pachinko game machine 1 has a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a game window 101 arranged below the game window 101 to store game balls. and a handle device 500 operated by the player to hit the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4.例文帳に追加

As shown in the figure, the pachinko game machine 1 has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. are substantially the same, and the vertical width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is slightly shorter than that of the outer frame 2 . A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged such that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably pivoted at a position on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2. The right ends of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 to open them.

When viewed from the front, the pachinko game machine 1 has a substantially circular game window 101 in which a game ball is hit through a game area 1100, which projects forward below the game window 101. An upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 are arranged vertically. A handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5 . When a rotating operation is performed, the game ball in the upper tray 301 is hit into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, so that a game can be played.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player cannot see inside the game area 1100. It is not possible to insert a hand or the like into the game area 1100 to touch the game balls, obstacle nails, various winning openings, accessories, and the like. Various control boards are provided on the rear side of the body frame 3, and a closed bar body 1250 is provided so as to cover the rear side of the game board 4. As shown in FIG.

[2. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Furthermore, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment/detachment structure between the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame and the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame. FIG. 14(A) is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of FIG. 14(A) viewed from below. . FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Furthermore, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support bracket portion for explaining the action of the locking member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment includes an upper and lower frame plate 10 and a lower frame plate 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right frames extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. It is provided with side frame plates 12, 13 and four connecting members 14 connecting the ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13, respectively. By connecting 13 together, it is assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 of the outer frame 2 are made of solid wood (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) with a predetermined thickness, and are vertically pierced at approximately the center in the front-rear direction of both left and right ends. An engagement notch 15 recessed toward the center in the left-right direction is provided. Mounting stepped portions 10a recessed from other general surfaces are formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and upper support metal fittings 20, which will be described later, are mounted on the mounting stepped portions 10a. It's like

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal material (for example, an aluminum alloy) with a constant cross section, and the outer side surfaces are substantially flat surfaces, and the inner side surfaces protrude inward at the rear ends. It is provided with a protruding portion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) to enhance strength and rigidity. In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is installed on the pachinko island equipment of the game hall, work can be performed. The pachinko game machine 1 can be easily held by the pachinko game machine 1 as a finger rest, and the design of the appearance can be improved. For the sake of convenience, there are drawings in which the plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 and extends in the left-right direction. A plate-like horizontal piece 17, a plate-like vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 extending in the opposite direction. It has a plate-shaped engagement piece 19 that can be inserted into and engaged with the engagement notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 . In this embodiment, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are connected to the left and right sides, respectively. It is formed in an asymmetrical shape, and a vertical piece 18 is formed in front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are each formed in a symmetrical shape. It is

The upper and lower surfaces of the horizontal piece 17 abut against the lower and upper surfaces of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 , and the engaging piece 19 of the connecting member 14 engages the upper and lower frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 . In the state of being inserted into and engaged with the portion 15, a predetermined screw is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19, whereby the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11 . The connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is screwed through the side frame plates 12 and 13 with the vertical piece 18 in contact with the inner side surface of the upper end of the side frame plates 12 and 13. is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the projecting portion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It's like Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 is screwed through the side frame plates 12 and 13 with the vertical piece 18 in contact with the inner side surface of the lower end of the side frame plates 12 and 13 and screwed with a predetermined screw. is screwed into the vertical piece 18 to connect the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Four connecting members 14 connect the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 , and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 includes an upper support metal fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10, and a lower support metal fitting 20 arranged to face the upper support metal fitting 20 and fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12. A supporting metal fitting 21, a reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower supporting metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13, and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. 23 and. The upper support metal fitting 20 and the lower support metal fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

First, the upper support metal fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projecting piece 20b projecting forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a beyond the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support projecting piece 20b. A supporting hook hole 20c formed by notching from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b so as to bend toward the center of the tip, and a left side frame that hangs downward from the left ends of the fixed piece 20a and the supporting protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixed piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that is continuous with the hanging fixed piece 20d and hangs down along the outer edge of the support projecting piece 20b (see FIG. 14A). 14) and a stop droop 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the depending wall 20e and slopes inwardly at the entrance end of the support barb 20c. A pivot pin 633 (see FIG. 57) of an upper pivot bracket 630 of the body frame 3, which will be described later, is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support bracket 20. As shown in FIG. Also, the upper support fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by means of a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

The strength of the support projecting piece 20b is increased by the hanging wall 20e that hangs down from the outer edge of the support projecting piece 20b. The lock member 27 arranged on the rear surface of the player can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized from the player side, and the external appearance can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protruding piece 20b is bent in a V-shape so as to be inclined from the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. , and the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20 c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633 .

On the other hand, the lower support metal fitting 21 comprises a horizontal fixing piece 21a placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixed piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin-like projecting upward from near the front end of the support projecting piece 21c. and a support projection 21d. A body frame shaft support formed on a body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 59, etc.) of the body frame 3, which will be described later, is inserted into the support projection 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame pivot metal fitting 644 of the main body frame 3, the pivot pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is engaged with the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported so that it can be freely opened and closed.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed to the inside of the right side frame plate 13 so as to be spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L-shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-back direction (Fig. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are attached along the open sides of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2. Although the details will be described later, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and turned to one side, the engagement between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 is released. The body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by pressing.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the top surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22 . This guide plate 26 is for smoothly guiding the body frame 3 when closing the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, and is attached and fixed so as to be replaceable.

14 and other figures, the outer frame 2 further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and is rotated with the support projecting piece 20b by a rivet 28. It is movably pivoted. The locking member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from the position where it is supported by the rivet 28, and a portion that is shorter than the stopper portion 27a to the right from the position where it is supported by the rivet 28. A projecting operation portion 27b, an elastic piece 27c projecting from the side opposite to the position where the operation portion 27b is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and an elastic piece 27c formed at the tip of the stopper portion 27a so as to bulge forward. and an arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operating portion 27b. The elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a width narrower than that of the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as it moves leftward from the stopper portion 27a.

As shown in FIGS. 14(B) and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support protruding piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the end abutting portion of the elastic piece 27c is the hanging wall. 20e, the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a contacts the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. is not closed, and a space is formed in the leading space of the support hook hole 20c so that the pivot pin 633 of the upper pivot bracket 630 of the body frame 3 can be inserted. .

The support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 is such that the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c to move the tip side of the stopper portion 27a. is facing the stop drooping portion 20f at the entrance end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f, so they are not in contact) In a normal axially supporting state, the respective centers of the axially supporting pin 633 located in the distal end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending and the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are inclined. It is in a state of being shifted in the direction and facing each other. In this normal pivoting state, the pivot pin 633 that pivotally supports the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip of the support hook hole 20c. Since almost no load is applied to the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is in a state where no load is applied. In addition, since the stopper portion 27a has an arcuate tip surface 27d at the tip thereof, when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27, the lock member 27 can be rotated smoothly. It's becoming Also, in the illustration, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the axial support pin 633 comes into contact with the arc-shaped distal end surface 27d with an acting force F applied along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the acting force F is applied to the axially supporting pin 633. A force component F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip surface 27d (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d), and one side of the inclined hole portion of the pivot pin 633 and the support hook hole 20c When the direction of the component force F1 is directed toward the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27), the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is stopped. A moment that rotates the tip portion in a direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) to separate from the support projecting piece 20b does not act, and the pivot pin 633 is positioned between the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. It maintains the state of being sandwiched between the inner surface of one side. Therefore, even in a normal axially supported state or in a state in which the force of the axially supporting pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always subjected to a load, and the elastic member 27c integrally formed of synthetic resin is secured. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the locking member 27 is rotated in the direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) in which the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a of the locking member 27 is disengaged from the support projecting piece 20b by applying an excessive force, the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a will not move to one side. abuts on the stop drooping portion 20f and does not rotate further in the direction of detachment, so that the locking member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b.

Even if the shape of the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate, the locking member 27 may be placed in a position where the force component F1 does not generate a rotational moment or the tip portion of the lock member 27 may be positioned toward the outside of the support projecting piece 20b. By locating the center of rotation of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Even if the member 27 rotates, the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts the stop drooping portion 20f. Confirmed.

The action of the lock member 27 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. On the premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support metal fitting is inserted into a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 57) of the main body frame 3 . It is necessary that the support projection 21d of 21 is inserted. On such a premise, as shown in FIG. As shown in 16(B), the locking member 27 rotates the elastic piece 27c counterclockwise while deforming it, so that the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the supporting hook hole 20c. Then, when the pivot pin 633 reaches the top space of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the lock member 27 is biased by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c and rotates clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to its normal state to close the entrance portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the pivot pin 633 so that the pivot pin 633 does not drop out of the support hook hole 20c.

This state is maintained even when the body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening/closing operation of the body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 16(D). Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the body frame 3 is lifted up to release the engagement between the body frame shaft support holes formed in the body frame shaft support metal fittings 644 and the support projections 21d of the lower support metal fittings 21, thereby moving the body frame 3 to the outer frame 2. can be removed from the

As described above, in the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum). alloy), when the pachinko game machine 1 is installed on the pachinko island equipment arranged in rows in the game hall, it is necessary to fix it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such work is performed by driving nails into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nails can be easily driven, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be easily installed in the existing pachinko island equipment. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are extruded materials of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy), it is possible to form a thin wall thickness while maintaining the strength compared to the conventional wooden outer frame. The lateral width of the peripheral wall 605 (see FIG. 57, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12, 13 can be widened when viewed from the front, and the game board 4 with a large lateral dimension. can be attached to the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

The upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which constitute the outline of the outer frame 2, are connected by a connecting member 14. The connecting member 14 connects the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since the outer frame 2 is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and is fixed while the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and the outer frame 2 is sturdy. It is designed to be able to be a square-shaped framework. After the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support bracket 20 is attached at a predetermined position, each Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13, when the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in a pachinko island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device ( For example, it can be installed in close contact with an adjacent ball rental machine or CR unit).

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openable and closable on the front side of the body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. FIG. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the right rear. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back.

The door frame 5 in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment is, as shown in the figure, a door having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular (elliptical) shape. A frame base unit 100, a right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100, and a right side decoration unit 200 facing the game window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the left outer periphery, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100, the lower end lower side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and a pair of side speaker covers 290 arranged on the front side of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame 5 includes a plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, an operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the plate unit 300, and a door penetrating the plate unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. a foul cover unit 540 attached to the foul cover unit 540, a ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and a glass unit 590 that is

[3-1. door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26. FIG. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame base unit as viewed from the rear.

As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 has a vertically long rectangular outer shape and a door frame base body having a game window 101 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner periphery formed in a substantially vertically long elliptical shape. 110, an upper bracket 120 for fixing the upper decoration unit attached to the upper center of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110, and on both the left and right sides of the lower end of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110. A pair of side speakers 130 to be attached and a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front are provided.

In addition, the door frame base unit 100 includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a rear surface of the door frame base body 110 so as to cover the lower part of the game window 101. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer circumference of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left and right direction in rear view. ) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191 and the main control board 4100, a handle relay terminal plate cover 193 covering the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192, and a firing cover 191 and a handle relay terminal plate 193 covering the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192. A frame-decoration drive amplifier board 194 arranged on the opposite side of the terminal plate 192 and the like (on the right side (rotary support side) of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the back) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base main body, and a frame-decoration drive amplifier board 194 and a frame-decorated driving amplifier board cover 195 covering the rear side of the.

The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin, and a reinforcing unit 150 is fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110. The reinforcement unit 150 is made by assembling metal sheets with rivets or the like, thereby increasing the rigidity of the entire door frame base unit. At the same time, it has sufficient strength to support each of the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300, and the like.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222, 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200, 240, and is also connected to the peripheral control circuit provided on the game board 4, which will be described later. It is connected to the board 4140 and has an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130 . Although specific illustrations are omitted, in the present embodiment, each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, each decoration substrate 430, 432 provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400 have The wiring that connects the dial drive motor 414, the switches 432a, 432b, 432c, the handle relay terminal plate 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the plate unit 300, etc., and the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, etc. is connected to the frame decoration drive amplifier. The board 194 is concentrated and bundled at a position on the right side (rotary support side) of the substrate 194 when viewed from the rear, and extends rearward so as to be connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3 . It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed of a synthetic resin in the shape of a vertically long picture frame. is formed in such a manner that the game window 101 is entirely offset upward. As shown in the drawing, the game window 101 is formed such that the left, right, and upper inner peripheral edges are formed in continuous smooth curved lines, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted is provided on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110 on the pivot side (left side in front view). is formed. The width of the upper side formed by the game window 101 and the width of the left and right sides of the door frame base body 110 are equal to the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150, which will be described later. , and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body when viewed from the front. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than that of the conventional pachinko game machine can be easily formed. It is possible.

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base body 110 has a speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 which is arranged on both left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and a ball feeding unit 580. 26) and a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 through the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 at a predetermined position in the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feeding opening 113 for supplying a ball, and a handle attachment for attaching a handle bracket 140 with the right (open side) end of the front surface, which is arranged in the lower right corner in a front view and bulges forward, is inclined so as to recede. a wire passage opening 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and through which the wiring from the handle device 500 can pass; and a lock hole 116 formed through which a cylinder lock 1010, which will be described later, can be inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 has a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle relay terminal plate 192 on the lower side of the ball feeding unit mounting concave portion 112, and the door frame base main body 110 in a rear view. A substrate mounting portion 118 for mounting the frame decoration driving amplifier substrate 194 disposed on the lower right side (shaft support side) of the game window 101, and a speaker mounting portion 111 closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 on the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 and the door frame base main body 110 protrude rearward from the arrangement, and the door frame base body 110 is recessed forward along the inner circumference of the game window 101 on the rear side. A glass unit support stepped portion 110a with which the front outer peripheral edge of the unit 590 can abut, and four locks projecting rearward from a predetermined position on the outer circumference of the game window 101 for rotatably supporting the glass unit locking member 190. A member mounting portion 110b is further provided.

Further, on the rear side of the door-frame base body 110, there is provided a door-frame projecting piece 110c projecting backward from the lower side of the door-frame base body 110 by a predetermined amount. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko game machine 1 through the gap between the lower sides of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even if an attempt is made, the entry of the tool can be prevented by the door frame projecting piece 110c engaged with the engaging groove 603, and the security function of the pachinko game machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in a rear view and fits into the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d into the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the body frame 3 are positioned in the correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e protruding forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, etc. on the front surface thereof. In addition, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the upper bracket 120, the side speaker 130, the handle bracket 140, etc. are formed at appropriate positions.

Further, in the door frame base body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the board mounting portion 118, a lower plate ball supply port 310g in the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300 and a foul cover unit 540, which will be described later, are provided. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Next, the upper bracket 120 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the front upper center of the door frame base body 110, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the left and right brackets attached to the door frame base unit 100 The upper gap formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240 is hidden, and both the left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. Further, the upper bracket 120 has a part of its tip inserted into the upper decoration unit 280, and can support the upper decoration unit 280 from above when the door frame 5 is assembled. It's like

In addition, the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 are not shown in detail, but the point of intersection of their central axes is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1 m) forward from the center of the game area 1100 when viewed from the front. .5 m), so that the sound reaches the player seated in front of the pachinko game machine 1 most efficiently. In addition, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs sounds in the mid-to-high range, and is arranged at a position separated from the pachinko game machine 1 in the horizontal direction as much as possible. By outputting related and different sounds from the side speakers 130, a sound with a high stereo feeling can be output.

25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft extending from the rear end of the tubular portion 141 to the axis of the tubular portion 141. A circular flange portion 142 extending outward in a right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) projecting into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at uneven intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. A plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 connecting the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141 are provided. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw while the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although not shown, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially aligned with the wire passage opening 115 when attached to the handle attachment portion 114 .

The handle bracket 140 is provided with two projections 143 on the upper side and two on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141 . They are arranged and formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 are aligned. there is Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as not to rotate relative to the handle bracket 140 .

The handle bracket 140 is attached to the obliquely inclined handle attachment portion 114 so that the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 extends to the right (open side) as it goes forward in a front view. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is similarly tilted.

25 and 26, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door-frame base unit 100 consists of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear surface of the upper side of the door-frame base body 110, and a door-frame base body. A support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the back surface of the pivot-side side portion of the door-frame base body 110 , an opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the back surface of the open-side side portion of the door-frame base body 110 , and the door-frame base body 110 . A lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the back surface of the lower side of the game window 101 is provided, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets, or the like to form a rectangular shape.

As shown in FIG. 25, this reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface thereof at the upper and lower ends of a supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and a lower surface thereof. and a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper and lower shaft support fittings 630 and 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3 on the shaft support side, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It is pivotally supported so that it can be freely opened and closed.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially equal to the width dimension of the door frame base body 110. A lower bent projecting piece 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent projecting piece 160 bent forward on the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in front view. and a vertically bent projecting piece 161 which is bent backward at the central portion of the upper long side edge and extends vertically. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by a lower bending projecting piece 159, an upper bending projecting piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, which will be described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 is engaged with the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is horizontally and vertically bent. It is designed to be able to restrict backward movement. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101 a of the door frame base body 110 .

In addition, the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes open-side outward bending projecting pieces 163 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, As shown in the figure, the opening-side inward bending projection 164 is formed to extend longer rearward than the opening-side outward bending projection 163 . ing. A hook cover 165 is provided on the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 so as to abut on a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later. Further, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a support-side U-shaped protruding piece 166 extending rearward from the outer end of the long side and opening outward on the support side. In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending projecting pieces 167 that are bent rearward on both sides of its long sides.

The support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcement unit 150 is attached to and supported by the body frame 3 only at the upper and lower points of the upper support portion 156 and the lower support portion 158. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes larger, resulting in an illegal operation. Although there is a risk that it may become easier to perform the action, the support-side reinforcement sheet metal 152 is provided with the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the support-side reinforcement sheet metal 152 is further increased. The side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. Further, the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is designed such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 of the body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U-shape. can be prevented from being inserted, and only the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the security function of the pachinko game machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. The crime prevention cover 180 covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and has a crime prevention function to prevent unauthorized devices from entering the game board 4. The glass unit 590 is arranged between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153 of the game board 4. The glass unit 590 is formed in a flat plate shape to cover the lower part thereof. A contact recess 181 is formed, and a security rear projecting piece 182 protrudes rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 . In addition, the left and right ends of the security cover 180 are provided with security rear end projecting pieces 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. In addition, the crime prevention rear end projection 183 on the right side (rotary support side) in the rear view extends longer rearward than the crime prevention rear end projection 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, a crime prevention front projecting piece 184 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and left and right security projection pieces 184 on the outside of the crime prevention front projection piece 184. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 protruding forward is provided at the lower end of the .

In this security cover 180, the attachment elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in a front view is attached to the security cover attachment portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the attachment elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (rotary support side) is attached to the plate. By attaching it to the crime prevention cover attachment part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. - 特許庁When the crime prevention cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although detailed illustration is omitted, the crime prevention front projecting piece 184 is fitted to the outer periphery of the lower portion of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 abuts on the vertically bent projecting piece 161 . In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed, the anti-crime rear projecting piece 182 projecting backward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 at the half on the pivot side, and the half on the open side is forward. It is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 of the component 1110 . As a result, even if an unauthorized tool tries to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the entry can be prevented by the security rear projecting piece 182 inserted under the inner rail 1112.例文帳に追加.

The back surface of the security cover 180 can cover the front lower part of the ball-hitting guidance path formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 when the door frame 5 is closed. , the collision of the hit ball that flies or reverses the guide passage portion with the glass plate 594 can be prevented.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with fitting portions 190a that are rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portions 110b projecting rearward from the door frame base body 110. and a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projecting piece 451f of the glass unit 590. As shown in FIG. The glass unit locking member 190 has a locking screw attached to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state in which the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 passes through the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably pivotally supported with respect to the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge projecting rearward on the rear side. It serves as a finger grip for operation. Of the four glass unit locking members 190, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in the rear view has no ridge, and has a flat rear surface. ing. Further, the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right side in rear view is provided with an operating piece 190c extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and in a direction different from that of the locking piece 190b. there is As shown in FIG. 18, the operation piece 190c is covered with a security cover 180 on the rear side so that the operation piece 190c cannot be operated with the security cover 180 attached. Thus, it is possible to prevent the glass unit 590 from being easily removed by rotating the glass unit locking member 190 .

Also, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 . Also, the handle relay terminal plate cover 193 and the frame-decorated drive amplifier board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle relay terminal plate cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the ball shooting device 650 attached to the body frame 3 can be covered.

[3-2. right side decorative unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29. FIG. FIG. 27(A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. Also, FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit exploded and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit exploded and viewed from behind.

The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in this embodiment, as illustrated, decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, and the inside is the game window 101. The outer side is formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100 . The right side decorative unit 200 includes a side decorative frame 202 forming the skeleton of the right side decorative unit 200, a side upper decorative member 204 arranged along the upper edge of the side decorative frame 202, and the side upper decorative member 204. The side upper decorative lens 206 fitted from the rear side covers the upper side of the side decorative frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204, and the side upper decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. A side upper cover 208, a side lens 210 that supports the lower part of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side decoration frame 202 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 212 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 210. and have.

In addition, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from the approximate center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface of the right side upper decoration. a substrate 214, and a right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged below from the approximate center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 212 and having a plurality of LEDs 216a (full-color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof; A right side upper decorative board cover 218 which covers the rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214 and is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative board 214, and a right side lower decorative board 216 which covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative board. A right side lower decorative board cover 220 attached to the side lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 216 is provided.

Further, the right side decorative unit 200 includes an upper right speaker 222 arranged in the upper left part of the side decorative frame 202 when viewed from the front, and an upper part that supports the upper right speaker 222 and is fitted to the rear upper part of the side decorative frame 202. A speaker bracket 224, an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decorative frame 202, and a side sub-lens 228 attached from the inside to a predetermined position on the side surface of the side upper cover 208. there is The LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 is arranged behind the side sub-lens 228, and the LED 214c is used for decoration.

In this right side decorative unit 200, the side decorative frame 202, the side upper decorative member 204, the right side upper decorative board cover 218, and the right side lower decorative board cover 220 are formed of opaque members. A plated layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204 . The side upper decorative lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub-lens 228 of the right side decorative unit 200 are translucent members. The side upper cover 208 is almost entirely milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226, and the side sub-lens 228 are almost transparent. It is said that

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back side of the side lens 210 and the upper speaker cover 226, which are formed substantially transparent, and the front side of the side inner lens 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedral shape. , can refract light irregularly. Therefore, LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, etc. mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged behind the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 It is designed so that it cannot be clearly seen from the person's side. In addition, the front surfaces of the upper right side decoration substrate 214 and the lower right side decoration substrate 216 are white, and the right side decoration unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b. In addition, when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b are off, the decorative substrates 214, 216 are inconspicuous. The right side upper decoration board 214 and the right side lower decoration board 216 are connected to the peripheral control board 4140 respectively, and the respective LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c and 216a are controlled by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control board 4140. , 216b to emit light as appropriate so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be decorated with light.

The side decorative frame 202 in the right side decorative unit 200 is, as shown in the figure, formed in an arc shape generally along the game window 101 as a whole. The inner frame 202a is arranged at a position separated from the inner frame 202a to the outside, and is formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper part, and the upper part is the inner frame. An outer frame 202b formed in an arc shape so as to curve toward the upper end edge of 202a, an upper end frame 202c connecting the upper end edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, and lower ends of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a. A lower end frame 202d that connects the edges to each other is arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this embodiment) along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b to connect the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b and a predetermined and a partition frame 202f having a width slit 202e.

The inner frame 202a of the side decorative frame 202 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, in the outer frame 202b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is formed in a linear shape at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, whereas the front end is formed vertically. are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of are protruded forward. In addition, the arcuate portion of the outer frame 202b that is curved upward and downward from the linearly extending portion is formed in an arcuate shape that is also curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper edge side protrudes forward. The partition frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202 is curved in the front-rear direction so that the portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b protrudes most forward. 202 f of this partition frame is arrange|positioned on the radial extending radially from near the center lower part of the game window 101 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 (refer FIG. 17 etc.).

As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 202 is divided into a plurality of sections between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b by a plurality of partition wall frames 202f in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction). is used as a light-emitting decoration opening 202g, and a peripheral lens portion 210a of a side lens 210, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. Also, the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted from the rear side into the slit 202e of the partition frame 202f. Furthermore, the partition frame 202f can partition the slit 202e and the light-emitting decoration opening 202g, so that the respective light-emitting modes can be differentiated.

As shown in the figure, the upper side decorative member 204 of the right side decorative unit 200 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decorative frame 202. is formed in a recessed state, and a plurality of openings 204a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the front surface. The side upper decorative member 204 has a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the rows of openings 204a.

On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 206 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 204, and extends from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 204 through the opening 204a to near its front end. It has a plurality of light guide portions 206a that can protrude. The light guide portion 206a has a polyhedral tip, and by inserting and fitting it into the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204, it is possible to make the opening 204a look like a jewel. It is possible. In addition, the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 arranged on the rear side can be emitted forward (to the player side) from the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204 by the light guide portion 206a of the side upper decorative lens 206. In addition, the tip of the light guide portion 206a can be made to shine like a jewel.

The upper side cover 208 of the right side decorative unit 200 has a top surface and a right side surface (in a front view) that are shaped substantially along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100), and a bottom surface (lower end). is shaped substantially along the side upper decorative member 204 . The side upper cover 208 has a mounting stepped portion 208a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 204 can be accommodated in the lower front portion of the side upper cover 208. Mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 and the like are formed on the end face. Two cutouts 208b are formed on the right side of the side upper cover 208, and a side sub-lens 228 mounted inside is viewed from the front through the cutouts 208b. It's becoming By fitting the side sub-lens 228 into the notch 208b of the side upper cover 208, only this part can emit light in a different manner.

The side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 has a shape substantially along the side decoration frame 202 and a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the luminous decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202 from behind. It has a peripheral lens portion 210a and a radiation lens portion 210b that is inserted into the slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202 from behind. As shown in the figure, this side lens 210 does not have a peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to the luminous decoration opening 202g that contacts the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and the corresponding portion is open forward and downward. and a stepped accommodation portion 210c. An upper right speaker 222, an upper speaker bracket 224, and the like, which will be described later, are accommodated in the accommodation step portion 210c. The side lens 210 also has a mounting portion 210d that forms the upper surface of the housing stepped portion 210c and is fixed to the rear side of the mounting stepped portion 208a of the side upper cover 208. As shown in FIG.

The side lens 210 has a curved surface that bulges forward so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b are substantially aligned with the front end of the partition frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202. As shown in FIG. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 210a is uneven. As a result, the light passing through the peripheral lens portion 210a is irregularly refracted. In addition, due to the polyhedral inner surface, the peripheral lens portion 210a can exhibit a sparkling characteristic appearance.

The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side, and as shown in the figure, corresponds to the portion of the side lens 210 where the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b are formed. A main body portion 212a having a recessed rear surface, and a radial lens portion 210b (slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body portion 212a and protrudes forward from the main body portion 212a and corresponds to the slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202). and a plate-shaped light guide portion 212b arranged at a position where the light guide portion 212b is located. The main body portion 212 a of the side inner lens 212 is formed such that the front surface thereof is set apart from the inner surface of the side lens 210 by a predetermined distance. Although not shown in detail, one surface of the body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212 has a polyhedral shape with a plurality of surfaces facing in different directions, similar to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. Since the plate thickness of the body portion 212a is uneven, the light passing through the body portion 212a is irregularly refracted.

By combining the side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, the light passing through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be double refracted irregularly. It has become almost unrecognizable. In addition, due to irregular refraction and irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape, the appearance of the side lens 210 (peripheral lens portion 210a) can be glittered and the perspective can be made to look strange.

A plurality of high-brightness color LEDs are mounted on the surfaces of the upper right side decoration substrate 214 and the lower right side decoration substrate 216 of the right side decoration unit 200, and the light emission decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202 (around the side lens 210) is mounted. The LEDs 214a and 216a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 210a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°). The LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b) have a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15° to 60°). In this embodiment, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 that decorates the side sub-lens 228 is a red LED.

The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decorative unit 200 outputs sounds in the mid-to-high range similarly to the side speaker 130, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by an upper speaker bracket 224. there is An upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 has a cylindrical horn portion 224a projecting obliquely forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko game machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 224a when viewed from the front. It's becoming

The upper right speaker 222 emits sound from the upper part of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the player below by means of the horn part 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, so that it makes noise compared to other pachinko game machines. It's getting harder. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing in different directions like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. The surface of the upper speaker bracket 224 is formed in a polyhedral shape, and the thickness of the plate is uneven, so that the light passing through the upper speaker bracket 224 is irregularly refracted.

Further, the upper speaker cover 226 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 202 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 202g in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decorative frame 202. Its surface is formed into a curved shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210 . Further, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed in the surface of the upper speaker cover 226 so that the sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing in different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. The surface of the upper speaker cover 226 is formed into a polyhedral shape, and the thickness of the plate is uneven, so that the light passing through the upper speaker cover 226 is irregularly refracted. Therefore, light is irregularly refracted in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the through holes 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226. , the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 can have an appearance similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 210a.

[3-3. Left side decorative unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. FIG. FIG. 30(A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. Also, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the left-side decoration unit exploded and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit exploded and viewed from behind.

The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the game window 101 excluding the lower part when viewed from the front. It is formed in an arc along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100 , and the outer side is formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100 . The left side decorative unit 240 includes a side decorative frame 242 forming the skeleton of the left side decorative unit 240, a side upper decorative member 244 arranged along the upper edge of the side decorative frame 242, and the side upper decorative member 244. The side upper decorative lens 246 fitted from the rear side covers the upper side of the side decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244, and the side upper decorative member 244 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246. A side upper cover 248, a side lens 250 that supports the lower part of the side upper cover 248 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame decoration 242 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 252 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 250. and has.

Also, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the approximate center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. a substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged below from the approximate center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and having a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof; A left side upper decorative board cover 258 which covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and a left side cover which covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256. A left side lower decorative board cover 260 attached to the side lens 250 and the side decorative frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256 is provided.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 includes an upper left speaker 262 arranged in the upper right part of the side decoration frame 242 when viewed from the front, and an upper part supporting the upper left speaker 262 and fitted to the rear upper part of the side decoration frame 242 . A speaker bracket 264 and an upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decorative frame 242 are provided.

In this left side decoration unit 240, the side decoration frame 242, the side upper decoration member 244, the left side upper decoration board cover 258, and the left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of opaque members. A plated layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decorative members 244 . The side upper decorative lens 246, the side upper cover 248, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decorative unit 240 are made of translucent members. , the side upper cover 248 is substantially entirely milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the rear side of the side lens 250 and the upper speaker cover 266, which are formed substantially transparent, and the front side of the side inner lens 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedral shape. , can refract light irregularly. Therefore, LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 It is designed so that it cannot be clearly seen from the person's side. In addition, the front surfaces of the left side upper decoration board 254 and the left side lower decoration board 256 are white, and the left side decoration unit 240 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light from the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b. In addition, when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are off, the decorative substrates 254, 256 are inconspicuous. The left side upper decoration board 254 and the left side lower decoration board 256 are connected to a peripheral control board 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are controlled by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control board 4140. can be appropriately illuminated to decorate the left side decoration unit 240 with light emission.

The side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 is, as shown in the figure, formed in an arc shape generally along the game window 101 as a whole. The inner frame 242a and the inner frame 242a are arranged at a position separated from the inner frame 242a to the outside, and are formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper part, and the upper part is the inner frame. An outer frame 242b formed in an arc shape so as to curve toward the upper end edge of 242a, an upper end frame 242c connecting the upper end edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a, and lower ends of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a. A lower end frame 242d that connects the edges to each other is arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this embodiment) along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b. and a partition frame 242f having a width slit 242e.

The inner frame 242a of the side decorative frame 242 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 242b has a linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5. The rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is formed linearly at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a. are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of are protruded forward. Further, the curved arcuate portion above the linearly vertically extending portion of the outer frame 242b is formed in an arcuate shape that is also curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper edge side protrudes forward. The partition frame 242f of the side decorative frame 242 is curved in the front-rear direction so that the portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 242f is arranged on a radial line extending radially from the vicinity of the central lower portion of the game window 101 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 (see FIG. 17, etc.).

As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 242 is divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b by a plurality of partition wall frames 242f. 242g is used as a light-emitting decoration opening, and a peripheral lens portion 250a of a side lens 250, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. Also, the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted from the rear side into the slit 242e of the partition frame 242f. Furthermore, the partition frame 242f can partition the slit 242e and the light-emitting decoration opening 242g, so that the respective light-emitting modes can be differentiated.

As shown in the figure, the side upper decorative member 244 of the left side decorative unit 240 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decorative frame 242. is formed in a recessed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the front surface. The side upper decorative member 244 has a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the rows of openings 244a.

On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 244, and extends from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 244 through the opening 244a to near its front end. It has a plurality of light guiding portions 246a that can protrude. The light guide portion 246a has a polyhedral tip, and by inserting and fitting it into the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244, it is possible to make the opening 244a look like a jewel. It is possible. Also, the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 arranged on the rear side can be emitted forward (toward the player) from the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244 by the light guide portion 246a of the side upper decorative lens 244. In addition, the tip of the light guide portion 246a can be made to shine like a jewel.

The upper side cover 248 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a top surface and a left side surface (in a front view) that are shaped substantially along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100), and a bottom surface (lower end). is shaped substantially along the side upper decorative member 244 . The side upper cover 248 has a mounting stepped portion 248a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 244 can be accommodated. Mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the side upper decorative member 244 and the like are formed on the end face. The side upper cover 248 has a covering portion 248b on its outer side surface (left side surface in front view) for covering the upper shaft support portion 156 of the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the front side.

The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a shape substantially along the side decoration frame 242 and a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the luminous decoration opening 242g of the side decoration frame 242 from behind. It has a peripheral lens portion 250a and a radial lens portion 250b that is inserted into the slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242 from behind. As shown in the figure, the side lens 250 does not have a peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the light-emitting decorative opening 242g that contacts the upper end frame 242c of the side decorative frame 242, and the corresponding portion is open forward and downward. and a storage step portion 250c. An upper left speaker 262, an upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later, are accommodated in the accommodation step portion 250c. The side lens 250 also has a mounting portion 250d that forms the upper surface of the housing stepped portion 250c and is fixed to the rear side of the mounting stepped portion 248a of the side upper cover 248. As shown in FIG.

The side lens 250 has a curved surface that bulges forward so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiation lens portion 250b are substantially aligned with the front end of the partition frame 242f of the side decorative frame 242. As shown in FIG. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 250a is uneven. As a result, the light passing through the peripheral lens portion 250a is irregularly refracted. In addition, due to the polyhedral inner surface, the peripheral lens portion 250a can exhibit a sparkling characteristic appearance.

The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 250 from the rear side, and as shown in the figure, corresponds to the portion of the side lens 250 where the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radial lens portion 250b are formed. A main body portion 252a having a recessed rear surface, and a radiation lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body portion 252a and protrudes forward from the main body portion 252a and corresponds to the slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242). and a plate-shaped light guide portion 252b arranged at a position where the light guide portion 252b is located. The main body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252 is formed such that the front surface thereof is located a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 250 . Although not shown in detail, one surface of the body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 has a polyhedral shape formed by a plurality of surfaces facing in different directions, similar to the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. Since the plate thickness of the body portion 252a is uneven, the light passing through the body portion 252a is irregularly refracted.

By combining with the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252 can double irregularly refract the light passing through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a, so that the shape of an object placed on the opposite side can be refracted. It has become almost unrecognizable. In addition, due to irregular refraction and irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape, the appearance of the side lens 250 (peripheral lens portion 250a) can be made sparkling and the perspective can be made to look mysterious.

A plurality of high-brightness color LEDs are mounted on the surfaces of the left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 of the left side decorative unit 240, and the light emitting decorative opening 242g of the side decorative frame 242 (around the side lens 250). The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 250a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°). The LEDs 254b and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 250b) have a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15° to 60°).

The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decorative unit 240 outputs sounds in the mid-to-high range similarly to the side speaker 130, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by an upper speaker bracket 264. there is The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 has a cylindrical horn portion 264a projecting obliquely forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko game machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, and the horn portion 264a prevents the player from seeing the upper left speaker 262 when viewed from the front. It's becoming

The upper left speaker 262 emits sound from the upper part of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the player below by means of the horn part 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, which makes noise in comparison with other pachinko game machines. It's getting harder. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing in different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. 264 is formed in a polyhedral shape by the surfaces of the upper speaker bracket 264, and the thickness of the plate is uneven, so that light passing through the upper speaker bracket 264 is irregularly refracted.

Also, the upper speaker cover 266 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 242 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decorative frame 242. Its surface is formed into a curved shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250 . Further, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed in the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that the sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 266 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing in different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. The surface of the upper speaker cover 266 is formed into a polyhedral shape, and the thickness of the plate is uneven, so that the light passing through the upper speaker cover 266 is irregularly refracted. Therefore, light is irregularly refracted in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the upper left speaker 262 and the through holes 266a formed in the upper speaker cover 266. , the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 can have an appearance similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 250a.

[3-4. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36. FIG. 33 is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34 is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit as seen from the rear.

The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of this embodiment is, as shown in FIG. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has a generally inverted isosceles triangular outer shape when viewed from the front. A front decorative member 281 having a pair of side openings 281b and into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the central opening 281a; A central lens 282 fitted from the rear, an inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, and a pair of side lenses 284 fitted from the rear into the side openings 281b of the front decorative member 281. a main body member 285 having a shape similar to that of the front decorative member 281 and attached to the rear side of the front decorative member 281 so as to sandwich a central lens 282, an inner lens 283, and a pair of side lenses 284 with the front decorative member 281; An upper decoration substrate 286 arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285 and having a plurality of color LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the front surface, and an outer shape of the upper decoration substrate 286 having substantially the same shape as the main body when viewed from the front so as to cover the upper decoration substrate 286 from the rear side. and a board cover 287 attached to the rear surface of the body member 285 .

The upper decorative unit 280 extends rearward while bending continuously from the lower end of the front decorative member 281. The upper front end is supported by the front decorative member 281, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100 downward. a lower decorative member 288 having a pair of lower openings 288a penetrating toward the lower lens 288; , is equipped with In this embodiment, a plated layer having metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front surface decorative member 281 and the lower surface decorative member 288 . The LED 286a of the upper decorative substrate 286 is arranged at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286b is arranged at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be separately decorated with light. Moreover, in this embodiment, the LED 286a is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b is a high-intensity white LED.

In the front decorative member 281 of the upper decorative unit 280, the inner circumference of the central opening 281a is such that, in a front view, the central upper end is a side extending left and right, and the central lower end is a vertex, and each side extends in a gentle arc shape. It is formed in a modified pentagonal shape, and has three protrusions extending into the central opening 281a from approximately the center of the upper side on both sides of the upper side and from the apex of the lower end. The front decorative member 281 has a plurality of lines extending obliquely outward and upward on the outside of the upper side of the central opening 281a. It is formed in a shape that looks like an extended blade, and a side opening 281b is formed along the line carving.

The central lens 282 fitted in the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 has an outer shape substantially the same as that of the central opening 281a. is formed in a polyhedral shape with a plurality of faces facing in different directions. The central lens 282 is made of a transparent (colorless transparent, colored transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a trilliant-cut jewel, and the front decorative member 281 looks like a jewel base. .

The inner lens 283 arranged behind the central lens 282 is made of transparent resin so as to close the opening behind the central lens 282, and has fine lenses (or prisms) on its surface. A plurality of them are formed so that the light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be widely diffused toward the central lens 282 side. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted in the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281 is made of transparent resin so that its front surface is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decorative member 281 when fitted into the side opening 281b. It is A plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the rear surface side of the side lens 284 similarly to the inner lens 283, and the light emitted from the upper decoration substrate 286 illuminates the entire side lens 284 substantially uniformly. It is designed to be able to emit light at

In addition, the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a cloudy feeling due to a plurality of fine lenses formed on the surface, so that the rear side cannot be clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. It's becoming

The main body member 285 of the upper decorative unit 280 has an outer shape that substantially conforms to the shape of the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 and extends cylindrically in the front-rear direction. The central portion 285a is slanted obliquely upward, and the closed rear ends arranged on both sides of the central portion 285a are positioned substantially at the same positions as the rear ends of the central portion 285a, and the front ends extend shorter than the central portion 285a. and a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286 through the central portion 285a and rear end surfaces of the side portions 285b. ing. When the upper decorative board 286 is arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285, the LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is inserted into the opening 285c so that the light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. A central portion 285a and side portions 285b of the main body member 285 are recessed from the front side to the rear side, so that the light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the sides.

In addition, the lower surface decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed so as to taper toward the rear, and the left and right side surfaces of the lower surface decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 are shaped like the upper speaker covers 226 and 226 of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. 266, and the ends of the upper speaker covers 226, 266 near the upper end frames 202c, 242c are placed and fixed. ing. Note that the lower lens 289 is sandwiched between the lower surface decorative member 288 and the upper speaker covers 226 and 266 . Light from the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the left side upper decoration substrate 254 is supplied to the lower lens 289 through the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. It is designed to emit light.

[3-5. side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 on the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. FIG. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and covers the lower ends of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240, and the plate unit 300. is placed between The side speaker cover 290 includes a curved disc-shaped cover body 291 having a plurality of holes so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and supports the outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. a main body member 292 formed so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right-side decoration unit 200 and the left-side decoration unit 240, and a lower plate of the plate unit 300 arranged below the main body member 292. and a lower member 293 formed so as to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328 .

The side speaker cover 290 has a body member 292 on which a plated layer with metallic luster is formed. The lower member 293 is made of a translucent milky white member similar to the lower plate cover 328 of the plate unit 300, which will be described later. This side speaker cover 290 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 .

[3-6. plate unit]
Next, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the tray unit on the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the tray unit on the door frame. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the rear.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 described later. A ball can be supplied to a hitting ball launching device 650 to be described later via a ball feeding unit 580 . As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the plate unit 300 includes a substantially plate-shaped plate unit base 310 fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and a plate unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate body 312 that is fixed to the upper and rear sides and has a large frontwardly bulging left side (rotary support side) when viewed from the front. An upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the directional center protrudes forward, and an upper plate front portion having a plurality of openings 316a attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 and penetrating in the vertical direction. A left and right pair having a decorative member 316 and a plurality of light guides 318a arranged between the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and fitted into the opening 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316. The upper lens 318 of the upper plate and the upper lens 318 are arranged on the opposite side of the upper plate 314 and are attached to the lower surface of the upper plate 314. A plurality of color LEDs 320a and 322a are mounted on the upper surface. The light from the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 arranged between the upper plate upper lens 318 and the upper plate upper panel 314. and an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine prisms for diffusing the light toward the upper plate upper lens 318 side.

The plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 at the lower side of the upper plate main body 312 and is open at the upper and rear sides. A dish-shaped lower plate body 324 is formed so as to become lower as it goes, and is fixed to the upper portion of the lower plate body 324. When viewed from the front, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in substantially the same way as the lower plate body 324, and the front end extends in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped lower tray top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center, and an opening 328a along the front ends of the lower tray top plate 326 and the lower tray main body 324 and covering the outer circumference of the opening 328a. A cover 328, a dish-side intermediate cover 330 having openings 330a disposed on both left and right sides of the lower dish cover 328 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a dish-side intermediate cover fitted into the opening 330a of the dish-side intermediate cover 330 from the rear side. A lens 332 and a dish side outer cover 334 arranged on both left and right outer sides of the dish side middle cover 330 and extending in the left and right direction to positions corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100 are provided. A lock hole 330b is formed at the right end of the dish side middle cover 330 arranged on the right side in a front view so that a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later, faces. A handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front is formed in the dish side outer cover 334 on the right side in front view.

Further, the plate unit 300 includes an upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 for removing game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. A lower tray ball extracting mechanism 350 attached to the lower surface for extracting game balls stored in the lower tray 302 downward, and a lower tray ball extracting mechanism 350 attached to the upper left side of the tray unit base 310 in front view and installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1. and a ball rental unit 360 that operates a CR unit (not shown).

The plate unit 300 constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, an upper plate main body 312, an upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Also, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls by a portion of the plate unit base 310, a lower plate main body 324, a lower plate top plate 326, a lower plate cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 39, the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate-like shape extending in the left-right direction. are provided. A ball rental unit mounting portion 310b for mounting a ball rental unit 360 is formed through the left end of the decoration portion 310a in the longitudinal direction. The plate unit base 310 includes an upper plate ball supply port 310c arranged below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) and penetrating in the longitudinal direction in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and an upper plate ball supply port 310c. An upper tray ball discharge port 310d penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically below the right end of the decorative portion 310a below the opening 310c (approximately in the middle of the plate unit base 310 in the height direction), and an upper plate. A pair of lower plate support portions 310e are arranged directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same top surface. In addition, the upper tray ball outlet 310d is formed continuously up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower tray support portion 310e arranged directly below.

The tray unit 300 is disposed between a pair of lower tray support portions 310e and is fitted with the lower tray main body 324 and the rear end of the lower tray top plate 326 to form a horizontally long rectangular annular lower tray support when viewed from the front. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower tray ball supply port 310g that is arranged in the lower part of the part surrounded by the lower tray support groove 310f and is located on the right side of the center and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 40, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h that extends cylindrically rearward so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. A cutout portion 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass is provided.

The upper tray ball supply port 310c of the tray unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the cutouts 101a and 162 of the door frame base body 110 and the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the first bulb outlet 544 a of the unit 540 . The front end of the upper tray ball supply port 310c is provided with a guide recess 310j that extends long to the right in front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is slanted so that the right end side in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is slanted so that the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the front side of the upper tray ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper tray 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 through the foul cover unit 540 Since it is not possible to come out straight from the upper tray ball supply port 310c into the front upper tray 301, the paid out game ball comes into contact with the game ball that closes the front side of the upper tray ball supply port 310c and rolls. The movement direction changes, the ball is guided to roll rightward in the front view inside the guide recess 310j, and is released from near the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper tray 301. becomes. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in two stages, upper and lower, in the upper tray 301, so that when the game balls block the front of the upper tray ball supply port 310c, the player does not move the game balls by hand. It is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls that have been paid out into the upper tray 301 even if the game balls are stored in the upper tray 301, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling annoyed by the storage of the game balls in the upper tray 301. To prevent a player from losing interest in a game by devoting himself to the operation of hitting the game ball or playing the game with the hit game ball, and to increase the amount of game balls stored in the upper tray 301.例文帳に追加can be done.

The upper tray ball discharge port 310d of the tray unit base 310 includes the opening 344a of the upper tray ball removal base 344 of the upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 and the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the lower tray ball supply port 310g has a lower tray ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side thereof, which penetrates the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the notch 310i of the lower tray ball supply gutter 310h is connected to the upper tray ball extraction mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal channel 344c of the upper dish ball removal base 344. As shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower tray ball supply port 310g is provided with a widening portion 310k that widens leftward in a front view, and the lower tray ball supply port 310k is used to supply the lower tray balls. The front end of the mouth 310g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the early occurrence of ball clogging in the lower tray ball supply port 310g due to the game balls in the lower tray 302 accumulated in front of the lower tray ball supply port 310g, so that more games can be played. Balls can be supplied into the lower plate 302 .

The upper plate main body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (rotary support side) bulges forward from the center when viewed from the front, and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. there is The bottom surface of the upper tray main body 312 has a rear end near the bottom of the upper tray ball supply opening 310c in the tray unit base 310 on the pivot side, and a rear end on the open side near the upper tray ball discharge opening 310d in the tray unit base 310. They are formed so as to be positioned near the middle positions in the vertical direction, respectively, and game balls supplied from the upper tray ball supply port 310c to the upper tray main body 312 (upper tray 301) are guided to the upper tray ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

The upper plate main body 312 has a metal upper plate rail 312a attached to the open side from the center in the left-right direction at the rear end of the bottom surface and capable of coming into contact with the game ball. Although illustration is omitted, the upper tray rail 312a is electrically grounded (earthed) so that the static electricity charged to the game ball can be removed.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate main body 312 so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction projects forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate main body 312. is formed with a mounting hole 314a penetrating in the vertical direction and into which an upper tray ball extracting button 341 of an upper tray ball extracting mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 has a stepped portion 314b formed at the front end thereof so as to be one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312 and for mounting the upper plate front decorative member 316 thereon. An operation unit mounting portion 314c is formed in a stepped shape lower than the decoration mounting portion 314b at a position on the front side of the plate main body 312 and for mounting an operation unit 400, which will be described later.

Although detailed description is omitted, the decoration mounting stepped portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 has upper and lower portions corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 attached to the lower surface. An opening and a notch are formed to penetrate in the direction, and an opening through which a wiring cable connecting the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control board 4140 can pass is formed in the operation unit mounting portion 314c. .

The upper plate front decorative member 316 has a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the light guide portion of the upper plate upper lens 318 passes through the plurality of openings 316a from below. The upper lens 318 can be sandwiched between the upper plate upper panel 314 and the upper plate upper panel 314 by attaching the upper plate upper lens 318 to the decorative mounting portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 . Further, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine lenses (prisms) on its surface is arranged below the upper plate upper lens 318 , and an upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and an upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are arranged. By sufficiently diffusing the light from the upper plate 318, the entire upper lens 318 can be illuminated substantially uniformly. As shown in the figure, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a in the upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted in the opening 316a is similar. By fitting the light guide portion 318a, the opening 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316 has an appearance as if a pair-shaped cut jewel was fitted therein. .

The lower plate main body 324 of the plate unit 300 includes a bottom plate 324a that spreads forward in a fan shape in a plan view, the rear end of which is formed in a straight line in the horizontal direction, and the bottom plate 324a that is formed so that the approximate center of the upper surface is the lowest, and the center of the bottom plate 324a. and side plates 324c rising upward from the front and side ends of the bottom plate 324a except for the rear end. The side plate 324c of the lower tray main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is lowest at the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side. The upper end that rises upward from the end is formed in a linear shape, and both the left and right ends of the lower tray top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

The bottom plate 324a and the rear ends of the side plates 324c of the lower plate main body 324 are inserted and supported in the lower plate support grooves 310f formed in the front surface of the plate unit base 310. As shown in FIG. The lower tray ball removal hole 324b of the lower tray main body 324 is closed by an open/close shutter 352 of a lower tray ball removal mechanism 350 arranged on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower tray cover 328 is formed in an inverted triangular shape in which each side bulges downward when viewed from the front, and has an opening 328a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center. The inner shape of this opening 328a is made to match the shape formed by the lower tray main body 324 and the front end of the lower tray top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower tray 302. As shown in FIG. In addition, the lower tray cover 328 is made of translucent milky white resin, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged at predetermined intervals on the back side of the lower tray cover 328, and the entire lower tray cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

The pan side middle covers 330 are arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower pan cover 328 when viewed from the front, and are arranged along the lower sides of the lower pan cover 328 from approximately the center in the horizontal direction to the side surfaces of the door frame 5 when viewed from the front. The upper rear end extending to the side of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 . The dish-side middle cover 330 has an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a dish-side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Furthermore, a lock hole 330b penetrates in the longitudinal direction at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 in the vicinity of the outer end (right end) of the right (open side) dish side middle cover 330 in a front view. is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces from this lock hole 330b.

The dish side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330c extending rearward from the lower front end thereof, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It's like A bottom plate portion 330c of the plate side middle cover 330 covers a part of the lower side of the lower plate main body 324. As shown in FIG.

The dish side outer covers 334 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the dish side inner cover 330 when viewed from the front, and have a substantially triangular shape along the side and bottom sides of the door frame 5 when viewed from the front, and are open rearward and upward. It is formed in a box shape. In this embodiment, a right (open side) dish side outer cover 334 is formed with a handle insertion hole 334a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 . The dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and partially attached to the dish unit base 310 . Further, the lower side of the lower plate main body 324 except for the central portion is covered by the plate side outer cover 334 and the plate side inner cover 330 .

The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 includes an upper tray ball removal button 341 that is attached to the mounting hole 314a of the upper tray upper panel 314 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction, and the upper tray ball removal button 341. An operating piece 342 supported on the front side of the dish unit base 310 by moving up and down larger than the up and down movement of the upper tray ball ejecting button 341, and a ball feeding unit 580 which slides in the vertical direction due to the vertical movement of the operating piece 342. An upper tray ball removal slider 343 disposed on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 and an upper tray ball removal slider 343 are slidable in the vertical direction. and an upper tray ball removal base 344 attached to the rear side of the supporting tray unit base 310 .

Although not shown in detail, the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340 has an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper tray ball removing button 341 so that the upper tray ball removing button 341 is positioned at the upper movement end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 343 is biased upward by a coil spring provided between it and the upper bowl ball extraction base 344 .

The upper tray ball removal base 344 of the upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper tray ball discharge port 310d of the tray unit base 310, and at the same time, communicates with the upper tray ball discharge port 310d to open forward. 39), and a ball guiding passage 344b (FIGS. 38 and 38) that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper tray ball extraction base 344 and guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then backward. 40), and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guide channel 344b, extend substantially along the lower side of the upper tray ball extraction base 344 toward the end on the right side (rotary support side) in rear view. A ball extraction channel 344c through which game balls can flow is provided.

The upper tray ball extraction base 344 has an opening 344a that communicates with the upper tray ball discharge port 310d, and a lower end of a ball guide passage 344b that communicates with the opening 344a. It communicates with an entrance 581a of a ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 via the feeding opening 113, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. can be supplied to

The upper end of the ball extraction channel 344c of the upper tray ball extraction base 344, which is adjacent to the ball guide channel 344b, communicates with the ball extraction port 581b of the ball transfer unit 580 via the ball transfer opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower tray ball supply gutter 310h in the tray unit base 310, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 are removed. It can be guided to the lower tray 302 . A lower rear end portion of the ball removal channel 344c is closed by an upper plate ball removal channel cover 345. As shown in FIG.

In this upper bowl ball extracting mechanism 340, when the upper bowl ball extracting button 341 is pressed downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper bowl ball extracting slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward also moves. Move down. As the contact piece 343a moves downward, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 rotates in a predetermined direction. As a result, the partition between the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred from the upper tray ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 via the opening 344a of the upper tray ball extraction base 344 and the ball guide passage 344b. After entering the ball outlet 581b, the ball is discharged from the ball outlet 581b into the ball outlet channel 344c of the upper tray ball outlet base 344, and through the lower tray ball supply trough 310h of the tray unit base 310, from the lower tray ball supply opening 310g to the lower tray 302. can be discharged to

The ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper tray ball removing slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring. Even if a game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that biases the upper tray ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c. It is possible to prevent damage, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off the partition portion 583a.

The lower tray ball removal mechanism 350 in the tray unit 300 includes a lower tray ball removal base 351 arranged between the bottom plate portions 330c of the tray side middle covers 330 arranged on the left and right sides in the front view on the lower side of the lower tray main body 324. , a plate-like open/close shutter 352 which is rotatably supported on the upper surface of a lower pan ball extractor base 351 and can open and close the lower pan ball extractor hole 324b of the lower pan main body 324; A lower dish ball extractor slider 353 supported on the upper surface of a ball extractor base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball extractor button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball extractor slider 353 are provided.

The lower tray ball removal base 351 has a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating vertically at a position facing the lower tray ball removal hole 324b of the lower tray main body 324. As shown in FIG. The open/close shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower tray ball removal hole 324b, and a shutter ball removal hole disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in the vertical direction and substantially coinciding with the lower tray ball removal hole 324b. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is urged by a coil spring between it and the lower tray ball extraction base 351 so as to be positioned to close the lower tray ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a.

Although not shown in detail, the open/close shutter 352 has a contact pin that can come into contact with the lower plate ball removal slider 353. When this contact pin contacts the lower plate ball removal slider 353, , the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b are rotated rearward by the lower disk ball removal slider 353, and the lower disk ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the urging force of the coil spring. is now possible.

As shown in the figure, the lower tray ball release button 354 is arranged at a position sandwiched between the left and right tray side middle covers 330 below the center of the lower tray cover 328 in the horizontal direction of the tray unit 300 . The surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the surface shape of the plate side middle cover 330 are smoothly continuous with each other.

In addition, the lower tray ball removal mechanism 350 is configured so that the shutter ball removal hole 352b of the open/close shutter 352 is substantially coincident with the lower tray ball removal hole 324b of the lower tray main body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower tray ball removal base 351. A holding mechanism 355 is further provided for holding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 in place to hold it in the moving position.

When the surface shape of the lower tray ball removal button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower tray cover 328 and the like, the lower tray ball removal mechanism 350 is closed when the lower tray ball removal button 354 is moved to the front end. The closing portion 352a of the open/close shutter 352 closes the lower tray ball extraction hole 324b of the lower tray main body 324. As shown in FIG. In this state, game balls can be stored in the lower tray main body 324 (lower tray 302). When the lower tray ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed backward, the lower tray ball removal button 354 and the lower tray ball removal slider 353 slide rearward, and the lower tray ball removal slider 353 slides rearward to open and close. The shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b move rearward.

As the open/close shutter 352 rotates backward, the shutter ball removal hole 352b overlaps with the lower tray ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a. 324b, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward from the tray unit 300 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 324b. When the lower tray ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower tray ball removal hole 324b are substantially aligned, the lower tray ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. By locking (holding) the slide of the lower pan ball extracting slider 353, the lower pan ball extracting button 354 remains in an open state in which it retreats rearward, and the shutter ball extracting hole 352b is opened. The game balls stored in the lower tray 302 can be ejected downward even if the lower tray ball extraction button 354 is not kept pressed.

On the other hand, when closing the lower tray ball removal hole 324b, pressing the retracted open lower tray ball removal button 354 further rearward releases the lower tray ball removal slider 353 from being held by the holding mechanism 355. The ball removal slider 353 is slidable, and the open/close shutter 352 is biased by the coil spring in the direction in which the closing portion 352a closes the lower plate ball removal hole 324b. It rotates in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball extraction hole 324b. As the open/close shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower tray ball removal slider 353 slides forward, the lower tray ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower tray ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the closed state position substantially coinciding with the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 302.例文帳に追加

Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above function, and the detailed explanation of the mechanism is omitted.

A ball rental unit 360 in the plate unit 300 has a ball rental button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pushed backward, and a rental balance display portion 363 between the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 . When the ball rental button 361 is operated, it is detected by a ball rental switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by a return switch 365b. The display content of the remaining credit display 365c can be visually recognized through the remaining loan display section 363. FIG. The ball rental switch 365 a , the return switch 365 b , and the remaining score display 365 c are mounted on a score display plate 365 , and this score display plate 365 is attached inside the ball rental unit 360 . This ball lending unit 360 puts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and presses a ball lending button 361 to provide a predetermined number of game balls to the plate unit. 300 can be lent (paid out) into the upper tray 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the lent cash and the prepaid card will be returned after subtracting the balance of the lent amount. ing. In addition, the balance of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed on the balance of lending display section 363 .

The ball rental unit 360 is attached to the ball rental unit attachment portion 310b formed in the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the plate unit base 310 from the rear side. In addition, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a crime prevention cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the pivot side (left side in front view) of the crime prevention cover 180 .

[3-7. operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 46. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit viewed from the upper front right side, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit viewed from the lower front right side. Further, FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the operating unit, and FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view showing the pressing operation portion of the operating unit in a pressed state.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged on the front surface of the upper tray 301 at the approximate center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. It is equipped with an operation unit 405, which can accept the player's operation according to the game state, and can move the dial operation unit 401. , to be able to participate in the production during the game.

This operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation portion 401 , a cylindrical pressing operation portion 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation portion 401 , and an annular driven portion 405 connected to the lower end of the dial operation portion 401 . A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 to which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation portion holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that supports the pressing operation portion 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction; A base member having an opening 420a through which a spring 418 biasing upward and a gear rail 416a and a button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 can pass, and to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial driving motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface. 420, an upper cover 422 covering the upper surface of the base member 420 and having an opening 422a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operating portion 401 can pass; A lower cover 424 that covers the lower surface of the member 420 and the dial drive motor 414 is mainly provided.

In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the driven gear 410 is twice the number of teeth of the driving gear 412, that is, the reduction ratio is set to 2. When the drive gear 412 rotates twice, the driven gear 410 meshing with the drive gear 412 rotates once. The dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor whose output shaft rotates by 15° in one step and by 360° in 24 steps. Therefore, when the output shaft of the dial driving motor 414 rotates by 15° in one step, the drive gear 412 fixed to this output shaft also rotates by 15°, and this rotation is transmitted to the driven gear 410, and the reduction ratio is 2. As a result, the dial operating portion 401 connected to the driven gear 410 also rotates 30° together with the driven gear 410 .

The operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and extends outward from an opening 426a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to an operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the cover main body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the upper surface of the base member 420. A dial decoration board 430 having an opening 430a through which the button support cylinder 416b and the inner cylinder part 401a of the dial operation part 401 can pass, and on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of the dial operation part 401 on the upper surface. , a pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b fixed to the lower side of the base member 420 for detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401, a press detection switch 432c for detecting operation of the press operation unit 405, and the press operation unit 405. and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below.

The dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is made of a translucent material, and includes a cylindrical inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and a surface extending outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder portion 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b with a predetermined decoration (specifically, a design having smooth unevenness is given), and a cylindrical top plate portion 401b extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b. It mainly includes an outer cylindrical portion 401c that is shorter than the inner cylindrical portion 401a, and a collar portion 401d that annularly extends outward from the lower end of the outer cylindrical portion 401c. The outer diameter of the collar portion 401 d of the dial operating portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a of the upper cover 422 . In addition, the dial operation portion 401 has a connection locking portion (see FIG. 44) at the lower end of the inner cylindrical portion 401a, and by locking the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410, the dial operation portion 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected. Further, the dial operating portion 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes toward the center from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a at a position lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. A projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner cylindrical portion 401a. Although the details will be described later, this projecting portion 401f can come into contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from further retracting into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 46).

As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 are arranged such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. slanted surfaces, so that the contact area becomes large when they come into contact with each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be more dispersed (relieved) to the dial operation portion 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation portion 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation portion 405 side. It has become.

Further, the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a closed upper end, and includes a cylindrical button body 406 with a bottom, a button cap 407 closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407 . The button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a truncated cone shape that tapers downward as the lower surface of the bottom portion goes downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a is provided in the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape and penetrates vertically through the through hole 406a. It's like

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b extending downward from the lower part of the outer periphery and having lower ends protruding outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By engaging with a locking protrusion 416g (see FIGS. 45 and 46) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is restrained so that the button main body 406 does not slip out of the button support cylinder 416b. can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 is provided with an abutting portion that prevents the engaging claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support tube 416b. A gap of a predetermined amount is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the abutting portion in the button support cylinder 416b. It is designed to be able to rotate within a range.

Further, the button body 406 has a press detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer periphery lower portion of the button body 406b and that can be detected by a press detection switch 432c of the button decoration substrate 432. As shown in FIG. When the button main body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418, the pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection switch 432c.

Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller outer diameter below the approximate center in the vertical direction than the upper side. is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 below the stepped portion 407a, and has a dial operation portion above the stepped portion 407a. 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a and a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. , the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be retracted further into the inner cylinder portion 401a (see FIG. 46).

Furthermore, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation portion 405 are made of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408 , and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407 .

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the driving gear 412 on its annular outer circumference. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b of the operating portion holding member 416, and has an annular slide on the lower surface thereof that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416. It has a moving surface 410a. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

In addition, the driven gear 410 has a pair of connecting locking claws 410b that extend upward from opposite positions on the upper end and protrude inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operating portion 401 are connected to each other so as to be rotatable together by being engaged with the connection engaging portion 401e of the inner cylindrical portion 401a.

The driven gear 410 also has a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432. Although the details will be described later, the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. With the slit 410d formed therebetween, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operating portion 401 can be detected by the detection patterns of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this embodiment, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detecting piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

Further, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to be rotatable integrally with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 . The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control the direction of rotation, the speed of rotation, and the angle of rotation. , the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410 . In addition, the dial driving motor 414 rotates the driving gear 412 (rotating shaft) alternately in the forward direction and the reverse direction, so that the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise and counterclockwise. Since the rotation can be alternately repeated in small steps, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated. Further, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for a short period of time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 can be suppressed by clicking. It is designed to be able to give a feeling.

Furthermore, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a cylindrical button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. and a locking protrusion 416g ( 45 and 46), and a through hole 416c that passes through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and transmits the light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 into the button support cylinder 416b (press operation unit 405). An opening 416d through which the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 can pass vertically through the bottom outside the button support cylinder 416b, and the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b. an opening 416e through which a press detection switch 432c attached to the button decoration substrate 432 faces from above; I have it.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation portion holding member 416 is arranged in the button support cylinder 416b, forms a predetermined amount of gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and locks the locking claw 406b. It further includes a plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claws 406b. This abutting portion allows the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angular range, and prevents it from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, the operation unit holding member 416 has screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, etc., which are appropriately positioned. provided for.

The driven gear 410 is inserted through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b, and placed on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be dynamically rotatable. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the bottom surface of the button main body 406 in the shape of a truncated cone. 405) is biased upward.

The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is made of metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is less likely to break even if the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is strongly struck. The base member 420 includes a lower concave portion 420b recessed upward into which the outer periphery of the operating portion holding member 416 can be fitted, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b. an opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass; an upper recess 420c recessed downward and capable of accommodating at least the driven gear 410, which is arranged on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b; It has As shown in FIG. 44, the base member 420 has a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 which opens downward outside the lower recessed portion 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d which opens downward from the outside of the lower recessed portion 420b. It has a plurality of (four in this embodiment) leg portions 420e that protrude by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f that open downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e.

In addition, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged upwardly outside the upper recessed portion 420c, and the cover fixing portions 420g are arranged upwardly from different positions outside the upper recessed portion 420c. A plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the protruding dial decoration board 430 are provided. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 has positioning bosses, mounting holes, etc. for positioning each member at appropriate positions on its upper and lower surfaces.

This base member 420 has an opening 420a in the center, and the operation portion holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower recessed portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from below. is screwed into the operating section holding member 416 from above through the ceiling of the lower recessed portion 420b, so that the operating section holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, when the operating portion holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the lower recessed portion 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recessed portion 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

A positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end of the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 is fitted with a positioning projection 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of a lower cover 424, which will be described later. 420 and lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions relative to each other. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is attached to the driven gear 420h. It is kept out of contact with the gear 410 .

Further, the dial drive motor 414 is attached to the motor attachment portion 420d of the base member 420, so that the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 and the surface of the base member 420 are in contact with each other. , and the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420 . As a result, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, thereby preventing malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an inner diameter opening 422a through which the outer cylindrical portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass but the collar portion 401d cannot pass. ing. This upper cover 422 has a direction connecting the axial center of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axial center of the dial driving motor 414 (driving gear 412) (horizontal direction in the pachinko game machine 1) in plan view. It is formed to extend long, and has engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction. The upper cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled together.

The upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer circumference of one side (the front side in the pachinko game machine 1) of the short axis direction (the front and back direction in the pachinko game machine 1), and the lower end protrudes outward. It has a piece 422c. This locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316 of the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decorative member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from slipping upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

The upper cover 422 is a base member 420 to which the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration board 430, the dial operation unit 401, etc. are attached, and the dial operation unit 401 is mounted from below the opening 422a. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so that the dial operation part 401 can pass through, the opening 422a can prevent the dial operation part 401 from coming off upward.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box-like shape with an open top, and the outer circumference of the lower cover 424 has a shape that substantially matches the outer circumference of the upper cover 422 . A positioning projection 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420e is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at the upper portions of both ends in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko game machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

As shown, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a vertically penetrating the center through which the dial operation portion 401 (excluding the flange portion 401d) can pass, and extending outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the tray unit 300, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided. .

The operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426. Although detailed illustration is omitted, when the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300, The lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is mounted in a state slightly floating (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) from the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. When the cover body 426 is pushed or hit, the cover main body 426 is elastically deformed to reduce the impact.

With the surface cover 428 removed, the operation unit 400 attaches the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with predetermined screws. The structure is such that a surface cover 428 is attached to the upper surface.

In the operation unit 400 of this embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation part 401 has a circumferential length in a slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is assumed to be the same length. The pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 has a circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operating portion 401 that is 2.5 times the circumferential length of the rotation detection piece 410c. It is said that As a result, although the details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs between detection and non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. From the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the detection switches 432a and 432b, it is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating.

Further, the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can rotate the dial operation section 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414, which will be described later in detail. there is In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation section 401 step by step by the driving force of a dial driving motor 414 using a stepping motor, and rotates the dial operation section 401 when the player rotates the dial operation section 401. It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from rotating on purpose, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation section 401 by alternately repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the dial driving motor 414 in small steps.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts against the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, thereby pressing the button. Since the cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation portion 405 is transferred to the stepped portion 407a and the projecting portion 401f. It can be distributed to the dial operation section 401 side via the press operation section 405 (operation unit 400) so that it is difficult to break.

Further, the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment presses the pressing operation portion 405 to bring the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 into contact with each other, and the dial driving motor 414 is rotated in small increments. By alternately repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation, it is possible to vibrate not only the dial operation unit 401 but also the pressing operation unit 405, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 surprises the player to play games. It is designed so that you can enjoy the performance.

Next, dial vibration control that can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the dial driving motor 414 in small increments will be described. The dial drive motor 414 is, as described above, a stepping motor whose output shaft rotates by 15° in one step and by 360° in 24 steps. Therefore, when the output shaft of the dial driving motor 414 rotates by 15° in one step, the driving gear 412 fixed to this output shaft also rotates by 15°, and this rotation is transmitted to the driven gear 410, and the reduction ratio is 2. As a result, the dial operating portion 401 connected to the driven gear 410 also rotates 30° together with the driven gear 410 .

The output shaft of the dial driving motor 414 is rotated forward by one step and then reversed by one step. can be alternately rotated clockwise and counterclockwise in small increments to create a state as if the dial operation unit 401 were vibrating. Since the surface of the top plate portion 401b of the dial operation unit 401 is designed to have smooth unevenness, the dial operation unit 401 can be alternately rotated clockwise and counterclockwise in small increments. When the player's finger or palm touches the top plate portion 401b of the dial operation unit 401, the finger or palm is moved by the smooth unevenness on the surface of the top plate portion 401b, and vibration is applied to the game. It is also possible to make people feel it.

Specifically, the dial excitation control in which the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is alternately rotated by one step forward and reversely is performed by the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 (Fig. 100). The peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of this peripheral control unit 4150 receives a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 100) (for example, a special figure 1 synchronization effect start command classified as special figure 1 synchronization effect related , special figure 2 synchronization production start command (see FIG. 120) classified into special figure 2 synchronization production related, etc.), based on this received command, the peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on processing described later In the unit steady process (see steps S1009 to S1038 in FIG. 145), dial vibration is performed according to schedule data for alternately repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the output shaft of dial drive motor 414 by one step. control. The dial vibration control schedule data defines the start time and end time of the dial vibration control, and a plurality of schedule data are stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150. . The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs dial vibration control according to the schedule data in the motor and solenoid drive processing (see step S1104 in FIG. 147) in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later.

Next, rotation direction change control for rotating the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise will be described. As described above, the dial operation unit 401 is connected to the driven gear 410. A plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c arranged in rows on the driven gear 410 at regular intervals are detected by a pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. The direction of rotation is detected based on the detected pattern.

Rotational direction change control changes the direction of rotation when the player's finger or palm touches the dial operation unit 401 while the dial operation unit 401 is being rotated clockwise and rotation of the dial operation unit 401 stops. to start rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the counterclockwise direction, or when the player's finger or palm touches the dial operation unit 401 while rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the counterclockwise direction, the dial operation unit 401 rotates. stops rotating, the direction of rotation is reversed and the dial operation unit 401 starts rotating clockwise. When the dial operation unit 401 stops rotating, the driven gear 410 connected to the dial operation unit 401 also stops rotating. The rotation of the output shaft of is also stopped, and the dial drive motor 414, which is a stepping motor, is out of step. As described above, in this embodiment, the dial drive motor 414, which is a stepping motor, can be stepped out at will of the player. can forcibly stop the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 or change the direction of rotation.

Specifically, it is performed by the peripheral controller 4150 (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral controller board 4140 . The peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of this peripheral control unit 4150 receives a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 100) (for example, a special figure 1 synchronization effect start command classified as special figure 1 synchronization effect related , special figure 2 synchronization production start command (see FIG. 120) classified into special figure 2 synchronization production related, etc.), based on this received command, the peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on processing described later In the normal process (see steps S1009 to S1038 in FIG. 145), rotation direction change control is performed according to schedule data for rotating the output shaft of the dial driving motor 414 forward and backward. The schedule data for this rotational direction change control prescribes the rotation start timing and rotation end timing of the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, and is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150. Multiple stored. The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs a rotation detection switch history creation process (see FIG. 150) executed as one process of the operation unit information acquisition process (see step S1108 in FIG. 147) in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process to be described later. Based on the created rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST, whether the dial operation unit 401 is stopped (in other words, whether the dial drive motor 414 is out of step) , is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. ), and perform rotation direction change control according to the schedule data.

For example, when the dial operation unit 401 is currently being rotated clockwise, the peripheral control MPU 4150a detects that the dial operation unit 401 is rotating clockwise based on the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST. When it is recognized that the dial operation unit 401 is in a state where the dial operation unit 401 is in a stopped state (in other words, a state in which the dial operation unit 401 is stopped (in other words, When it is detected that the dial driving motor 414 is out of step or is rotating counterclockwise, it performs rotation direction change control according to the schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 counterclockwise. .

Further, when the dial operation unit 401 is currently rotated counterclockwise, the peripheral control MPU 4150a detects that the dial operation unit 401 is rotated counterclockwise from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST. When it is grasped that the dial operation unit 401 is in a state where the dial operation unit 401 is stopped ( In other words, when the dial driving motor 414 is out of step or is rotating clockwise, the rotation direction change control is performed according to the schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 clockwise. conduct.

As described above, both the dial vibration control and the rotation direction change control rotate the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 forward or reverse, but the latter rotation direction change control is performed by the dial operation unit 401 is actually reversed to the direction intended by the peripheral control MPU 4150a or is stopped, whereas the former dial vibration control is executed when an external factor occurs. is completely different in that the period during which the output shaft of the dial driving motor 414 is rotated forward or reverse is preset and executed regardless of the occurrence of an external factor.

Further, in the rotation direction change control, when the dial drive motor 414 is found to be out of step, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is suddenly changed to the reverse rotation direction. is completely different in vibrating the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, in the rotation direction change control, the production feeling completely different from the production feeling using the dial operation unit 401 created by the dial vibration control is the same. can be created using the dial operation unit 401 of .

Next, click generation control capable of imparting a click feeling to the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 will be described. Since the dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor as described above, static torque can be generated in the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 by maintaining an energized state (excited state) to a specific phase of the stepping motor. can be done. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a first static torque generation state in which a static torque is generated by maintaining an excited state for one specific phase, and a static torque generation state in which a static torque is generated by maintaining an excited state for one specific phase A second stationary torque generating state for generating torque is adopted.

In the first static torque generation state, when rotating the dial operation unit 401 beyond the static torque in this state, the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is driven by the driven gear 410 and the dial driving gear 412 is fixed. When it is transmitted to the output shaft of the motor 414, the output shaft rotates one step at a time, that is, rotates by 15 degrees, and this out-of-step and jerky rotation is transmitted as a click feeling of the dial operation unit 401. . Even in the second static torque generation state, if the dial operation unit 401 is rotated beyond the static torque in this state, the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is driven by the driven gear 410 and the dial driving gear 412 is fixed. When it is transmitted to the output shaft of the motor 414, the output shaft rotates one step at a time, that is, rotates by 15 degrees, and this out-of-step and jerky rotation is transmitted as a click feeling of the dial operation unit 401. .

In the second static torque generation state, since the excitation state is maintained for the specific two phases, two specific phases are maintained for the first static torque generation state in which the excitation state is maintained for the specific one phase. Double static torque can be obtained. In other words, the click feeling of the dial operating unit 401 in the second static torque generating state is twice the click feeling of the dial operating unit 401 in the first static torque generating state.

The stepping motor is normally controlled to prevent the stepping motor from going out of control. A click feeling can be obtained from the rotation operation of the dial 401, and by generating the click feeling in two stages, the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the first static torque generation state can be lightly felt. On the other hand, the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the second static torque generation state can be felt heavy.

Specifically, the click generation control that can give a click feeling to the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is performed by the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control board 4140 . The peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of this peripheral control unit 4150 receives a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 100) (for example, a special figure 1 synchronization effect start command classified as special figure 1 synchronization effect related , special figure 2 synchronization production start command (see FIG. 120) classified into special figure 2 synchronization production related, etc.), based on this received command, the peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on processing described later In the steady-state process (see steps S1009 to S1038 in FIG. 145), click generation control is performed according to schedule data for generating static torque on the output shaft of the dial driving motor 414. FIG. The schedule data for this click generation control defines when to generate static torque on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 and when to stop it. are stored in advance. The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs click generation control according to the schedule data in motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing (see step S1104 in FIG. 147).

As described above, the click generation control is executed when the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, whereas the rotation direction change control is executed while the dial operation unit 401 is rotating. They are completely different in that they are things. In the click generation control, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated, there is a click feeling. Since it is completely different in that the direction of rotation is changed suddenly in the reverse direction, the click generation control provides a completely different feeling from the effect created using the dial operation unit 401 created by the rotation direction change control using the same dial operation. It can be created using the part 401 .

Here, torque-free control in which no static torque is applied to the output shaft of dial drive motor 414 will be described. In this torque-free control, all phases of dial drive motor 414 are in a non-energized state (non-excited state), and the output shaft of dial drive motor 414 is torque-free. That is, even if the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise, no load, click feeling, or the like that hinders the operation is generated.

To briefly explain the effect using the torque-free control, for example, by operating the dial operation unit 401, an effect screen selected as the dial operation unit 401 is rotated is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 95). At the same time, the click generation control described above provides the dial operation unit 401 with a click feeling. , the click generation control is stopped and the torque is free, that is, the transition to the torque free control can be used to select a performance screen not intended by the player (scooping the leg). In other words, in the click generation control, a static torque is generated in the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, whereas in the torque free control, the generated static torque is forcibly released so that the player's finger or Since the static torque, which is the load applied to the palm of the hand from the dial operation unit 401, can be suddenly removed, the forceful cancellation of the static torque causes the player's fingers and palm to feel slippery when rotating the dial operation unit 401. will be granted to

Thus, in this embodiment, in addition to the conventional idea of using a stepping motor to drive a movable body, it is based on a completely new idea of using a stepping motor as a man-machine interface.

In this embodiment, although not shown, the peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control board 4140 performs operation unit information acquisition processing in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later (step S1108 in FIG. 147). (see FIG. 150), which is executed as one process, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST created in the rotation detection switch history creation process (see FIG. 150) indicates that the dial operation unit 401 is stopped. Since it is grasped whether it is rotating clockwise or rotating counterclockwise, the player can irrespective of the progress of the production (for example, the production and It is possible to monitor the presence or absence of the dial operation unit 401 by linking and operating the dial operation unit 401 (effect other than prompting the operation, etc.). As a result, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a recognizes that the dial operation unit 401 is being operated by the player's finger or palm, the peripheral control MPU 4150a rotates the dial operation unit 401 clockwise by rotating the output shaft of the dial driving motor 414. Alternatively, the action of rotating counterclockwise is imparted so that it rotates against the direction of rotation of the dial operation unit 401 by the player.

When the peripheral control MPU 4150a recognizes that the dial operation unit 401 is being operated by the player's finger or palm, the peripheral control MPU 4150a rotates the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 to operate the dial operation unit 401. is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise according to the schedule data. The schedule data for this rotational behavior imparting control defines the rotational direction, rotational speed, etc. for rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b (see FIG. A plurality of them are stored in advance. The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs rotational behavior imparting control according to the schedule data in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing (see step S1104 in FIG. 147).

In this way, when the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 recognizes that the dial operation unit 401 is being operated by the player's finger or palm regardless of the progress of the performance, the dial drive motor 414 is turned on. Since a behavior is imparted to the dial operation unit 401 by rotating the output shaft, the dial operation unit 401 suddenly starts moving. In other words, when the player performs a nonsensical operation on the dial operation unit 401 that is completely unrelated to the performance, the pachinko game machine 1 responds to this by giving a behavior to the dial operation unit 401. , the player behaves so as to warn the player not to perform meaningless operations on the dial operation unit 401 . Such behavior by the dial operation unit 401 can give the player an impression as if the pachinko game machine 1 has a will. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel game with the operating member.

[3-8. handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame, seen from behind. As illustrated, the handle device 500 of this embodiment is attached to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the dish side outer cover 334 of the dish unit 300. A handle base 502 which is fixed and has a cylindrical shape and whose front end is rounded in the direction perpendicular to the axis, an annular rotary handle body rear 504 which is arranged on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the handle base 502, and a rotary handle. A front rotating handle body 506 fixed to the front surface of the rear body 504 and capable of rotating integrally with the rear rotating handle body 504, and a handle base 502 arranged on the front surface of the front rotating handle body 506 and fixed to the handle base 502. and a front end cover 508 that cooperates to rotatably support the front rotatable handle body 506 and the rear rotatable handle body 504 .

Further, the handle device 500 includes a shaft member 510 which is attached and fixed to the center of rotation in front of the rotating handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side and has a non-circular bearing portion 510a at the rear end, and a bearing portion of the shaft member 510. A potentiometer 512 having a rotatable detection shaft 512a fitted with 510a and non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502, and a front surface of the handle base 502 so that the potentiometer 512 is sandwiched between the handle base 502 and the potentiometer 512. A switch support member 514 having a through hole 514a through which a detection shaft portion 512a of a potentiometer 512 can pass; a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member 514; A firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface, a single-shot button 520 rotatably pivoted to the switch support member 514 for activating the firing stop switch 518, and a rotating button 520 arranged to cover the outer circumference of the shaft member 510. A handle return spring 522 is provided to urge the front handle body 506 and the rear handle body 504 to return to the original rotation position (the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Incidentally, the potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the intensity of hitting the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 . In addition, the front 506 of the rotating handle body and the rear 504 of the rotating handle body are rotated from the original rotating position to the maximum rotating position in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (the end of rotation in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). move.

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 has a hemispherical bulging front end and a cylindrical rear end with an open rear end. Three grooves 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the cylindrical outer periphery on the rear end side. The three grooves 502a of the handlebar base 502 correspond to the three ridges 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handlebar bracket 140, one on the upper side and two on the lower side, at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. are placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by inserting it into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502 a fits with the ridge 143 .

The handle device 500 has an arc-shaped slit 506a arranged concentrically with the rotary shaft in the front 506 of the rotary handle main body, and three mounting bosses 508a projecting rearward are formed in the front end cover 508. These mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through slits 506a in the front 506 of the rotary handle main body. As a result, the circumferential ends of the slits 506a in the front 506 of the rotary handle main body come into contact with the mounting bosses 508a of the front end cover 508, thereby restricting the rotational ranges of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the handle device 500 is formed with a locking protrusion 506b projecting rearward from the front 506 of the rotating handle main body, and one end side (front end side) of a coil-shaped handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 506b. is locked, and the other end (rear end) of the handle return spring 522 is locked to the switch support member 514. , 506 are urged to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

The handle device 500 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via the handle bracket 140 . The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 has a mounting surface slanted so as to face the outside (opening side) in plan view from above, so that the handle mounted via the handle bracket 140 can be mounted. The device 500 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko game machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 5 . As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and the rotation operation can be easily performed without any sense of incompatibility.

Further, the handle device 500 has a potentiometer 512 as a variable resistor, and when the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 (handle device 500) are rotated, the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 is rotated via the shaft member 510. It will happen. The internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotational position (rotational angle) of the detection shaft 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball shooting device 650, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512. , the rotation angles of the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506, that is, the game balls are driven into the game area 1100 with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotational positions of the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating handle bodies 504, 506 and the front end cover 508 are plated with conductive material, and when the player touches the rotating handle bodies 504, 506, etc., the touch switch 516 detects the contact. It's like When the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 rotate while the touch switch 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball is rotated. can be entered. In other words, even if the player tries to hit the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 by some method without touching the handle device 500, the shooting solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be hit. By preventing the player from playing a game different from the original one, the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

Also, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotation of the firing solenoid 654. It's like As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, The game ball can be shot with the driving strength.

The handle device 500 electrically detects the rotation operation of the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 by the potentiometer 512, and based on the detection of the rotational position from the potentiometer 512, the firing control unit 4120 rotates the firing solenoid 654. Since the strength is controlled, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the shot ball launching device 650 provided on the body frame 3 are controlled when the door frame 5 is closed, as in a conventional pachinko game machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism for interlocking with each other and releasing the interlocking when the door frame 5 is opened. It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of troubles in the unit, and to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest due to the trouble of hitting the game ball.

[3-9. foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 49 is an exploded rear perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 50 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the front cover removed.

The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and is used for game balls dispensed from a prize ball unit 700 described later and shot by a batted ball launcher 650. A game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 1100 in spite of this is guided to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 . The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base 542 having an open front side and having flow paths for a plurality of game balls inside, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542 .

As shown in FIG. 49, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 has a first ball inlet 542a arranged in the upper right corner in a rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a front end of the cover base 542 communicating with the first ball inlet. a first ball passage 542b that widens to the right in the front view, a second ball inlet 542c that is arranged outside the first ball inlet 542a (on the right side in the rear view) and is larger than the first ball inlet 542a, a second Inside the cover base 542, which communicates with the ball passage 542d, there is provided a second ball inlet 542c extending downward and sloping downward toward the lower right corner in a front view. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the figure, the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end, which is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball. , an accommodation space 546 capable of accommodating a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

In addition, the cover base 542 has a foul ball inlet 542e that is arranged in the upper part in the left-right direction and that opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e so that the game ball can be guided to the upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. and a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 has an opening/closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 on the rear surface of the lower side of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the opening/closing operation piece 542g comes into contact with the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening/closing crank 793. The opening/closing shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 has a substantially plate-like shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542. The front cover 544 is arranged in the upper left corner when viewed from the front and communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. and a second ball outlet 544b arranged at the lower right corner in front view and communicated with the downstream end of the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542 and penetrated in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper tray ball supply port 310 c of the tray unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100 . The second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower tray ball supply gutter 310h in the tray unit 300 through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110. As shown in FIG.

The foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b and from the first ball outlet 544a. The upper plate 301 can be supplied through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the unit 300. FIG. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball outlet. The lower tray 302 can be supplied from 544b through the lower tray ball supply gutter 310h and the lower tray ball supply port 310g of the tray unit 300. As shown in FIG.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 is such that when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the body frame 3, although the details will be described later. If a game ball shot by the batted ball shooting device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and falls down the foul space 626 as a foul ball, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supplies) the game ball received by the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ).

Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms an upstream side (left side in a front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d and is pivotally supported on the cover base 542 so as to be swingable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space 546. a full-tank switch 550 for detecting the rocking motion of the rocking member 548; ing. As shown in FIG. 50, the swinging member 548 has its lower end rotatably supported on the cover base 542 and its upper end rotating to the left when viewed from the front. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Also, the swing member 548 is biased by a spring 552 to a substantially vertical position. The rocking member 548 has a detection piece 548a projecting outward from the side surface opposite to the housing space 546, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank switch 550. . In other words, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it can be determined whether or not the accommodation space 546 is full of game balls.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes a ground rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and plate-shaped ground metal fittings 556 covering the right and left ends of the cover base 542 when viewed from the rear. , so that static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to circulation of game balls can be removed.

In this embodiment, game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. , Even if the inside of the upper tray 301 is full, if game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, they will stay in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and furthermore, the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 When the normal passage 773 upstream of is also full, the game balls flow to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 72), and the full tank branch unit 770 from the full ball outlet 776 of the foul cover unit 540 to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b.

When the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot exit from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 and stay in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls are stored. Furthermore, as the game balls are dispensed from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls are stored in the storage space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swing member 548, resisting the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move leftward. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank switch 550, that is, when the storage space 546 is filled with the stored game balls, the game balls are output from the prize ball unit 700 in the payout control board 4110. is stopped, and the player is notified to urge the player to discharge the game balls in the plate unit 300 to the outside.

In addition, when the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower tray 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank switch 550 is disabled. It is detected, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is resumed.

[3-10. Ball forwarding unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. FIG. 51(A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. 52A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear with the rear case removed. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper tray 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launching device 650, and also feed the game balls stored in the upper tray 301. , the upper tray ball removing button 341 of the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340 can be operated to remove the ball to the lower tray 302 .

In this ball feeding unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110, and forward and backward. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating inlet 581a and a ball outlet 581b opening below the inlet 581a and having an open rear, and a front open while closing the rear end of the front cover 581. A rear cover 582 having a box-like shape and having a batted ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball entering from an entrance port 581a of the front cover 581 to the batted ball launching device 650, the rear cover 582 and the front cover. A ball extracting member 583 having a partitioning portion 583a which is rotatably supported between the front cover 581 and the ball extracting port 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581 and which separates the entrance port 581a and the ball extracting port 581b. , the game balls on the partition part 583a of the ball removing member 583 are fed one by one to the hit ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and are rotatably supported between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. and a ball-feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball-feeding member 584 . In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entry port 581a when viewed from the front. placed respectively.

The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 has an arcuate slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball removing opening 581b in front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward from 581c. The front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 581a. is formed to close the

In addition, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a which partitions between the inlet port 581a and the ball removing port 581b below the inlet port 581a and whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584, and a partition portion 583a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle of the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 581b. A rotating rod portion 583b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod portion 583c. and a weight portion 583d projecting in the opposite direction to the partition portion 583a. The actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 51). 113, the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 is contacted.

Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 584a centered on a rotational axis extending vertically in the direction of the entrance port 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball extraction member 583, and a cut-off portion 584a. It has a ball holding portion 584b recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the center of the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angular range of about 90° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 to move the rod portion 584c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction. ing.

The ball feeding member 584 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a and the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a at the same time, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It rotates between holding positions. When the ball feeding member 584 is at the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the batted ball supply port 582a to the batted ball launching device 650 and enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance port 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a, and remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the rod portion 584c side closes the hit ball supply port 582a. , Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 580 includes a ball feeding operating rod 586 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energizing) a ball feeding solenoid 585, and the movement of the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 586 that swings up and down moves forward and backward. and a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis that extends in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 has an engaging portion 587a extending in the left-right direction and capable of being engaged with the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 that moves up and down, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. is arranged on the opposite side and is supported between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction; and a transmitting portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 52) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation. In this embodiment, a flapper solenoid in which the ball feed solenoid 585 and the ball feed actuation rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

The ball-feeding unit 580 rotates the ball-feeding member 584 by transmitting the movement of the ball-feeding operating rod 586 swinging by driving the ball-feeding solenoid 585 which advances and retreats in the vertical direction by the ball-feeding operating rod 586 and the ball-feeding crank 587 . It can be moved. When the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the ball-feeding actuation rod 586 moves away from the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 585, and the tip of the ball-feeding solenoid 586 swings downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is positioned at the supply position. When the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball-feeding operating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 585, and the swinging tip is positioned upward, so that the ball-feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball-feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is deactivated (OFF state), the ball-feeding member 584 receives the game ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the shot ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control section 4120 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 654 .

Also, the ball removing member 583 rotatably supported in the ball feeding unit 580 is applied with a moment by the weight portion 583d so as to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front, but it protrudes forward. When the actuating rod 583c comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300, its rotation is restricted. Then, the partition portion 583a of the ball extraction member 583 partitions between the entrance port 581a and the ball extraction port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball extraction port 581b side. Then, when the player presses downward the upper tray ball removal button 341 of the upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300, the upper tray ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and contacts. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, by moving the operating rod 583c downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340, the ball removing member 583 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the entry opening formed by the partition 583a is closed. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball entering from the inlet 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet channel 344c of the upper tray ball outlet base 344 of the plate unit 300. , is discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 302 .

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper tray ball removal slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 contacts is biased upward by the coil spring, game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that biases the upper tray ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, preventing the ball removal member 583 and the like from being damaged and preventing the game ball from being damaged. The partition portion 583a can prevent the ball from rebounding.

[3-11. glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. FIG. This glass unit 590 consists of an annular and vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 molded of synthetic resin and having an opening of approximately the same size as the game window 101, and two pieces that respectively close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. and a transparent glass plate 594 . The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes four pieces 592a arranged separately in the vertical direction at both left and right ends and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate extending in the horizontal direction along the lower end and extending downward. and a locking piece 592b.

This glass unit 590 has a locking piece 592b at the lower end that is locked so as to be engaged with the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting stepped portion 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the glass unit locking member 190 locks the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592, whereby the door frame is closed. It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIGS. 23, 26, etc.).

As described above, the door frame 5 in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment has an upper tray 301 and a lower tray 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically under the vertically long elliptical game window 101. , to hit the game balls stored in the upper tray 301 on the right side of the lower tray 302 in front view into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged behind the transparent glass unit 590 closing the game window 101. of handle devices 500 are arranged. In addition, the door frame 5 has a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 2200, and an upper decoration unit 280 arranged so as to surround the left, right, and upper sides of the game window 101, and also surrounds the lower side of the game window 101. As shown, the plate unit 300 is arranged so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 220 with the side speaker cover 290 interposed therebetween. It has an appearance with continuous integration.

In addition, the door frame 5 emits light from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, etc. provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300. And the opening 328a of the lower tray cover 328 can be decorated with an arbitrary luminescent color. In addition, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the rear side of the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250 By turning on and off the arranged LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256, it is possible to change the mode of the luminous decoration surrounding the game window 101.例文帳に追加

Specifically, the light emission modes of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a in the side lenses 210 and 250, and the light emission modes of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b. If the luminescence mode is the same (same luminescence color and luminescence pattern), the overall luminous decoration can be made substantially uniform, and the luminescence modes are different so as to emphasize the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. When the radiating lens parts 210b and 250b are made different in their luminescence modes so as to emphasize them, they shine radially around the center of the game window 101. It can be a luminous decoration and can attract the player's attention strongly.

In the door frame 5, the base member 420 that supports the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is made of die-cast aluminum alloy, and the base member 420 is attached to the plate unit 300 by the cover body 426. Since it is suspended from the operation unit mounting portion 314c, when the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is hit, the cover main body 426 is elastically deformed so that the base member 420 is lowered. It comes into contact with the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c through the cover 424, and can reduce the impact applied to the dial operation portion 401, the pressing operation portion 405, and the like, thereby preventing the operation unit 400 from being damaged. It is possible.

Further, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is in a state where the pressing operation part 405 is inserted into the ring-shaped dial operation part 401, and even if the player or the like tries to hit the pressing operation part 405 strongly, the dial operation part 401 is also pressed together. Therefore, the dial operation part 401 can disperse the impact of the impact, preventing the impact from concentrating and making it less likely to be damaged. In addition, the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the opening 420a in the metal base member 420 so as to protrude slightly from the upper surface from below. When the impact of striking the portion 401 is transmitted to the operation portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410, and the operation portion holding member 416 bends downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 is pushed toward the outer periphery of the metal opening 420a. Since the base member 420 can receive the impact due to the contact with the upper surface, the load on the operating portion holding member 416 can be reduced, and the gear rail 416a can be prevented from being crushed by the impact. , the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced.

Further, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached to the tray unit 300 from above, even if the operation unit 400 is damaged, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the operation rate of the pachinko game machine 1 due to the replacement of the unit 400.例文帳に追加

[3-12. Light-emitting decoration on the door frame]
Next, the lighting decoration on the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. FIG. 53 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration on the door frame. Also, FIG. 54 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for lighting decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of this embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by means of the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed so as to surround the Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 on which LEDs are mounted. The outer periphery of the can be decorated with light emission.

The right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except for the lower side of the game window 101 as described above. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b are arranged so as to extend along radial axes around the lower part of the center of the game window 101 in the left-right direction. are arranged between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. Peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a and radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of these side lenses 210, 250 are formed by side decorative frames 202, 242 which are opaque (in this embodiment, have a plated layer on the surface). The outer circumference is surrounded.

Side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged behind these side lenses 210 and 250, and main body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 face rear surfaces of peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. The plate-shaped light guide portions 212b and 252b are formed to extend to positions as close as possible to the rear surfaces of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b. It is Although not shown in detail, the body portions 212a, 252a of the side inner lenses 212, 252 have a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface thereof, and the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254 arranged on the rear side. , 256 can be diffused.

The right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, the left side upper decoration substrate 254, and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are provided with the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are arranged at positions corresponding to radiation lens portions 210b, 250b. In this embodiment, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper portion LEDs). normal brightness lower than that of the LED 286b of the upper decoration board 286 in the decoration unit 280). Also, the two LEDs 214c arranged vertically corresponding to the side sub-lenses 228 on the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are red LEDs.

In this embodiment, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are coated with white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing), white painting, etc. to make it white. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 reflect the light from the player when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating the appearance, and by reflecting the light from the emitting LEDs 210a and 210b to the player side by the substrate, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be The lenses 210 and 250 can be decorated with brighter light emission.

Next, as described above, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects the ends of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 facing toward the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction. It is formed so as to decorate the upper center of the game window 101 . The upper decoration unit 280 includes a large central lens 282 shaped like a jewel in the center, side lenses 284 shaped like blades on the left and right sides of the central lens 282, and left and right sides below the central lens 282. and a lower lens 289 positioned thereon. The central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 is made of a bluish transparent member, and the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are made of a translucent white (milky white) member. . As a result, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

The inner lens 283 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on its surface, and can diffusely reflect and refract light. When looking at the inner lens 283, the center lens 282 looks deep and looks as if the center lens 282 itself is glittering. Also, the upper decoration substrate 286 arranged behind the inner lens 283 is not visible from the player side.

The upper decoration substrate 286 in the upper decoration unit 280 includes a plurality of (six in this embodiment) LEDs 286 a arranged behind the inner lens 283 corresponding to the central lens 282 , a side lens 284 and a lower lens 289 . A plurality of LEDs 286b arranged on the rear side (in this embodiment, two for the side lens 284 and one for the lower lens 289, arranged on each of the left and right sides) are provided. In this embodiment, the LED 286a corresponding to the center lens 282 is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a high-brightness white LED. Also, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Subsequently, in the plate unit 300, a plurality of jewel-like light guide portions 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 are formed along the front end of the upper plate 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decorative units 200 and 240. They are arranged in rows in an exposed state through the opening 316a of the front decorative member 316, and when viewed from the front, as shown in the figure, the outer lower side of the game window 101 is formed by the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper lens 318. (lower side) is designed to be decorated. Under the upper lens 318, an upper inner lens 319 having protrusions corresponding to the light guides 318a is arranged. The upper plate upper lens 318 of the plate unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper plate upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

The upper plate upper inner lens 319 of the plate unit 300 has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318, and diffusely reflects and refracts light. Therefore, like the central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280, the light guiding portion 318a of the upper lens 318 of the upper plate is given depth and glittering brilliance. The light portion 318a looks like a jewel. In addition, the upper plate upper inner lens 319 prevents the player from seeing the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 through the light guide portion 318a from the player side.

A plurality (in this embodiment, six of each) are provided on the upper surfaces of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 in the plate unit 300 so as to correspond to the light guide portions 318 a of the upper plate upper lens 318 . LEDs 320a and 322a are provided. In this embodiment, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are full-color LEDs. In addition, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are also white, so that the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 300 includes a translucent ring-shaped dial operation portion 401 and a translucent cylindrical pressing operation portion disposed inside the dial operation portion 401 . 405, and a dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are arranged below the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality (four in this embodiment) of LEDs 430b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation portion 401 . Also, the button decoration board 432 is provided with one LED 432 d corresponding to the pressing operation portion 405 . In this embodiment, the LEDs 430b of the dial decoration board 430 are high-brightness white LEDs, and the LEDs 432d of the button decoration board 432 are full-color LEDs. The surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effect as described above can be achieved.

By the way, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214a and 216a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 covering the outer circumference above the lower side of the game window 101 , 254a and 256a are divided into a first annular group 102 (within hatched areas in FIGS. 53 and 54) near the game window 101 and a second annular group 103 (see FIG. 53) arranged outside the first annular group 102. and within the cross-hatched range in FIG. 54), and by appropriately emitting light from the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, a plurality of ( In this embodiment, two) light-emitting decorations can be made. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the range of hatches near the game window 101 is decorated with annular light emission, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the second annular group 103 are illuminated. When all of them are illuminated, the range of the crosshatch away from the game window 101 is annularly decorated with illumination.

In the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 are arranged in the first annular group 102 and the second Radial groups 104 (within the shaded area in FIGS. 53 and 54) radially extending around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the two annular groups 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of this radial group 104, the outer side of the game window 101 can be radially decorated with light emission. The luminous decoration can be divided in the circumferential direction. In addition, the LED 214c corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the upper right side of the right side decoration unit 200 is included in the upper right side group 105, and by appropriately emitting light from this LED 214c, one part of the upper right side of the door frame 5 can be displayed. The part (side sub-lens 228) can be decorated with light emission.

In addition, in the door frame 5, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decoration unit 280 decorating the upper center of the game window 101 is the upper center that decorates the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 group 106. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 286a of the upper center group 106, the center of the upper part of the game window 101 can be decorated with light. It is now possible to make such luminous decoration. In addition, the LEDs 286b corresponding to the side lenses 284 and the lower lenses 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 form the upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106 with light. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 286b of the upper central side group 107, the boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 are decorated with light emission, and the upper side of the game window 101 (including the upper part) It is designed to be able to make a V-shaped luminous decoration.

Furthermore, in the door frame 5, LEDs 320a corresponding to the light guide portions 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted into the plurality of openings 316a of the upper plate front decoration member 316 in the plate unit 300 decorating the lower side of the game window 101 , 322a is a lower group 108 that decorates the outer perimeter of the lower side of the game window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 with each other. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 320a and 322a of the lower group 108, the lower side of the game window 101 and the front edge of the upper tray 301 can be decorated with light emission. , 216a, 254a, and 256a, the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 can be annularly decorated with light.

In addition, in the door frame 5, LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the center of the lower side of the game window 101 and in the center of the upper portion of the plate unit 300 activate the operation unit 400. It is an operation unit group 109 that is decorated with light emission. By appropriately lighting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be illuminated and decorated, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be controlled. Players can be notified.

More specifically, the luminous decoration on the door frame 5 in this embodiment will be described in more detail. , 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to control systems within groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which they belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are connected to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 103a to 103j for each peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It is

The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104a to 104h for each of the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. FIG. Also, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems of an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper center group 106 are divided into three systems of lower part 106a, upper right part 106b, and upper left part 106c. Also, the six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems of right side 107a and left side 107b.

Furthermore, the 12 LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into 4 systems 108a to 108d, each consisting of three from the right side in front view. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation unit group 109 are arranged diagonally with the pressing operation unit 405 interposed between the four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401. 109b, and one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d are divided into 42 systems.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs. The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 432d belongs are further provided with three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission. It has 84 lines, which is double. In addition, the LEDs 286b and 430b are white LEDs with high brightness, and the four systems 107a, 107b, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 286b and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected to each of them, and in actual light emission control, the number of systems is doubled, that is, eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs with normal brightness, and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a red LED and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. Since the ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, the same number of ten systems are used in actual light emission control.

Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, it is possible to perform an expressive lighting effect.

As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are sequentially lighted (same color or similar color), so that the game window 101 spreads outward. Light emitting effect, or conversely, light emitting effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102 (sequentially emitting light in the same color or similar color), Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light at the same time, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect or the like in which the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 is illuminated widely.

In addition, by cooperating with the LEDs (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the front surface of the game board 4 and the front unit 2000 etc., the LEDs of the game board 4 and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 near the game window 101 , and the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102, it is possible to perform a more expressive light emission effect, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, the light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101 by appropriately emitting light from the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, and 108a to 108d. , light moves along the outer periphery of the game window 101 toward the central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280, or light from the central lens 282 travels along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to make a light-emitting effect that moves. In this embodiment, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided (10 divisions) into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction, but it is not limited to this. However, if it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emitting effect in which light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101. - 特許庁

Furthermore, by causing only the radial group 104 to emit light, a light emitting effect is produced in which the light is emitted radially around the game window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 emit light at the same time as the radial group 104. By making the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 emit light substantially uniformly, or by causing the radial group 104 to emit light (lighting/blinking) while the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 emits light. It is possible to perform a light-emitting production that gives an accent to the light-emitting decoration of the above. In addition, by causing each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to produce a light emission effect in which the radial lens portions 210b and 250b rotate.

In addition, by causing the systems 106a to 106c of the upper center group 106 to emit light at the same time, the entire center lens 282 emits light, and by sequentially causing the systems 106a to 106c to emit light, the light rotates within the center lens 282. It is possible to perform a light emission effect. In addition, by emitting light from the upper central side group 107, the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are decorated with high luminance to give the player a chance or a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state, a probability variable game). state, time-saving game state, probability variable time-saving game state, etc.) can be performed. The lower lens 289 is arranged so as to irradiate the player with light from above the player's head, so that the player can easily notice the light emission of the high-brightness LED 286b. .

Further, by appropriately lighting each of the systems 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, the front edge of the upper plate 301 is decorated with lighting, and by lighting in association with the operation section group 109, the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 can be illuminated to prompt the operation. In addition, by appropriately lighting the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit group 109, the operation of the dial operation unit 401 is prompted and the direction of rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is guided. can do Furthermore, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation portion group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a lighting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation portion 405. FIG.

The system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation unit group 109 is a full-color LED. , 109 and each of the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c, it is possible to perform light emission production with different gradations such as light emission color and brightness. It is possible to perform an expressive light emission effect.

Thus, in the door frame 5, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are arranged in the first annular group 102 near the game window 101. and a second ring-shaped group 103 far from the game window 101 outside the first ring-shaped group 102. The pachinko game machine 1 can be decorated with light in a shape, and by enclosing the outer periphery of the game window 101 with light, it is possible to perform a light emission performance not found in the past pachinko game machines, thereby strongly attracting the interest of the players. It is designed to be able to

In addition, one peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a is provided with two systems of LEDs that are arranged substantially concentrically. Since the luminous decoration can be made substantially concentrically, it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the mode of the luminous decoration from the outside. 240) can be increased, and the impact of the luminous decoration can be increased to make the pachinko game machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the player's interest.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
Next, the body frame 3 in the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 60. FIG. 55 is a front view of the body frame, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the body frame. 57 is a front perspective view of the body frame, and FIG. 58 is a rear perspective view of the body frame. Further, FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. The body frame 3 of this embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side of the outer frame 2 in a front view, and is supported in a door-like manner so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5 . , the front side of which can be opened and closed by a door frame 5. - 特許庁The main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5 .

The main body frame 3 includes a main body frame base 600 that forms the skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 4 , and a front surface of the main body frame base 600 . Upper and lower shaft support fittings 630 and 640, which are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side as viewed, are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600. A hitting ball launching device 650 for hitting a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 and a prize for putting out the game ball to the upper tray 301 of the tray unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. A ball unit 700 and a ball outlet for blocking the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. An opening/closing unit 790 is provided.

In addition, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards and a power supply board 851 for controlling the electrical parts provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except for the game board 4 are provided. A board unit 800 that is integrated into a unit, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. and a locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base in front view for opening and closing and locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opening and closing and locking the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 .

[4-1. Body frame base]
Next, the body frame base 600 of the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. FIG. 61 is a front perspective view of a body frame base in the body frame. Also, FIG. 62 is a rear perspective view of the body frame base in the body frame. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and has a vertically long rectangular shape in front view along the outer shape of the door frame 5. It is formed to have a certain amount of depth. As shown in the figure, the body frame base 600 has a rectangular shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction within about 3/4 of the entire range from the top to the bottom, and holds the game board 4 by fitting and holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 . A mouth 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the outer periphery of the front end of the body frame base 600 excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and a door frame base body in the door frame 5 that is recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. The door frame projecting piece 110c projecting backward from the lower end of the door frame 110, the upper curved projecting piece 167 projecting backward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the opening side projecting backward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 and an engaging groove 603 into which the outwardly bent projecting piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602, and is a lower rear wall portion that spreads in the left and right direction in a plate shape. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms the inner peripheral wall of the game board holding opening 601 . The peripheral wall 605 connects the free ends (upper and lower left ends in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602, so that the body frame base 600 has a frame shape. It's like

In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and the game board placing part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placing part 606. A positioning projection 607 projecting upward from the approximate center in the left-right direction and engaging with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 , and a game board of the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the front. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 55) to which a stopper 1120 is secured, and a plate-like plate that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 are arranged. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 is engaged with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4, so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the rearward direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking part 608 can regulate the front-view right side of the game board 4 from moving forward and backward by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 . there is The front-view left side of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward and backward by the positioning member 956 of the side crime prevention plate 950, although the details will be described later.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has metal fittings for mounting an upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and a lower shaft support metal fitting 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 (upper and lower left end portions in front view). A portion 610 is provided (see FIG. 62). As shown in FIG. 61, etc., the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced at its front side by a plurality of ribs extending vertically and horizontally so that the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 can be attached with sufficient strength. can be done. The body frame base 600 also has a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front, and a door frame 5 that is formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through hole 611 when viewed from the front. A U-shaped fitting groove 612 fitted with the positioning projection 110d protruding rearward from the door frame base body 110 in , and a firing solenoid 654 of the ball shooting device 650 formed at the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in the front view. A solenoid housing recess 613 is provided.

As described above, the main body frame base 600 is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. The ball shooting device 650 is attached from the front side so that the shooting solenoid 654 of the ball shooting device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613 . When the ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIGS. A downward widening foul space 626 is formed. In this embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The played game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 .

Further, the main body frame base 600 has an opening 614 that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a rectangular shape to the left of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front, and a plurality of openings 614 are formed above the opening 614 and on both the left and right sides when viewed from the front. and a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 59, etc.). A main door relay terminal plate 880 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface of the door face forward. Also, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600 . The through-holes 615 arranged on both left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having partition walls on the front side.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support section that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall section 604 above the opening 614 . 616, and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right side of the fixture support portion 616 in front view and regulates the rotational position of the game board fixture 690. As shown in FIG.

Here, as shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around the axis supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a and an operating piece 690b that extends outward from one end in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise in a front view). The game board fixing member 690 is pivotally supported by the fixing member supporting portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing member 690 clockwise in a front view. Then, the fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board placing portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed concave portion 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. can be prevented from moving forward. The game board fixture 690 has an operating piece 690b that abuts against the stopper 617. By abutting the stopper 617, the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is restricted. It's becoming

Furthermore, the body frame base 600 has a door frame open switch 618 for detecting opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611 . When the door frame 5 is opened (released), the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the body frame base 600 has a body frame open switch 619 for detecting the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 attached to the lower rear surface than the position where the door frame open switch 618 is attached ( 62), when the body frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the body frame 3 can be detected.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 has three longitudinally penetrating portions extending in the front-rear direction inside (rotary support side) of the engaging groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 when viewed from the front. A door hook hole 620 and two lock engaging holes 621 lined up in the left-right direction are provided below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and penetrating in the front-rear direction. These three door hook holes 620 are formed near the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and approximately in the center in the vertical direction. Locking protrusions 1004 provided at both upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621 . The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620, and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000 is projected forward. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 57).

Further, the body frame base 600 is located on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and is gently and obliquely lowered from the right upper end toward the approximate center in the left-right direction in a rear view. A body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is provided which hangs from the middle in the vertical direction to a slightly upper position and allows game balls to circulate. The rear side of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed by the board unit base 810 of the board unit 800. Although details will be described later, the game balls circulating through the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740 are It is designed to circulate.

In addition, the body frame base 600 has a plurality of back cover shaft support portions 623 arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in a rear view, and rotatably supporting the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900 . A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 on the front view obliquely upper left of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the lock device 1000 is mounted on the right side (opening side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the front. and a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description is omitted, the body frame base 600 has, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the hit ball launching device 650, prize ball unit 700, board unit 800, etc., at appropriate positions. is formed in

[4-2. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 of the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the metal fitting mounting portions 610 on the upper and lower rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed, and the body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 includes a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 extending forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. A forward extending portion 632, a pivot pin 633 projecting upward from near the front end of the forward extending portion 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in front view. is inserted vertically through the door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 57, etc.), and the forward extending portion 632 hangs down from the left end of the front view and rotates the door frame 5 to the open side. and a stopper (not shown) that regulates the end. In this upper shaft support metal fitting 630, a mounting portion 631, a forward extending portion 632, and a stopper are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is arranged below the door frame support metal fitting 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and the door frame support metal fitting 642 to support the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 . and a body frame pivot bracket 644 for The door frame pivot bracket 642 of the lower pivot bracket 640 has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions. A plate-shaped forward extension portion 642b, a door frame shaft support hole 642c penetrating vertically near the front end of the forward extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and the forward extension portion. A stopper 642d is provided to stand upward from the left end portion of the door frame 642b in a front view and to restrict the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In the door frame pivot bracket 642, a mounting portion 642a, a forward extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

The body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 has a plate-like mounting portion 644a that is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions. It has a front extension portion 644b that extends forward, and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating vertically near the front end of the front extension portion 644b. The body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 is also integrally formed by bending a single metal plate so that the mounting portion 644a and the forward extending portion 644b are formed.

In the lower shaft support metal fitting 640, the attachment portion 642a of the door frame support metal fitting 642 and the attachment portion 644a of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 overlap (contact) in the front-rear direction. 642 and the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. ing.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600 and are connected to the main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 . are coaxially positioned, and the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 of the outer frame 2. , the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame pivot bracket 644 is placed on the support protruding piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and then the pivot pin 633 of the upper pivot bracket 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting it into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support metal fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

The upper and lower shaft support metal fittings 630 and 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600 so that the door frame support hole 634 of the upper and lower shaft support metal fittings 630 and the door frame support hole of the lower and lower shaft support metal fittings 640 are connected to each other. The door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is positioned so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c. After placing the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 on the forward extending portion 642 b of the door frame support metal fitting 642 , the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 . By inserting it, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed. In this embodiment, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. is once slid downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the forward extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 overlap vertically, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 .

[4-3. Ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the batted ball launcher in the body frame. Also, FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame. The hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. be.

The hitting ball shooting device 650 of this embodiment has a shooting base 652 made of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotation drive shaft 654a protruding forward from the lower rear surface of the shooting base 652. A shooting solenoid 654 attached so as to do so, a ball-striking mallet 656 fixed to a rotary drive shaft 654a of the shooting solenoid 654 so as to be able to rotate integrally, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the ball-striking mallet 656, and movement of the mallet tip 658. A firing rail 660 extending obliquely to the upper left in a front view and attached to the front surface of a firing base 652 with a predetermined position on the trajectory as a base end, and a firing rail 660 above the base end of the firing rail 660. A ball stop piece 662 that forms a gap through which the game ball cannot pass while the tip 658 is allowed to pass and holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660, A stopper 664 is provided to prevent the ball hitting mallet 656 (hammer tip 658) from rotating toward the shooting rail 660 from the ball hitting position where the held game ball can be hit.

The shooting solenoid 654 in the shot ball shooting device 650 has a rotating drive shaft 654a that reciprocates at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500, although detailed illustration is omitted. . The ball hitting mallet 656 of the ball shooting device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotary drive shaft 654a of the shooting solenoid 654, and a tip extending in a gentle arc shape from the fixed portion 656a at the axial center of the rotary drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b to which a mallet tip 658 is fixed at the tip facing the normal direction, a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b across the fixing portion 656a and is capable of coming into contact with the stopper 664, It has When the stopper portion 656c of the ball hitting mallet 656 comes into contact with the stopper 664, the tip 658 of the mallet tip 658 rotates toward the launch rail 660 from the ball hitting position (rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). It is supposed to be regulated.

In addition, the shooting rail 660 of the hitting ball shooting device 650 is formed in a loose circular arc shape with a downward depression so as to substantially follow the extension line of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 87). On the other hand, it has a V-shaped depression in the center so that the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided along the launch rail 660 to the game board 4 side. The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

In addition, the ball shooting device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of regulating the rotation end of the ball hitting mallet 656 toward the ball hitting position, and a rotation position of the ball hitting mallet 656 away from the ball hitting position. and a stopper 668 that regulates the end (rotating end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the ball shooting device 650, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, which can absorb the impact when the ball-striking mallet 656 comes into contact with the ball and can suppress the noise caused by the contact. It's like

As shown in FIGS. 57 and 87, when the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the shooting rail 660 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction. 604 upper end, that is, the game board mounting portion 606 (lower side of the game board holding opening 601), and the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601. A foul space 626 is formed between the lower end and the lower end and spreads downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. The hitting ball launching device 650 shoots the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the launch rail 660 in the front view, so that the game ball can be hit into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. It has become. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball that has become a foul ball without being hit inside falls through the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower tray 302. - 特許庁

Also, in the ball shooting device 650, the shooting solenoid 654 is driven by the shooting control unit 4130 with driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580 is driven so as to synchronize with the driving of Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 that supplies game balls to the batted ball launching device 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball, and from that state the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven. is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball sending member 584 is sent to the ball shooting device 650 side, so the shooting solenoid 654 is driven at the same time as the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580 ( ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the shooting rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably shot by rotating the ball hitting mallet 656. there is

[4-4. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 65 to 72. FIG. 65 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the body frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the body frame. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. Furthermore, FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit exploded from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 71 is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotator in the prize ball device. Also, FIG. 72 is a sectional view showing a ball distribution passage in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the pachinko island facility in the gaming hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, It pays out to the upper tray 301 of the pachinko game machine 1 based on a predetermined payout instruction. This prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 to receive and store game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 to align the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and send them downstream; A prize ball device 740 that pays out based on a payout instruction, the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper tray 301 of the plate unit, and are paid out when the upper tray 301 is filled with game balls. It is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower tray 302 side.

In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage lid 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a ground metal fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. A prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 has a back cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 on the rear surface thereof (see FIG. 68).

In this prize ball unit 700, a prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper and left sides of the body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a prize ball tank 720 and a tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. Along with being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. In addition, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720 above the tank rail unit 730 directly above the prize ball device 740 .

Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding opening 601 when viewed from the front. and are integrally molded from synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 is arranged substantially flush with a peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward along the outer periphery of the inverted L shape and extending inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a with a predetermined width. and a rear wall portion 710b. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. As shown in FIG. The prize ball base 710 has a rear wall portion 710b located at a position deeper than the front end, and when attached to the body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

In addition, the prize ball base 710 includes a prize ball tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and an external terminal plate 784 disposed next to the prize ball tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). and an external terminal board mounting portion 712 for mounting the external terminal board cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the lower end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear wall portion 710b. A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740 on the rear side of the vertical side, and a prize ball passage 715 that is adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 and guides the game ball dispensed from the prize ball device 740 downward. and an attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full-tank branch unit 770 to the lower end of the rear wall portion 710b.

Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740. and a back cover engagement groove 718 for securing the cover 900 . In addition, although detailed description is omitted, the prize ball base 710 has mounting holes, mounting bosses, etc. for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., and mounting them to the main body frame base 600 at appropriate positions. is formed in

Next, as shown in FIG. 69, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open top, and the bottom wall portion has a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 which rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 in a rectangular shape only at the right rear portion (open side rear portion) in a plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion. A discharge port 723 formed by a portion protruding rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 of the right rear portion of 722 and opening downward, and a plate shape from the left side of the discharge port 723 in plan view (shaft support side) to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 a rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the eaves portion 724 in plan view; and a mounting portion 726 for mounting the tank 720 to the ball tank mounting portion 711 of the ball base 710 .

The outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722 so that a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721 . The top surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so as to become lower toward the discharge port 723 so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

The prize ball tank 720 also includes two ball leveling members 727 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725 . As shown in the figure, this sphere leveling member 727 has one end supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside so that the other end hangs down due to its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 is suspended in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and can level and align game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730. As shown in FIG. In addition, the canopy portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, and it is possible to prevent game balls from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. Intrusion of dust or the like into the rail unit 730 can be prevented.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lower toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side closer to the discharge port 723 ) in plan view is formed so as to incline toward the rear discharge port 723 . As a result, the flow of the game balls can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and elongated in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with an open top and a predetermined depth, and has a width (depth) that allows game balls to be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is slanted so that the The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 72) that opens downward at the left (rotary support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at substantially the center in the front-rear direction, and a lower surface at the front end. It is provided with a plurality of locking projecting pieces 731c (see FIG. 67) that protrude downward and are locked to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 from above. The tank rail 731 has a right (open side) end in a front view located directly under the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is discharged. After receiving it, it can be rolled to the left and delivered to the prize ball device 740 side from the discharge port 731a. In addition, by locking the locking projecting piece 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the prize ball base 710. ing.

In addition, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with an alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper part of the discharge port 731a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the top of the alignment gear 732, and a right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stop piece that can move forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a side. 735, and a ground plate 736 arranged in the tank rail 731 and capable of coming into contact with the game ball in the tank rail 731. - 特許庁As shown, two aligning gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two paths of game balls partitioned into two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731 . Also, the ball retainer plate 734 has an attachment portion 734a to which the ball stopper 735 is attached, and two slits 734b that penetrate vertically and into which the projecting pieces 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 are leveled by the ball leveling member 727, and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It is possible. In addition, the ball pressing plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball that has not reached a single stage by the ball leveling member 727, and the gap between the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731 as shown in FIG.

As illustrated, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is pivotally supported such that the tooth pitches of the pair of alignment gears 732 are shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper portion of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 meshes with the teeth of the aligning gear 732 and flows down to the discharge port 731a on the downstream side, the game balls aligned in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. It is intended to be sent to device 740 .

In addition, a narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed in the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls in the tank rail 731 together with the game ball falls down from the narrow groove. It's becoming Further, the grounding plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is grounded to the outside through the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782, although detailed illustration is omitted. When the game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 within the tank rail 731, the static electricity can be removed.

In addition, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stopper piece 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734 so that the protruding piece 735a of the ball stopper piece 735 is inserted into the tank rail 731 through the slit 734b. By inserting the protruding piece 735a into the tank rail 731, the two rows of flow paths can be closed, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. there is

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 discharges the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. This prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 attached to a prize ball device mounting portion 714 of a prize ball base 710, as shown in FIGS. As shown, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 has a supply passage on the rear surface side, which opens at the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b having a space of a predetermined size that communicates with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and a lower end of the distribution space 741b on the left side (open side) in rear view and bent in a substantially V shape in rear view. It has a winning ball passage 741c that opens on the left side, and a ball extraction passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (rotary support side) in rear view and extends downward to open on the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball extraction passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a rearwardly open state.

The prize ball device 740 includes a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter length in the vertical direction than the unit base 741, and a plate-like motor support plate 743 arranged under the back cover 742. , a payout motor 744 arranged on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a projects backward beyond the motor support plate 743, and the payout motor 744 can rotate integrally with the rotary shaft 744a. A first gear 745 fixed and arranged behind the motor support plate 743 , a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741 , and a unit base 741 that meshes with the second gear 746 . a third gear 747 pivotally supported by the third gear 747; and a rotation detection plate 749 on which a plurality of (three in this embodiment) detection slits 749a are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction and fixed so as to be integrally rotatable on the opposite side.

In addition, the prize ball device 740 includes a ball break switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 for detecting the presence or absence of game balls in the supply passage 741a, and a game ball attached to the unit base 741 and flowing down the prize ball passage 741c. , a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit 749a formed in a rotation detection plate 749 that rotates integrally with the dispensing rotator 748, and a back cover 742 that holds the rotation angle switch 752. A prize attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the rotation angle switch board 753 attached to the rear surface, the payout motor 744, the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 and the payout control board 4110. and a substrate 754 in the sphere case.

Furthermore, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 covering the board 754 in the prize ball case from the rear side, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749), and a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 therebetween covering the rotation angle switch board 753 from the rear side, and a game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 can contact. A supply passage ground metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween and for grounding the payout motor 744, and a back cover 742 are detachable from the unit base 741. and an attachment/detachment button 759 that supports the .

The prize ball device 740 has a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the open rear ends of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball extraction passage 741d are closed. It has become so. In addition, the unit base 741 has a shape in which a position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a bulges rearward once, so that the momentum of the game ball ejected and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be reduced. It is possible. In addition, the unit base 741 has one side surface (left side in the rear view) that is partially cut out below the rearwardly bulging position of the supply passage 741a, and is outside the cutout position of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball cutoff switch 750, a switch mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting switch 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a lower side than the prize ball passage 741c so as to penetrate in the front and back direction. and a motor insertion hole 741g formed through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

By attaching the ball breaker switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the ball breaker switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a. When the actuating piece is pressed by the game ball, the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball break switch 750. As shown in FIG. When the game balls in the supply passage 741a are not detected by the ball-out switch 750 (ball-out state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and a player or a hall can detect that the ball is out. It is designed to be notified to the side.

In addition, the unit base 741 includes a bearing portion 741h for axially supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotating body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. and a button support hole 741j for supporting a detachable button 759 disposed on the upper part of the unit base 741 and for detachably supporting the back cover 742. I have. This unit base 741 has a supply path grounding metal fitting 757 attached to the grounding metal fitting mounting portion 741i so that the rear surface of the supply path grounding metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game balls in the supply path 741a. The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 is in contact with the rear surface of the lower end of the U-shaped grounding fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply passage 741a via the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 is removed. is now possible.

The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically elongated plate shape as a whole, and the upper end of the back cover 742 protrudes rearward. In the upper part of the back cover 742, there are a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the attachment/detachment button 759, a relay board mounting part 742b for mounting the board 754 in the prize ball case and the board cover 755 on the rear surface substantially in the vertical direction, and a relay board. A rotation angle switch board mounting portion 742c for mounting the rotation angle switch board 753 disposed below the mounting portion 742b, and a through hole 742d through which the dispensing rotating body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be positioned behind the ground metal fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this embodiment, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and the heat generated by the payout motor 744 can be made easy to dissipate heat.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 71, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating the 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the concave portion 748a, and can be paid out to the winning ball passage 741c or the ball extraction passage 741d side. In addition, three detection slits 749a formed in a rotation detection plate 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotor 748 are formed on the outer periphery of the rotation detection plate 749 at equal intervals (every 120 degrees). The detection slits 749a are provided at positions corresponding to the spaces between the recesses 748a. By detecting the detection slits 749a with the rotation angle switch 752, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected. In this embodiment, the rotation of the rotation detecting plate 749 (dispensing rotor 748) between the detection slits 749a (120 degrees) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the dispensing motor 744 in 18 steps.

In the prize ball device 740, a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit, or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or a payout motor 744 is rotated by operating the ball extraction switch 860b. , a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper tray 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko game machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the dispensing motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time the second gear 746 meshing with the first gear 745 is rotated. A third gear 747 meshing with is rotated. A payout rotator 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747, and a rotation detection board 749 is fixed to the rear side of the third gear 747 so as to be able to rotate integrally therewith. It is designed to rotate. In addition, since the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 have play (backlash), the payout rotating body 748 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. The rotation of the payout rotor 748 is designed to correspond to about two steps of rotation of the payout motor 744 .

As shown in FIG. 71, the prize ball device 740 has a payout rotating body 748 rotatably supported substantially in the center of the sorting space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in a rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the winning ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation is performed. The game balls put out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting switch 751, and then transferred to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the ball extraction passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body 748 The game ball dispensed to the ball extraction passage 741d side from the lower end of the ball extraction passage 741d, the ball extraction passage 778 of the full tank branch unit 770 described later, the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, the board unit 800 It can be discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko game machine 1 through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power board box holder 840 .

Next, the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 67, 68 and 72. FIG. The full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 to the plate unit 300. In addition, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to be put out.

This full tank branch unit 770 has a locking portion 770a that is locked to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part in the approximate center in the front and back direction, and is fixed to the lower end back surface of the prize ball base 710 at the upper rear end. and a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and the prize ball base By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

As shown in the figure, the full-tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape that is lowered from the rear end to the front end. A prize ball receiving port 771 that receives the game balls that have flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 that is arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and spreads in the left and right direction (see FIG. 72) , a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 72) that guides the game ball forward from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772, and a game ball that has circulated through the normal passage 773 is released forward A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view, and a full tank passage 775 that guides game balls forward from a position away from the right side of the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 72) ), and a full-ball outlet 776 that discharges game balls that have circulated through the full-fill passage 775 forward and that opens on the left side of the normal ball outlet 774 when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball extraction receiving opening 777 that opens upward at the left end in the front view of the upper rear end and receives the game ball that has flowed down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, and a ball. A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 72) that guides the game ball received in the extraction and reception opening 777 to the front side, and a normal ball exit 774 and a normal ball exit 774 A ball extraction port 779 opened at a position behind the full tank ball outlet 776 is provided.

In the full-tank branch unit 770, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full-tank ball outlet 776 are connected to the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, respectively. and the second ball inlet 542c, and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and passes through the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300. , and discharged from the full tank ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. In addition, the ball extraction port 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear. is delivered to the body frame base ball extraction passage 622.

In this full-tank branch unit 770, the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received at the prize ball receiving port 771 through the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball entering the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 . Then, the game ball that has flowed down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball entrance 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal ball exit 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and exits the first ball exit 544a of the plate unit 300. It will be supplied to the upper tray 301 .

By the way, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with game balls and game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 The game balls that cannot exit from 544a to the upper plate 301 side stay in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 is also full. become. In this state, the game ball entered into the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 could not enter the normal passage 773, started to move laterally in the branch space 772, and moved laterally. A game ball enters into the full ball passage 775 and passes through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b from the full ball outlet 776 and under the plate unit 300. It is adapted to be supplied to the plate 302 .

In this way, when the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls, the full tank branch unit 770 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 until the full tank is cleared. Since it can be supplied to the tray 302, game balls are not supplied to the hitting ball shooting device by operating the ball ejection button of the upper tray when the upper tray is full like the conventional pachinko game machine. It is possible to avoid the interruption of the hitting, eliminate the annoyance during the game, and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

As described above, the full-tank branching unit 770 branches the path of the game balls paid out directly below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko game machine 1 when the upper tray 301 is full. Since the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper tray 301, the game balls in the upper tray 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are directly struck by the ball shooting device 650. The amount of game balls stored in the upper tray 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper tray 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773 . That is, even if the capacity of the upper tray 301 is smaller than that of the conventional pachinko game machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the upper tray 301 stores the same amount of game balls as the conventional one. be able to. Therefore, by making the upper plate 301 smaller, it becomes possible to relatively enlarge (widen) the game window 101 in the door frame 5, and the pachinko game machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be provided. The pachinko game machine 1 can be highly appealing to players who play games, and the wide game area 1100 can entertain the players.

[4-5. Ball exit opening/closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. FIG. FIG. 73 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. Also, FIG. 74 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. Further, FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 goes to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of game balls.

The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the vicinity of the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front so as not to protrude beyond the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A shutter base 791 is attached. Then, a plate-like opening/closing shutter 792 held by the shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, an opening/closing crank 793 for sliding the opening/closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening/closing shutter 792 is lifted through the opening/closing crank 793. and an opening/closing spring 794 that biases the opening and closing.

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening/closing shutter 792 so as to be vertically slidable so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between the pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed on the front surface of the left end in a front view and supporting an opening/closing crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d that locks one end (upper end) of the opening/closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged in the vicinity of the upper left side of the left-right center in front view.

The opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide grooves 791a of the shutter base 791. ), and a laterally long rectangular drive hole 792b that is arranged between the pair of sliding protrusions and faces the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening/closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in front view. A drive rod 793b extends right outward from the opening 791b and has a tip extending to the vicinity of the center of the opening 791b in the left-right direction. an abutment portion 793d extending downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and having a spherical tip; ), and a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, the opening/closing crank 793 rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, thereby rotating the driving pin 793c of the opening/closing crank 793 in an arc shape in the vertical direction, and simultaneously inserting the driving pin 793c. The open/close shutter 792 slides vertically through the drive hole 792b. In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the abutting portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 abuts the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5. The contact portion 793d is rotated clockwise in front view against the biasing force of the opening/closing spring 794, and the driving pin 793c rotates clockwise in front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open/close shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 .

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the body frame 3 from this state, the abutment between the contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 and the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening/closing crank 793 is released. is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the biasing force of the opening/closing spring 794, the opening/closing shutter 792 rises to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. It is possible to do so.

In this way, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3, the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 automatically opens the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened while game balls remain in the full-tank branching unit 770, game balls are prevented from spilling out of the normal ball outlet 774 and the full-tank ball outlet 776.例文帳に追加You can do it.

[4-6. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the body frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the body frame. Also, FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit when it is exploded and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit when it is exploded and viewed from behind. FIG. 80(A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in (A).

The board unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. A power supply board box 830 attached to the rear surface of the right end of 810 in front view, a power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end formed in a size substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. , a terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 in front view, a main door relay terminal board 880 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810, and a peripheral door relay A terminal plate 882 is provided.

The substrate unit base 810 of the substrate unit 800 is, as shown in the drawing, elongated in the left-right direction. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding to the front, an opening 812 disposed above a position one step lower in the center of the shielding wall portion 811 in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 in a front view. A substrate mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end for mounting the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 , and a horizontally long rectangular cylinder penetrating the board mounting portion 813 on the left side of the front view in the front-rear direction. shaped duct portion 814, a plurality of vertical slit-shaped through holes 815 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the lower speakers 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and the left side of the rear view (the right side of the front view) upper part A box housing portion 816 that is open rearward and upward and that can house the front side of the firing power supply board box 830 is provided on the rear surface.

The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. A game ball can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball extraction passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. In addition, the board unit base 810 sends game balls that have flowed down the body frame base ball extraction passage 622 to the power board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through an opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is possible to do so.

Also, in the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main door relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are forward from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It is designed to come to In addition, the board unit base 810 can transmit the sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 satisfactorily to the front side by means of the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815 .

A speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 literally has a lower speaker 821 mounted facing forward. The speaker box 820 hermetically covers the rear side of the lower speaker 821 and has a horizontally elongated rectangular opening 822 on the left side of the lower speaker 821 in front view. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the lower speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinthine passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the lower speaker 821. This is a bass-reflex type speaker box capable of emitting a deeper bass sound with respect to the diameter of the lower speaker 821 . The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward. ing.

A firing power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box-like shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The launch power supply board 831 includes a DC/DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 that charges and discharges power from the DC/DC converter 831a. The combined current is applied to the firing solenoid 654 of the batting ball firing device 650 to drive it. The emission power supply board box 830 has slits 830a formed on its upper and lower surfaces as heat dissipation holes in order to release heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the emission power supply board 831 to the outside. ing. Since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC/DC converter 831a, a slit 830a is formed as a heat dissipation hole in the side surface of the emission power supply board box 830 where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged. . In addition, in the emission power supply board box 830, a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC/DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is an upper inner wall. and the inner wall of the lower surface are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening. Accordingly, when the launch power board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power board box 830 to close the internal space of the launch power board box 830, the internal space of the launch power board box 830 is accommodated by the partition wall 830b to accommodate the electrolytic capacitor SC0. and an accommodation space 830d for accommodating the DC/DC converter 831a. , and a housing space 830d for housing the DC/DC converter 831a. The heat in the housing space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is released through the slits formed on the top surface, the side surfaces, and the bottom surface, respectively, as heat radiation holes, which communicate the housing space 830c with the outside air. By releasing the heat to the outside through 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to DC/DC converter 831a. The heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a is dissipated through heat dissipation holes formed in the upper and lower surfaces that communicate the accommodation space 830d and the outside air. By releasing the heat to the outside through the slit 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by DC/DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transferred to electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In this embodiment, the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current to flow through the firing solenoid 654 of the batted ball shooting device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are separate from the power supply board 851. By being provided on the power supply board 831 , the size of the emission power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851 . The miniaturization of the emission power supply board 831 makes it easier to handle, facilitating the replacement work of the emission power supply board 831 and contributing to shortening the time spent on the replacement work. In this replacement work, it is also possible to replace the entire firing power supply board box 830 while the firing power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830 . Also, even if the pachinko game machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life, and the driving discharge by the discharge solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to discharge and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the discharge power supply board 831 is not necessary. Since it can be easily performed, the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, the impossibility of shooting due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be very easily resolved, and the interruption of the game due to the impossibility of shooting can be resolved at an early stage to restart the game.

The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates due to repeated charging and discharging at a frequency of, for example, 100 times per minute each time the firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, although the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the pachinko island facility, charging and discharging are not repeated at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. Therefore, the launch power supply board 831 Its lifespan is relatively long. In other words, the emission power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to aging. The DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SCO for creating a combined current to flow through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided in the power supply board 851, but are provided in the firing power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851. It is possible to concentrate on the power supply board 851 the electronic components associated with long-term aging. As a result, it is possible to prevent an electronic component with a long life due to secular change from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 with a short life.

In addition, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 is opened upward to the front left side of the left-right center in front view, and receives the game ball discharged downward from the out-ball discharge part 1161 of the game board 4. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides downward and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, and a front side (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. A front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward to accommodate the rear side of the launching power board box 830, and a front end of the power board box 850 that is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 is recessed forward. and a rear box accommodation portion 844 that can be accommodated.

The power board box holder 840 is arranged such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 , and passes through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 to the rear side of the board unit base 810 . The game ball that has flowed down to the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 and the game ball discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, which will be described in detail later. It can be discharged downward.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and allows heat from the electronic components and the like to escape to the outside through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. can be released to As shown in FIG. 79, a power switch 852 attached to a power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850 .

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed so that the front-to-rear dimensions in the assembled state are substantially the same as the front-to-rear dimensions of the speaker box 820 . When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

The payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 which is oblong and open at the rear, and a thin box-shaped cover which is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened at the front. 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 97) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered with the cover 862 . In addition, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separation cuts 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 projecting outward from the left end in rear view. A box base 861 and a cover 862 are caulked and fixed. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, they cannot be separated unless the separation cutting portion 863 is cut, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened or closed. In this embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection and the like.

The payout control board box 860 has an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 facing backward through a cover 862 (see FIG. 56). ). In the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting with the main control board 4100 or the like face rearward through the cover 862. As shown in FIG.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 includes a board base 871 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and frame peripheral relay terminals attached to the rear surface of the board base 871 and to which peripheral panel relay terminals 872 are fixed toward the rear. A plate 868, a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 871 and fixed to the CR unit relay terminal 873 toward the rear, a peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and a CR unit relay terminal 873 are attached to the rear. and a substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the substrate base 871 so as to face the side. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko game machine 1 provided on the side of the pachinko island facility where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. The terminal 873 is for connecting with a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

In addition, the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include the peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, etc. It is for relaying connection with the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5, each decorative substrate, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810 so as to face forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

The front side of the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. Only the connection terminals face forward through the opening 692a, and the front surface of the body frame 3 has a neat appearance (see FIG. 55, etc.).

In addition, the main door relay terminal plate 880 includes the ball rental button 361, the return button 362, the remaining rental display portion 363, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, the touch It is for relaying the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is connected to each of the decoration units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decoration substrates 430 and 432 provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and switches 432a, 432b, 432c and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[4-7. back cover]
Next, the rear cover 900 of the body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81(A) is a front perspective view of the back cover of the body frame, and FIG. 81(B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover of the body frame. The back cover 900 of the body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 (the game board 4 attached to the body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 of the body frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-like body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the body portion 902 when viewed from the front, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of shaft support pins 906 are arranged in a vertical direction and protrude downward and are supported by the rear cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, and prize balls are formed on the upper and lower left side of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front. Engagement pieces 908 that engage with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780 are provided.

In addition, the rear cover 900 has a rectangular connection cutout portion 910 cut upward at the right lower end of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front, and a horizontally elongated rectangular shape extending along the lower side of the connection cutout portion 910 at the left side of the connection cutout portion 910 when viewed from the front. and a confirmation notch 914 cut in a rectangular shape at the bottom left corner of the main body 902 when viewed from the front.

The rear cover 900 can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the rear cover supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600 with the supporting pin 906. By engaging 908 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame base 600 and the prize ball passage lid 780, it can be in a closed state. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the left side of the back cover 900 in front view is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball unit 700 by predetermined screws in addition to the engagement between the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a. is fixed to

Also, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 so that the RAM clear switch 4100e and test terminals 4100f of the main control board box 1170 on the game board 4 face the rear side through the connection notch 910. It has become. Further, the rear cover 900 has a sealing seal (not shown) of the main control board box 1170 facing the rear side through the confirmation opening 912 , and the main control board box 1170 through the confirmation notch 914 . , the sealing portion 1176 of the . As a result, it is possible to check the operation and appearance of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3 .

In addition, the back cover 900 has a plurality of elongated slits 916 penetrating through the body portion 902 and the side portions 904. Through these slits 916, the heat generated in the game board 4, etc. can be discharged to the outside on the rear side.

[4-8. Side security plate]
Next, the side security plate 950 of the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. As illustrated, the side security plate 950 of the body frame 3 forms the left side of the body frame 3 in front view, and is attached to the body frame base 600 . The side security plate 950 includes a metal body 952 extruded into a shallow U-shape in a plan view, and mounting brackets 954 fixed above and below near the inner front end of the body 952 and attached to the front face of the body frame base 600 . , and a positioning member 956 that is fixed inside the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4 .

A main body 952 of the side security plate 950 includes a side plate piece 952a that extends vertically with substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame base 600 and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a front end of the side plate piece 952a. a front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c arranged to form a predetermined gap behind the front end piece 952b and projecting less than the front end piece 952b; and a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction when viewed. The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d.

The side security plate 950 has a mounting bracket 954 attached to the front surface of the body frame base 600 and a rear end piece 952 d of the body 952 attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 600 . When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 , the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 is attached to the support side reinforcement plate 152 of the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 . It is designed to be inserted into the U-shaped protruding piece 166, and to prevent a tool for cheating from being inserted between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view. can be done. The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of extruded metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 are increased, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4, the door frame 5, etc. can be well supported. It has become.

[4-9. lock device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86. FIG. FIG. 82(A) is a left side view of the lock device in the body frame, and (B) is a front perspective view of the lock device in the body frame. Further, FIG. 83(A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a glass door frame sliding rod and a body frame sliding rod provided slidably inside the U-shaped base body of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view showing a rod, and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device as viewed from behind, and FIG. 85 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the glass door frame sliding rod and the body frame sliding rod in the lock device. FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the anti-tampering member in the lock device.

The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached along the outer side surface of the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 from substantially the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 2, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600, a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall of the main body frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base having a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame lock slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001 . A sliding rod 1040, a main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and a U-shaped structure to prevent illegal sliding of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base 1001 .

The U-shaped base body 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided therein. and are slidably arranged. The U-shaped base 1001 has a width dimension that is extremely thin as compared with a conventional lock device that is integrated into a base having an L-shaped cross section. As a result, the horizontal dimension of the lock device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding opening 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, thereby increasing the game area. A wide game board 4 of 1100 can be provided.

The U-shaped substrate 1001 is attached with the open side of the U-shaped cross section facing the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the body frame base 600 . As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are attached to the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is in a completely covered state, and has an anti-tampering structure that makes it difficult for the lock device 1000 to be tampered with from the outside.

The U-shaped base body 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate above and below the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002, a screwing portion 1003 protruding outward from the upper part of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 84) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side and a screwing portion 1003, and a screwing portion. Protrudes forward from the upper and middle portions of the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 84) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the 1003 protrudes, and from the lower ends of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side. and a locking protrusion 1004 .

The screwed portion 1003 and locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base body 1001 are for attaching the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. and the lock engaging hole 621 from the rear side, and then moved upward, the screwed portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other, and the screwed portion 1003 is The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock mounting portion 625 through it.

It should be noted that the lock device 1000 is attached with screws not only at the upper and middle screw fastening portions 1003, but also at the screw fastening portions 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through-hole 611. The lock mounting portion 625 is also fixed to the body frame base 600 with screws (not shown), and the lock device 1000 is also mounted below.

When the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the top, middle, and bottom of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are attached to the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole at the top and middle. 621 and is positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. (Main body frame 3) can be firmly fixed.

In other words, even if the lock device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base body 1001 having an extremely thin width, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the body frame 3 by engaging and fixing the front and rear sides of the lock device 1000. can be fixed to In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure (fixing structure may be used) on the front side protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not come into contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure on the rear side protrudes toward the peripheral wall portion 605 from the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 which is in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, the locking structure on the front side is the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the body frame 3 so as not to rattle, compared to the case where the lock device 1001 is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the lock device 1001b.

The U-shaped substrate 1001 has insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and crimping it with the main body frame sliding rod 1050 housed, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are installed inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 . can be mounted so as to be vertically slidable.

That is, as shown in FIG. 83(C), the rivets 1006 are passed through the upper ends of the rivet long holes 1042 formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower ends of the long holes 1055 and 1061 for rivets formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, respectively. The door frame sliding lever 1040 can be moved upward, and the main body frame sliding lever 1050 can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped substrate 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the body frame base 600 on the open side, and from the anti-tamper notch portion 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower portion of the U-shaped substrate 1001. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, and a vertical insertion opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are formed in the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. Although the details will be described later, the tamper-preventing notch 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 is such that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-preventing member 1023 advances and retreats. The lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is positioned below the lower edge of the game board holding opening 601 when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009 protrudes laterally from the front end portion, through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and a mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting base plate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 for mounting with screws 1012 at two upper and lower positions. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in and a screw portion 1003 drilled for mounting the lower portion of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the body frame 3 are formed.

The U-shaped base body 1001 also has an insertion vertical opening 1020 into which the first engaging protrusion 1017 and the second engaging protrusion 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. , a spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a side clearance hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to hinder the movement of the connecting pin 1034, It has

The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001 . In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting base plate 1011 for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting base plate 1011. An engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 with a screw 1019 . This engaging cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engaging projecting piece 1017 that engages with the downward engaging hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when it rotates. A second engaging protrusion 1018 is formed on the end side to engage with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the sliding lever 1040 for the door frame during rotation.

This cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in a lock mounting piece 1008 from the rear side, and mounting holes 1013 formed in two upper and lower positions of a lock mounting base plate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 .

The anti-tampering members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 are designed to prevent the cylinder lock 1010 from being rotated by an official key, and to be used, for example, by a piano wire or a wire to tamper with the body frame slide rod 1050. to prevent it from dropping. These anti-tampering members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first anti-tampering member 1023 and a second anti-tampering member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034, as shown in FIG. The first tamper-proof member 1023 has a vertically long plate-like shape and is supported by the U-shaped base 1001 so as to be capable of swinging around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023, through its swing shaft hole 1025, is the most movable together with the door frame sliding lever 1040 and the main body frame sliding lever 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base body 1001. It is attached by lower insertion holes 1005 and rivets 1006 .

In addition, the first tamper-proof member 1023 has a vertically long opening at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on its plate-like surface so that the second engaging protrusion 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 can be inserted. It has a projecting piece inserting hole 1026 which has been shaped. The second engaging projection 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 penetrates the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the vertical insertion opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 is moved. The rising engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement projecting piece 1018 are engaged with each other. In addition, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is provided on the front obliquely upper outer edge of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to come into contact with the rear side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. When the engaging cam 1016 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging projection piece 1017, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 moves around the swing shaft hole 1025. (clockwise direction in FIG. 86(B)).

Furthermore, the first tamper-proof member 1023 includes a stopper piece 1027 projecting toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the oblique rear lower outer edge of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026, and further from the position where the stopper piece 1027 projects. It has a regulating projection piece 1031 projecting downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 arranged vertically through the front side of the regulating projection piece 1031 in the horizontal direction. The stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engaging notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding lever 1050 when the main body frame sliding lever 1050 is locked. Thus, the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from illicitly sliding. In addition, the regulating protrusion 1031 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 contacts the second tamper-proof member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second tamper-proof member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). Movement can be regulated.

Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first anti-tampering member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with the oblong opening formed at the lowest end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. can be done. Furthermore, the connecting hole 1030 of the first anti-tampering member 1023 is for rotatably connecting the first anti-tampering member 1023 and the second anti-tampering member 1032 with a connecting pin 1034 .

On the other hand, the second anti-tampering member 1032 connected to the first anti-tampering member 1023 is formed of an inverted "te"-shaped plate material, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one end of its upper part and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other end of its upper part. , and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The second anti-tampering member 1032 can be relatively rotatably connected to the first anti-tampering member 1023 by aligning the connecting hole 1033 with the connecting hole 1030 of the first anti-tampering member 1023 and inserting the connecting pin 1034. It is possible. In addition, the second tamper-proof member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of a spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked by the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036 . As a result, the spring 1035 biases upward. Further, the contact portion 1037 of the second tamper-proof member 1032 contacts the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. This door-frame sliding rod 1040 has door-frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations, upper, middle and lower, on one vertical side. The door-frame hook portion 1041 of the door-frame sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 when the door-frame sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001 . When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, it protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 57 and 61) formed in the main body frame base 600, A hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5 can be engaged. The door-frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, so that the door-frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover can be engaged by lifting the door-frame sliding rod 1040 . 165 can be released.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has a vertically elongated rivet slot 1042 drilled in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and a lower part of the uppermost slotted rivet hole 1042 and for the door frame. The lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040 is provided with a guide projecting piece 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 . The rivet slot 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is adapted to receive the rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed vertically so as not to interfere with the upward motion of the rod 1040 . In the normal state, the rivet 1006 that penetrates the upper end of the rivet elongated hole 1042 is in contact. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is arranged such that the guide projection 1043 is inserted into projection moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 . , so that it is possible to guide the mutual sliding motion between the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 .

A spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of a spring 1048 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040 . The other end of the spring 1048 engaged with the spring hook portion 1046 is engaged with the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 allows the door frame to slide. The rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. Further, the door-frame sliding lever 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is pressed out from one side surface of the door-frame sliding lever 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 contacts the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001 and can suppress the door frame sliding rod 1040 from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001 . It's like

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has a vertically elongated play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. This play hole 1044 is formed at the tip of the first engaging projection 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotational movement of the engaging cam 1016 when the first engaging projection 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space in which the part can move. The rising engagement hole 1045 is designed so that when the engagement cam 1016 rotates with the second engagement protrusion 1018 inserted therein, the door frame sliding rod 1040 rises due to the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 . for engaging the The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 vertically larger than the tampering prevention notch 1007 at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side. The relief notch 1049 is provided so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-tampering member 1023 can be reliably engaged with the anti-tampering notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is in the way. The corresponding part is notched so that it will not be.

On the other hand, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting rod 1053 that connects the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It has In other words, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically elongated metal plate as in the conventional art, but an upper hook member 1051 having hook portions 1054 and 1065 and a lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting rod 1053 . As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently accommodated in the narrow space of the U-shaped substrate 1001 .

The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 has a hook portion 1054 formed toward the rear at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in the left-right direction through a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 . , a projecting piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the horizontal direction below the long hole 1055 for rivet, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the front vertical side of the projecting piece moving hole 1056, and the lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 and contact portions 1059 formed on the upper and lower sides of the upper hook member 1051 . The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper inner side of the open side of the outer frame 2. , and a locking claw portion is formed upward.

The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1055 so that the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to receive the guide projecting piece 1043 above the sliding lever 1040 for the door frame. 1050 and mutual movement can be guided.

The other end of the spring 1048 is engaged with the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 . Further, the upper end of the connecting rod 1053 is bent and inserted into the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 . Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 contacts the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is accommodated in the U-shaped base 1001. It can slide smoothly without rattling.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion and a rivet portion penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 . a slotted hole 1061, a descending engagement hole 1062 arranged below the slotted rivet hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the descending engagement hole 1062, and below the play hole 1063 A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 drilled in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement hole formed in the lower portion of the rear vertical side of the lower hook member 1052. A notch portion 1066 and contact portions 1067 formed on the upper and lower sides of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook through-opening 1002 below the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the bottom inside the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw portion is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 is passed through, the rivet 1006 passes through the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061 . This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

Further, when the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted into the downward engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and is rotated, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotating operation. It is intended to engage as Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is designed so that when the second engaging protrusion 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the second engaging protrusion 1018 does not interfere with the rotating operation. can form a movable space. Further, the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052 is adapted to receive the guide projecting piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame slide can be inserted. Mutual movement with the movable rod 1050 can be guided.

Further, the bent lower end of the connecting rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052 . Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped substrate 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001 . When the hook member 1052 slides, it can slide smoothly without play.

Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding lever 1050 are connected by the connecting rod 1053, and in this state, the guide projection of the door frame sliding lever 1040 is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook through-opening 1002 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 in a superimposed state, while sliding the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame. After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001 , the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005 .

When inserting this rivet 1006 , the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 1055 , 1061 , 1042 . When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006 , it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the pivot shaft hole 1025 of the first anti-tampering member 1023 to attach the first anti-tampering member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. In addition, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected with a connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the pin hole. 1029 is fixed with a screw (not shown), and then the guide pin 1028 must be inserted into the lowermost opening of the vertical insertion opening 1020 .

Furthermore, with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is stretched between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is opened. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in mutually opposite directions, and a spring 1035 is hung between the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to perform the second fraud prevention. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restricting projecting piece 1031 . After that, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008 and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with the screw 1012 . At this time, the tip of the first engaging projection 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the vertical insertion opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engaging projection of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock mounting piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first anti-tampering member 1023 .

In order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this manner, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding lever 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the body frame base 600 by aligning it with the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing screws (not shown) into the aligned holes. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 1001a of the U-shaped base 1001 not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed to project horizontally from the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 which contacts the peripheral wall portion 605, the locking structure at the front portion contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to rattle as compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. As shown in FIG. 85, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 are engaged. The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the vertical insertion opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 engages with the downward engaging hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the urging force of the spring 1048 and connect with it. The connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the main body frame 3 is pulled forward to remove the main body frame 3. It can be opened to the frame 2.

When the body frame 3 is closed, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are raised by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (same raised position as shown in FIG. 85A). , 1065 are inclined downward toward the outside, the body frame 3 is forcibly pressed against the outer frame 2 so that the upper inclined portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are inclined downward from the closing plates 24 and 25. Since it abuts against the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the upward claws of the hooks 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are engaged again. The rod 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the vertical insertion opening 1020, the second The tip of the two engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 to push the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the urging force of the spring 1048 . As a result, the locked state between the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is released. It can be opened with respect to the body frame 3 .

When closing the door frame 5, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (same lowered position as shown in FIG. 85(A)). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3 , the lower side inclined portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame is inclined toward the hook cover 165 . The door-frame sliding rod 1040 comes into contact with the upper end and rises upward, and furthermore, the downward claw portion of the door-frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 engage again, and the door-frame slide The movable rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the overall length of the U-shaped substrate 1001, and the U-shaped substrate 1001 extends approximately along the vertical side of the main body frame 3. Door frame hook portions 1041 which are attached over the entire length and are engaging portions with the door frame 5 are formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040 . Therefore, the door frame 5 and the body frame 3 can be securely locked over the entire length in the vertical direction. It has become incapable of performing an act.

As described above, the locking device 1000 for the body frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 by turning the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates it in the other direction. By rotating, the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 can be released. Further, the lock device 1000 is designed so that a piano wire or the like is hooked on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 to lower the hook. It has become. The first structure to prevent such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is the U-shaped substrate 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space.

First, the action of the locking mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. It is in a state of In this state, the biasing force of the spring 1035 rotates the first anti-tampering member 1023 counterclockwise so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the anti-tampering notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 moves into the anti-tampering notch. It is engaged with the engagement notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 at the position corresponding to 1007 . As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and an attempt is made to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engaging notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other, so that the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be pulled down. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) is disabled, and the unauthorized act of opening the body frame 3 cannot be performed.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to unlock the body frame 3 normally, the first engagement projection of the engagement cam 1016 is caused by rotating the key as shown in FIG. 86(B). Piece 1017 is pivoted to enter into longitudinal insertion opening 1020 . When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. It starts to rotate clockwise around 1025 , and the stopper piece 1027 also moves away from the tamper prevention notch 1007 . As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second tamper-proof member 1032 is at a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engaging cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engaging projecting piece 1017 as well, the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 is engaged with the downward engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. As a result, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 are released from the locked state, and the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tamper-proof member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031, so the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1023 are in contact with each other. 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. 86(A). When the body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second tamper-proof member 1032 come into front contact with each other, finally resulting in the state shown in FIG. 86(A). As a result, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 do not get in the way when the body frame 3 is closed. In this embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 only prevent the body frame sliding lever 1050 from being illegally lowered because the main body If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to illegally raise the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 .

Further, even with the locking mechanism, which is the first anti-tampering structure, it may be impossible to disable the function of the locking mechanism by swinging the first anti-tampering member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. do not have. Therefore, assuming that the locking function of the locking mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the body frame 3 (body frame base 600), the internal The sliding lever 1040 for the door frame and the sliding lever 1050 for the main body frame, except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065, are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped substrate 1001 and completely covered. In this state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped substrate 1001, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped substrate 1001 will not move. Since the entry of unauthorized tools into the closed space is prevented by the structure, unauthorized actions cannot be easily carried out.

Thus, in the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is placed inside the U-shaped base 1001, which is extremely thin compared to the conventional lock device in which the width dimension is integrated into the L-shaped base. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the lock device 1000 to the U-shaped substrate 1001 is set below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is enlarged, the lock device 1000 can be placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. It can be installed firmly.

In addition, since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped substrate 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065. , a piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the body frame slide rod 1050 provided inside, and other illegal acts cannot be easily performed.

When the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at three positions, upper, middle and lower, on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. is positioned and locked, and screwing portions 1003 formed at three locations, upper, middle and lower, on the closing side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, which is extremely simple. With such a structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the body frame 3 (body frame base 600).

In addition, in the lock device 1000, a screwing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 and a lock formed in the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the body frame 3 are provided. Although a structure is shown in which the mounting portion 625 is screwed together, instead of this, a screw 1012 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used so that the tip of the screw 1012 engages the lock mounting piece 1008. It is also possible to adopt a structure in which lock mounting holes to be screwed through are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611 . Further, even if the lower part of the U-shaped base body 1001 is not screwed, the lock device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the rear portion of the lock device 1000 with the screwed portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625. It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

In the lock device 1000, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 having left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably attached to the side surface 1001a on the opposite side not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 by rivets or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted to form an L-shape. The door frame sliding lever 1040 and the body frame sliding lever 1050 are housed in the closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and the first side wall. It may have a structure, and the same effects as those of the lock device 1000 described above can be obtained.

[5. Basic configuration of the game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 94. FIG. FIG. 87 is a front view showing a game board attached to the body frame of the pachinko game machine with the door frame removed. 88 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the game board viewed from the rear. It is a diagram. Furthermore, FIG. 91 is a front view showing an enlarged function display unit on the game board in a state of being attached to the pachinko game machine. 92 is an exploded front perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 89, etc., and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. FIG. 94 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel of the game board shown in FIG. 92 cut in the vertical direction.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of this embodiment has a front configuration in which the outer periphery of a game area 1100 into which game balls are hit by a player operating a handle device 500 is defined, and the external shape is substantially rectangular in front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defining the rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160. A main control board box 1170 which is attached to the rear surface and houses a main control board 4100 which controls the contents of games performed by hitting game balls into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control board based on the control signal from the main control board 4100 A function display unit 1180 which can display a game situation and is attached to a predetermined position of the front structural member 1110 so as to be visible to the player side is provided. The game board 4, which is not shown in FIGS. 87 to 94 and will be described later in detail, comprises a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further provided (see Figures 95 and 96).

The game board 4 of this embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front structural member 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko game machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front constituent member 1110 of the game board 4 will be described. The front structural member 1110 of the game board 4 has a substantially rectangular outer shape that can be inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery. The front component member 1110 includes an outer rail 1111 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in the front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely to the upper right. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left diagonally when viewed from the front, and the inner rail 1112 smoothly continues from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the terminal end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in front view, the terminal end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 The end (upper end) of the game area 1100 is connected to the boundary part between the impact part 1114, which can be contacted by the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111, and the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113. Out port guide surface 1115 arranged at the lowest end and lowered toward the rear, and the upper end of inner rail 1112 are rotatably pivotally supported, and from the upper end of inner rail 1112 so as to close the space between outer rail 1111 and outer rail 1111 . It is rotatable only between the closed position extending upward and the open position in which it rotates clockwise in front view to open the space between the outer rail 1111 and returns to the closed position side. and a backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown).

When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, as shown in FIG. It is intended to be positioned on an extension of launch rail 660 in device 650 . Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the shooting rail 660, a space is formed that expands in the left-right direction and downward, and a game ball shot along the shooting rail 660 of the shot ball shooting device 650 is released. , jumps over the space and is driven into between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 . A game ball hit between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to its momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is pushed. , and by rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter into the game area 1100 .

Also, when the game ball is hit hard by the hitting ball launching device 650, the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111 within the game area 1100 is arranged so as to abut against the impact portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. When the game ball comes into contact with the impinging portion 1114, the rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner peripheral rail 1113. It is designed to prevent it from moving. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (hit) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, it returns to the closed position by the biasing force of the backflow prevention member 1116 before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

In addition, the game ball driven into the game area 1100 flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100 when it is not received in the starting ports 2101, 2102, winning openings 2103, 2104, 2201, etc. of the table unit 2000 described later. Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guide surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. ing.

On the other hand, if the game ball shot from the ball shooting device 650 cannot cross the backflow preventing member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112 and enter the game area 1100, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 1111 and 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 to the foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111. The ball falls, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located in the lower part of the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300.

A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component member 1110, which enhances wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball and allows the game ball to roll smoothly. ing. In addition, the impact portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, so that even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides with it, the impact can be alleviated. and the game ball can be rebounded inward.

In addition, the front component 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention projection 1117 protruding forward from the outside of the lower portion of the outer rail 1111, and an approximately central portion in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-port guide surface 1115. and a groove-shaped rail crime prevention groove 1118 recessed by a predetermined amount from the front end extending to the front end. The crime prevention projection 1117 on the front component member 1110 is arranged so as to vertically overlap the crime prevention rear end projection 183 of the security cover 180 on the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 . As a result, even if a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire enters from between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot side (left side in front view), the fraudulent tool can reach the game area 1100. is not possible.

In addition, the front component member 1110 is arranged so that when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security rear projecting piece 182 of the security cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. In addition, the security rear projecting piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (the side opposite to the play area 1100). , the inner rail 1112, the rail security groove 1118, and the crime prevention rear projecting piece 182 also prevent illegal tools such as piano wire entering from between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 from reaching the game area 1100.例文帳に追加It is possible to do so.

In addition, the front structural member 1110 has a pair of positioning recesses 1119 which are arranged apart in the vertical direction at the left end when viewed from the front and which are recessed from the front to the rear and which are open at the left end, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 which are vertically spaced at the right end when viewed from the front. a pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged in a row, a fixed recess 1121 arranged on the left side of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 in front view and opened downward and recessed from the front side with the upper side formed in an arc shape, and a front view A notch 1122 for ball passage is provided in the vicinity of the left end of the lower end and is cut out in a rectangular shape extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction. The positioning recess 1119 of the front structural member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 attached to the inner side of the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3, so that the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 is positioned at the left end of the front view. can be restricted from moving forward and backward. The game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be attached to the game board. By being locked by the locking portion 608, the front-view right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving forward and backward. .

In addition, the fixing concave portion 1121 of the front component member 1110 has a game board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 when viewed from the front. When it is turned clockwise, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board fixture 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It's like In addition, a ball passage notch 1152 is formed at the same position on the game panel 1150 as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front structural member 1110 , and the game board 4 is held by the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 . The front end of the full-tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the cutouts 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage when it is inserted into the ball passage.

Further, the front component member 1110 has a horizontally long through hole 1123 that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right end in the front view of the lower end, and a front-rear direction thickness at a position on the lower side of the through hole 1123 from the center in the left-right direction to the left in the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed to have a small thickness, and a certificate stamp pasting portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in front view and for sticking a certificate stamp for certification confirmation are provided. The fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 is not shown in detail, but when the game board is attached to the previous body frame, a predetermined fastening band is attached to the fastening hole formed in the previous body frame. The game board 4 can be made difficult to remove by winding and tightening each other, and illegal removal of the game board 4 can be prevented.

Further, the front structural member 1110 is provided with a display section 1181 of a function display unit 1180, which will be described later, outside the rail crime prevention groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the bottom right in the front view. The front structural member 1110 also includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from both left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning projections 1127 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112 . This mounting boss 1126 passes through the game panel 1150 and engages with a fixed boss 1162 of the board holder 1160. A predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126. By wearing the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched. Also, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fitted into an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 so that the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150 .

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 on the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 is made of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has substantially the same outer shape as the front structural member 1110 . This game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guiding surface 1115 of the front structural member 1110 at the lower part in the left-right direction of the front view, and an out port 1151 extending in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end in the front view. A ball passage notch 1152 that penetrates through and opens downward and has the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front structural member 1110, and a rear protrusion of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates in the front-back direction at the lower right corner in front view. and an insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110 near both left and right ends of the lower part, and the positioning projections 1127 of the front component 1110 are inserted and fixed. and a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155, and a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1156 that is recessed forward by a predetermined amount from the rear surface on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and that is open downward at the lower end side (see FIG. 90). and a notch 1157 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front structural member 1110 and penetrates in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front structural member 1110 at appropriate positions.

The game panel 1150 on the game board 4 can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front structural member 1110. Although illustration is omitted, the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface Inside, a plurality of obstacle nails are to be implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a front unit 2000 is to be mounted. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150 . In addition, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is positioned at the lowest end of the game area 1100, and is formed at the lowest end of the game area 1100 in the front constituent member 1110 when assembled on the game board 4. The game ball guided backward by the out-port guide surface 1115 thus formed enters the out-port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.例文帳に追加

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 on the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open top and front. This substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharging portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be lowered toward the discharge portion 1161, and the game balls discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit 2000 or the rear unit 3000, and supplied (discharged) to the bottom upper surface of the substrate holder 1160. is discharged downward from the out-ball discharge portion 1161 . In addition, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 , the out-ball discharging part 1161 is positioned directly above the discharged ball receiving part 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 . All the game balls discharged from the board unit 800 are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.例文帳に追加

The substrate holder 1160 also has a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 projecting forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 have their tips inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1150, and are fitted with the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110. In a state where the bosses 1126 are engaged, predetermined screws are screwed into the mounting bosses 1126 through the fixed bosses 1162 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 , thereby attaching the substrate holder 1160 to the front component member 1110 . As well as being able to be assembled, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the board holder 1160 .

As shown in FIG. 90, the substrate holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 to which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side to the left end portion of the rear surface of the rear wall portion when viewed from the rear, and a fixing portion 1163 and an engaging portion 1164 capable of engaging the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from behind. The fixing portion 1163 and locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 allow the main control substrate box 1170 to be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 .

[5-4. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 on the game board 4 will be explained. The main control board box 1170 includes a board base 1171 in the shape of a thin oblong box with an open rear side, and a thin oblong box shape with an open front side that covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and is fitted into the inside of the board base 1171 from the rear side. and a main control board 4100 having electronic components, terminals, etc. mounted on the front end of the board cover 1172 on the rear surface side. The main control board box 1170 has a fixed piece 1174 extending outward from the left end of the board base 1171 in the rear view and fitted with the fixed part 1163 of the board holder 1160, and a board cover 1172 extending from the right end of the board cover 1172 in the rear view. and an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 .

Also, as shown in FIG. 90 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is arranged two by two on the right side in a rear view with an elastic fixing piece 1175 interposed therebetween, and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible seal 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) affixed across the substrate base 1171 and substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surfaces of the hermetic seal. and a protective cover 1177 . The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation/cutting portion 863 of the dispensing control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is fixed by caulking at any one of the four sealing portions 1176. It is In order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 of the main control board box 1170, it is necessary to cut the sealing part 1176 fixed by caulking. It's becoming As a result, whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been illegally opened can be clearly determined visually from the outside.

In addition, since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this embodiment, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed three times. A sealing seal is attached across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 of the main control board box 1170. When separating the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, the sealing seal can be cut or peeled off. It is necessary to do so, and the traces of opening and closing are left even in this hermetic seal. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program, etc.). However, it is possible to visually check from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such fraudulent acts.

Further, the main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating the board cover 1172 in the front-rear direction at an appropriate position. Various connection terminals and the like for connecting with the peripheral control board 4140, the payout control board 4110 and the like face the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring instrument to the test terminal 4100f facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the sealing part 1176 and the sealing seal are skillfully worked, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification of the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than visually, and the pachinko game machine 1 with high crime prevention performance. You can do it.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 on the game board 4 will be explained. The function display unit 1180 is attached to a predetermined position of the front structural member 1110. A display section 1181 is arranged on the front surface of the front structural member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. and a rear protrusion 1182 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 91, the display section 1181 of the function display unit 1180 has one LED at the left end in front view for displaying the game state changed by the game ball hit into the game area 1100. and a game state display 1183 consisting of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the game state display 1183. A device 1184 and one 7-segment LED for displaying, as a first special symbol, the first special lottery result which is arranged on the right side of the upper special symbol memory display 1184 and is drawn by receiving the game ball into the upper starting port 2101. An upper special pattern display device 1185 consisting of an upper special pattern display device 1185 and a second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into a lower starting port 2102 which is arranged diagonally above the upper special pattern display device 1185 is displayed as a second special pattern. A lower special symbol indicator 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for the lower special symbol indicator 1186 and two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the lower special symbol indicator 1186. It has a lower special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying.

In addition, the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the lower special pattern display device 1186, and displays the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2350. A normal pattern memory display 1188 consisting of four LEDs for playing and a normal pattern memory display 1188 arranged below the normal pattern memory display and displayed as a normal pattern is a normal lottery result drawn by the game ball passing through a gate part 2350.例文帳に追加A normal pattern display device 1189 consisting of one LED for and a normal pattern storage display device 1188 are arranged in parallel on the oblique upper right side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit", a big winning opening 2103 and a round indicator 1190 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern.

The gaming state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 is a full-color LED that can change its emission color between red, green, and orange. Various game states (for example, probability fluctuation state, time reduction state, probability variable time reduction state, big hit game state, small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

In addition, when the upper special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 cannot variably display the first special symbol in the upper special symbol display 1185, when the game ball is accepted into the upper starting port 2101, It displays the pending number (stored number) of the first special symbols in which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored). The special symbol memory display device 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made up of predetermined LEDs. A blinking pattern allows the pending number to be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is lit and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b. are lit together, and when the number of reservations is 3, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit, and when the number of reservations is 4, both the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are lit. Flashing. In addition, in this embodiment, up to four are reserved.

In addition, when the lower special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 cannot variably display the second special symbol in the lower special symbol display 1186, when the game ball is accepted into the lower starting port 2102, It displays the pending number (stored number) of the second special symbol in which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored). This lower special symbol memory display device 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b consisting of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are lit and A blinking pattern allows the pending number to be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is lit and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol memory display lamp 1187a, 1187b are lit together, when the number of reservations is 3, the second special design memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special design memory lamp 1187b is lit, and when the number of reservations is 4, the second special design memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are lit. They are designed to flash together. In addition, in this embodiment, up to four are reserved.

Furthermore, the upper special symbol indicator 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are the first special lottery result and the second It displays the special lottery result, and the 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the 1st special lottery result and the light emission pattern (special design) of the stopped 7-segment LED The player side can be made to recognize the result of the second special lottery.

In addition, the normal symbol display device 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is red, green, orange, and a full-color LED that can change the emission color. As a result, it is possible to display the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball through the gate section 2350 . It should be noted that the display of the normal symbols by the normal symbol display 1189, like the special symbols, is changed and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the result of the normal lottery.

In addition, the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 suspends the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 when the normal symbol display 1189 cannot variably display the normal symbol. It displays the number of reserved (stored) normal symbols (stored). This normal design memory display device 1188 has four normal design memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal design memory lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of reservations. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the reserved number of normal symbols. In the present embodiment, up to four variable displays of normal symbols are held (stored).

Further, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a 2-round indicator lamp 1190a and a 15-round indicator lamp 1190b, which are made up of predetermined LEDs. A number can be displayed.

The function display unit 1180 can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 when the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. In addition, the game state indicator 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the upper special design storage display 1184, the upper special design display 1185, the lower special design display 1186, the lower special design storage display 1187, the normal design storage display 1188, The normal symbol display 1189 and the round display 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 97). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 .

In this embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, compared with the case where it is provided on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, The function display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko game machine 1 can be simplified, the cost can be prevented from increasing, and the model of the pachinko game machine 1 (table Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko game machine 1 is different, the position of the display section 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. The position of the display unit 1181 can be recognized by the player, the store clerk of the game hall, or the like without confusion.

[5-6. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1200 different from the game panel 1150 on the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 to 94, the front component member 1110, substrate holder 1160, and main control substrate box 1170 have the same configurations as those described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The game panel 1200 of this embodiment is thinner than the game panel 1150 described above, and is plate-shaped so that the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component 1110 can be defined. and a frame-like panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1110 .

The game panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal outer shape slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, glass, metal, or the like. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The thickness of this panel plate 1210 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum required thickness that can be sufficiently held even if obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has a thickness of 8 to 10 mm. In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

This panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed by round holes arranged near the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, long holes 1212 arranged near the outer periphery at the lower left corner and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. It has These fitting holes 1211 and elongated holes 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1220 . In addition, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement stepped portions 1213 recessed on the front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engaging stepped portion 1213 is cut out to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100 like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220 .

In addition, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1214, the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and has a thickness that is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of the wooden board described above (in this embodiment, 20 mm) and made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 has a holding stepped portion 1221 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a front and rear portion that is approximately the same size as the game area 1100 inside the holding stepped portion 1221 . It mainly has a through hole 1222 penetrating in the direction.

The depth from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210 , and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding stepped portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220 . and substantially the same surface. The holding stepped portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210 . Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. The clearance may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at positions corresponding to the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding stepped portion 1221, and is arranged forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1221. It has a plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 . By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging stepped portion 1213 at positions corresponding to the engaging stepped portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 . More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is arranged on the upper holding stepped portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging stepped portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1221. It projects toward and elastically engages with the engagement stepped portion 1213 . The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that the tip thereof does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220 . On the other hand, the engaging piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding stepped portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging stepped portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is located between the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1221 and the panel. The engaging stepped portion 1213 of the plate 1210 extends upward (toward the center) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 by a predetermined amount while forming a predetermined gap large enough to be inserted. By engaging the engaging stepped portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claws 1224 and the engaging pieces 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220. As shown in FIG.

The panel holder 1220 is also provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided on the front structural member 1110 can be inserted. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

As shown in FIG. 93, this panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 which is recessed forward by a predetermined amount so as to leave the lower side slightly below the center in the vertical direction and the outer peripheral edge on the rear surface side. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the outer peripheral portion of the rear surface side protruding rearward. 96) of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227 (in this embodiment, about 2.5 mm). and preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, the fixing portion 3001a can be prevented from protruding rearward from the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be attached to the body frame. 3 (pachinko game machine 1) can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding opening 601.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear side and above the housing recess 630h, into which predetermined screws can be screwed, arranged in a predetermined arrangement. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged to correspond to the mounting holes 1228 . This positioning hole 1229 is a positioning projection (for example, a positioning projection (illustrated is omitted)) is inserted. In this embodiment, the positioning hole 1229 is a substantially rectangular (square hole) blind hole when viewed from the rear.

For the mounting holes 1228, holes having a large inner diameter and those having a small inner diameter are mixed, and mounting holes having an appropriate diameter are arranged according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

In addition, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that are open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height. It has become. As shown in FIG. 92, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed within a predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, the lower end of the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is substantially flat, the rear surface of the front structural member 1110 disposed on the front surface is substantially flat, and the game ball shot from the ball shooting device 650 is flat. However, it is designed to be guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, this panel holder 1220 is formed with a lightening portion 1230 so that a mounting hole 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, support them, and maintain the strength of the panel holder 1220. It is in a state in which box-shaped ribs are formed in order to

The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to a positioning means such as an obstacle nail implantation device (not shown) and an assembly jig, and the game panel 1150 is held by the obstacle nail implantation device. It can be set in the state of In the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and an out port 1232 penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end in a front view and extends downward. A ball passage cutout portion 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front structural member 1110 and a rear projection portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction is inserted in the lower right corner of the front view. an insertion hole 1234;

In addition, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 93) that is recessed forward from the rear surface by a predetermined amount on the rear surface side of the out-port 1232 and that is open downward at the lower end side, and a front structure. A notch portion 1236 is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and penetrates in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the panel holder 1220 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front structural member 1110 at appropriate positions.

Out-ball discharge groove 1235 in this panel holder 1220, when the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 (upper surface of the game board placing portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). The positioning projection 607 provided is fitted, and by fitting the out-ball discharge groove 1235 with the positioning projection 607, the game board 4 moves relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction. It is supposed to be regulated.

In the game panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding stepped portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 are engaged with the engaging stepped portion 1213 . By joining together, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. The panel plate 1210 held by the panel holder 1220 can be set in the conventional obstacle nail implantation device without modifying the installation device, and the increase in the cost required for implantation of the obstacle nail can be suppressed. You can do it.

Although not shown, the game panel 1200 has a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. A front unit 2000 is attached. Also, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 . Thus, since the thin panel plate 1210 supports only the front unit, it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

Furthermore, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200. The pachinko game machine 1, in which the player can see the rear side of the game area 1100 through the plate 1210, can be realized, and the pachinko game machine 1 can strongly attract the player's interest.

In addition, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210, in which the position of the obstacle nail, the winning opening, etc. changes depending on the model of the pachinko game machine 1, is used as a replacement part. At the same time, the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the game board 4 compatible with various models can be obtained only by replacing the panel plate 1210.例文帳に追加.

Furthermore, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in advance in a predetermined arrangement, various predetermined members such as the rear unit 3000 mounted and fixed to the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 can be mounted and fixed in positions depending on the model. Even if the positions of the panel holders 1220 and 1220 are different, the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part of the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the model by designing the fixing parts of various members so as to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It's like

[5-7. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. FIG. 95 is a detailed front view of the game board. FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 95 as seen from the front.

The game board 4 in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 where game balls as game media are driven by the player operating the handle device 500. and a front lower right corner of the front structural member 1110 when attached to the pachinko game machine 1 at a position where it can be viewed from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side. Arranged function display unit 1180 and a plurality of openings 1158 (see FIG. 96), a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. there is

In addition, the game board 4 in the pachinko game machine 1 is arranged between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and the game panel 1150 is positioned behind the game panel 1150 with respect to a plurality of light-emitting decoration holes drilled so as to penetrate the game panel 1150. a panel lens member 2500 inserted from the side, a liquid crystal display device detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image visible from the player side according to the game state; A substrate holder 1160 attached to the lower rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and a main control substrate box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 are provided.

[5-7-1. front unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 4 includes an attacker unit 2100 arranged above the out port 1151 at the lower center in the horizontal direction in the game area 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and an attacker unit 2100 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 in the game area. A side prize winning opening member 2200 arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150, It has

This front unit 2000 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150, and attached to the front of the game panel 1150. A portion projecting forward from the game panel 1150 is positioned within the game area 1100 . As a result, the front unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and together with the obstacle nail planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, the movement of the game ball is prevented by the front unit 2000. It is designed so that it can be changed by Also, the front unit 2000 can decorate the inside of the game area 1100 .

[5-7-1a. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 has a plurality of receiving openings (winning openings) capable of receiving game balls hit into the game area 1100, specifically, in the horizontal direction. The upper starting port 2101 arranged substantially in the center of the upper starting port 2101, the lower starting port 2102 arranged below the upper starting port 2101, and the lower starting port 2102 arranged below the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102 It has a rectangular big prize winning opening 2103 extending in the horizontal direction, and general winning openings 2104 arranged on both left and right sides of the big winning opening 2103 slightly upward. A game ball received in these upper starting opening 2101, lower starting opening 2102, big winning opening 2103, and general winning opening 2104 is guided from the front side of the game panel 1150 to the rear side.

The upper starting port 2101 of this attacker unit 2100 is open at the upper side, and game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be opened by a starting port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 97) are arranged between the lower starting port 2102 arranged below the upper starting port 2101 and the upper starting port 2101 . In the state in which the pair of movable pieces 2106 are erected substantially vertically, the game ball cannot be received into the lower start opening 2102 by the upper start opening 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106, whereas the pair of movable pieces 2106 cannot be received. In a state in which the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, the game ball can be received into the lower start opening 2102. - 特許庁In other words, the pair of movable pieces 2106 make the lower starting opening 2102 a variable winning opening. The pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the starting solenoid 2105 based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate portion 2350 of the center accessory 2300, which will be described later.

Also, the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2107 capable of closing the opening. The opening/closing member 2107 is rotatably supported at its lower side, and when it is in a substantially vertical state, it can close the big winning opening 2103 to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and its upper side moves forward. 2103 is opened to accept game balls. This opening/closing member 2107 is in a state in which the large winning opening 2103 is closed in a normal game state, and a special lottery is drawn by receiving a game ball into the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 (starting winning). Depending on the result of the lottery (when the result of the special lottery is "big win" or "minor win"), the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 97) is driven to open and close.

Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward, and game balls can always be received (winning a prize).

In addition, the attacker unit 2100 includes a lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting game balls received into the lower starting port 2102 and a count switch for detecting game balls received into the big winning port 2103, although detailed illustration is omitted. 2110 are further provided, and game balls detected by the lower starting port switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160 . In addition, the upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting the game ball received to the upper starting port 2101 and the general winning port switch 3020 for detecting the game ball received to the general winning port 2104 are provided in the back unit 3000 which will be described later. ing.

[5-7-1b. Side prize opening member]
The side winning opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 on the game board 4 is located in an opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 into which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed, in the lower left part of the game panel 1150 from the center in the left-right direction. On the other hand, after being inserted from the front side, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to be aligned with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 when viewed from the front. It has two general winning ports 2201 that are directed towards each other. These two general prize-winning ports 2201 are open upward and are always capable of receiving (winning) game balls, and the game balls received into the general prize-winning ports 2201 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150. After that, it is detected by a general prize winning port switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000, which will be described later.

In addition, in the side winning opening member 2200, the left end is arranged at the upper left end at a position where the left end is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100. The shelf portion 2202 and the first shelf portion 2202 are arranged on the opposite side and the lower side of the two general winning openings 2201, and are arranged on the left-right center side of the game area 1100 (the lower starting opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 and the big winning opening). 2103 side), and the first shelf 2202 allows the game ball that has flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 to be brought to the center side of the game area 1100. It is possible.

In addition, the two general winning openings 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end of the first shelf 2202, and even if the game ball is brought to the center side of the game area 1100 by the first shelf 2202, It is designed so that there is a possibility of winning a prize in the general prize winning opening 2201 . Further, a third shelf portion 2204 is also provided on the upper side between the two general prize winning openings 2201 so as to be lowered toward the central side of the game area 1100 .

The side winning hole member 2200 is formed to have translucency as a whole, and although detailed illustration is omitted, a side winning hole decorative substrate is provided on the rear side of the second shelf part 2203. In addition, a side lamp decoration substrate 3014 in a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is arranged on the rear side of the side winning opening member 2200. The side winning opening decoration substrate and the side lamp decoration substrate 3014 make the side winning opening member 2200. can be luminous decoration.

[5-7-1c. Center role]
In addition, the center accessory 2300 of the front unit 2000 on the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 that is formed to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and then the game panel 1150 is opened. It is fixed to the front surface, and as shown in the figure, it is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the game area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view is outside the game ball between the outer periphery of the game area 1100 It is formed in an arc shape so that a gap slightly larger than the diameter is formed, and the outer peripheral surface on the left side is on a substantially straight line that hangs so that a region of a predetermined width is formed between the outer periphery of the game area 1100 is formed in

This center accessory 2300 is an upper shelf 2301 that is inclined from a position slightly rightward of the center in the left-right direction on the outer peripheral surface of the upper side of the front wall portion located in front of the game panel 1150 so as to become lower as it goes leftward. , and when the game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 1100 flows down to the upper shelf part 2301, it flows down through the left side of the center accessory 2300, and to the right side of the upper shelf part 2301 The game ball that has flowed down (entered) passes through the right side of the center accessory 2300 and flows down to the bottom of the game area 1100 at once. In other words, if a game ball is hit so that it enters the right side of the upper shelf portion 2301 of the center accessory 2300, the opportunity to enjoy the downfall of the game ball is reduced. The tension can be adjusted as appropriate, and tension can be maintained to prevent the game from becoming careless.

In addition, the center accessory 2300 enters a warp entrance 2302 through which game balls flowing down the game area 1100 can enter on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150, and the warp entrance 2302. A warp exit (not shown) that releases the game ball into the frame, and a center function that releases the game ball released from the warp exit into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100 after rolling in the left and right direction. and a stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side within the frame in 2300 .

Although not shown in detail, the stage 2310 in the center function 2300 includes a first stage where game balls released from the warp exit are supplied, and a stage in front of the first stage where game balls are delivered from the first stage. and a second stage that is supplied and capable of releasing game balls into the game area 1100 . The stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface so that the center in the left-right direction is lowered. A chance entrance 2313 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the center in the left-right direction of the first stage. It is designed to be released into the game area 1100 from the exit 2314 . As shown, this chance exit 2314 is arranged directly above the upper starting opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game balls released from the chance exit 2314 are accepted into the upper starting opening 2101 with a high probability (winning do).

The stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is formed of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, decorations placed below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 can be seen from the player side. It's becoming

In addition, the center accessory 2300 has a transparent transparent wall extending leftward so as to substantially contact the inner rail 1112 above the warp entrance 2302 on the outer peripheral surface of the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150 . An arch portion 2315 is further provided. The arch portion 2315 extends like a thin plate from the front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150 through which game balls can pass. As a result, the game ball hit into the upper part of the game area 1100 and guided to the left side of the center accessory 2300 by the upper shelf part 2301 flows downstream through the rear side of the arch part 2315 .

Further, the center accessory 2300 is provided with a gate portion 2350 for detecting the passage of a game ball near the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150 . This gate portion 2350 is arranged above the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion, and detects a gate entrance through which game balls flowing down the game area 1100 can enter, and a game ball that has entered the gate entrance. A gate switch 2352 that detects the gate switch 2352 and a gate exit that discharges the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100 . In this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the gate exit of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height position as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is It is made to look as if the part 2315 has been dived.

[5-7-2. Panel lens member]
The panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 in the pachinko game machine 1 penetrates in the front-rear direction in a circle or x shape at a position outside the opening 1158 into which the center accessory 2300 is inserted in the game area 1100 of the game panel 1150. A plurality of luminous decoration holes formed so as to luminesce are decorated. This panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the upper left side of the outer circumference of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of transparent upper panel lenses 2510 arranged behind the upper panel lens 2510 on the surface. An upper panel lens substrate on which LEDs are mounted, a transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the lower left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a transparent lower panel lens 2520 arranged behind the lower panel lens 2520. and a lower panel lens substrate having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its surface.

The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 project forward from a plate-like lens base portion, and are a plurality of rod-shaped inserted light guides having substantially the same shape as the shape of the decorative light emission hole to be inserted. has a department. When the insertion light guide part 2502 is inserted into the decorative light emitting hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, the tip of the insertion light guide part 2502 is formed so as to substantially match the front surface of the game panel 1150, and flows down the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is designed so as not to affect the game ball as much as possible.

The panel lens member 2500 allows the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate to emit light as appropriate, so that even if an opaque game panel 1150 such as veneer plywood is used, the region where the game balls flow down can be decorated with light. In addition, the game panel 1150 can be displayed to the player, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be distinguished from other pachinko game machines by making it stand out.

[5-7-3. back unit]
The back unit 3000 of the game board 4 of this embodiment is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and as shown in the figure, supports the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position a predetermined distance behind the game panel 1150. A back box 3001, an upper unit 3002 arranged inside the back box 3001 above the liquid crystal display device 1900, a sub liquid crystal unit 3400 arranged inside the back box 3001 on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and inside the back box 3001 and a gear decoration unit 3500 arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 .

In addition, the back unit 3000 is arranged at a position corresponding to the side winning opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1150 near the lower left front end of the back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. A side lamp decoration board 3014, a game ball attached to the lower front end of the back box 3001 and received into the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200, and a game received into the left general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100. A left guide member 3016 that guides the ball downward, and a right guide member 3016 that is arranged on the right side of the left guide member 3016 and guides down the game ball received into the upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning port 2104 on the right side. and a guide member 3018 .

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back unit 3000 includes a horizontally elongated rectangular lamp drive board box arranged at the rear lower part of the back box 3001 and accommodating the lamp drive board 4170 (see FIG. 99), and a back box. Panel relay terminal plate 4161 (see FIG. 97) fixed to the rear side of 3001 and arranged on the left side in rear view of the lamp drive board box, and a horizontally elongated rectangular upper resistor arranged on the upper rear side of the back box 3001 It further comprises a substrate and a locking member attached to the rear side of the back case 3001 and holding the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a detachable manner.

In this embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and each unit 3100, 3400 formed in a predetermined shape. , 3500, etc. can characterize the concept of the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. In the back unit 3000, each unit 3100, 3400, 3500 can move independently or in cooperation with each other according to the game state. , the arrival of a chance, etc., can be suggested, and the player can be entertained.

[5-7-3a. back box]
The back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 is formed in a box shape with an open front side, and has a plurality of flange-like fixing portions 3001a projecting outward at the front end. It is designed to be fixed to the rear side of the In addition, the rear box 3001 has a rectangular opening formed substantially in the center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side can be viewed from the player side through this opening. Further, the rear box 3001 has mounting portions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, 3500 and the substrates 3014 and the like at appropriate positions.

Also, although illustration is omitted, the back box 3001 has a liquid crystal display device 1900 for inserting and locking fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (right side as viewed from the back) on the right side of the opening when viewed from the back. A support portion is provided, and a lock member is attached to the left side of the opening when viewed from the back. A device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 .

[5-7-3b. Induction member]
The left guiding member 3016 in the rear unit 3000 guides the game balls received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 downward through different channels. Each channel is provided with a general prize winning port switch 3020 for detecting the passage of game balls. On the other hand, the right guide member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received in the upper starting port 2101 and the right general winning port 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 downward through different flow paths until near the lower end. An upper starting port switch 3022 is provided in the channel corresponding to the upper starting port 2101, and a general winning port switch 3020 is provided in the channel corresponding to the general winning port 2104 on the right side. Further, the right guide member 3018 is provided with a magnetism detection switch 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

The game ball guided downward by the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 is discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the board holder 1160, and is discharged below the game board 4 from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the board holder 1160. It has become so.

[5-7-3c. upper unit]
The upper unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is formed horizontally as a whole, and is attached and fixed to the upper side of the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001 . The upper unit 3100 includes a rotary decoration unit 3200 which is arranged on the front in the approximate center in the left-right direction and has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and an elevating mechanism which is arranged on the rear side of the rotary decoration unit 3200 and moves the rotary decoration unit 3200 up and down. 3250, a swinging decoration unit 3300 arranged substantially in the center in the horizontal direction on the rear side of the lifting mechanism 3250, and movable ceiling units 3350 arranged on both left and right sides of the swinging decoration unit 3300. ing.

The rotating decorative body unit 3200 of the upper unit 3100 is vertically moved by a lifting mechanism 3250 between a raised position positioned above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and a lowered position positioned substantially in the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. You can do it. In this rotary decoration unit 3200, the rotary decoration formed in the shape of a shuriken arranged on the front side rotates, and the centrifugal force of the rotation expands the radius of rotation of the rotary decoration. It's like

In this rotary decoration unit 3200, not only the rotary decoration rotates at the end, but also the rotary decoration protrudes outward in the radial direction. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, to entertain the player, to suppress the decline in interest in the game, and to strongly attract the interest of the player. This makes it possible to make the pachinko game machine 1 easily selected as a pachinko game machine that plays a game in a highly differentiated manner from other pachinko game machines.

Further, the swinging decoration unit 3300 of the upper unit 3100 has swinging decorations arranged on the left and right on the rear side so as to be adjacent to the rotating decoration unit 3200 positioned at the raised position, and the swinging decorations are arranged according to the game state. The left and right swing ornaments can be swung in the left and right direction at the same time. Further, the movable ceiling unit 3350 of the upper unit 3100 is provided with plate-like ceiling decoration bodies extending horizontally at both left and right ends of the upper unit 3100 . The ceiling decoration is formed to be rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction with the front end side as the center. It's becoming

[5-7-3d. Sub liquid crystal unit]
The sub-liquid crystal unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 has a three-dimensionally shaped character body, as shown in the figure, and the character body moves from the rightmost position to the central position in the left-right direction according to the game state. You can move to

A sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is attached to the character body of the sub-liquid crystal unit 3400 from the back side thereof. This sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state together with the liquid crystal display device 1900 or independently. A plurality of decorative LEDs 3400a, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged around the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450, which is a character body of the sub-liquid crystal unit 3400. FIG.

On the rear surface of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000, there is a liquid crystal output board box 3421 housing a liquid crystal output board 3420 for receiving drawing data from the peripheral control board 4140 and transmitting it to the lower board. A sub-liquid crystal relay board box 3423 housing a sub-liquid crystal relay board 3422 for relaying the drawing data sent by the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 to the sub liquid crystal relay board 3425, A sub liquid crystal drive board box 3430 in which a sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 for driving a sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is housed, a sub liquid crystal drive board box 3430, a sub liquid crystal relay board box 3423, and a liquid crystal output board. Box 3421 is detachably attached in order. The sub liquid crystal drive board box 3430, the sub liquid crystal relay board box 3423, and the liquid crystal output board box 3421 each have fixing pieces (not shown) protruding outward from both upper and lower sides, and are attached to the rear box 3001 via these fixing pieces. It is designed to be

[5-7-3e. Gear decoration unit]
The gear decoration unit 3500 in the rear unit 3000 includes a plurality of gear-shaped gear decorations that are rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and arranged in the vertical direction. The body rotates in unison.

[5-7-4. Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. there is The liquid crystal display device 1900 has fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from both left and right sides thereof, and is attached to the back case 3001 via the fixing pieces 1902 .

Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with a peripheral board box housing the peripheral control board 4140 on its rear side, though detailed illustration is omitted.

[6. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board for performing various controls of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 102. FIG. 97 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board and the peripheral control board, FIG. 98 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 97, and FIG. 100 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 97, and FIG. 101 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. FIG. 102 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 102 is a block diagram around VDP with built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control unit.

As shown in FIG. 97, the control structure of the pachinko game machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110 and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 4100 will be explained, and then the payout control board 4110 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be explained.

[6-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 97, the main control board 4100, which controls the progress of the game, has a main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor containing a ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. , a main control I/O port 4100b as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit 4100c to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. A drive circuit 4100d and a RAM clear switch 4100e for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"). . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM") and main control built-in RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a functions are also built in. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a has a built-in non-volatile RAM, and this non-volatile RAM contains a unique code for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 4100a (a code that only exists in the world). ) is stored in advance. Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

Shown in FIG. 95, the upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting the game ball that entered the upper starting port 2101, the lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting the gaming ball that entered the lower starting port 2102, and the general winning port 2104 A detection signal from the general prize winning port switch 3020 for detecting an entered game ball is first input to the main control input circuit 4100c, and is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I/O port 4100b. Also, shown in FIG. 95, a gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, a general winning hole switch 3020 for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 2201, and a ball that has entered the big winning hole 2103 Detection signals from the count switch 2110 for detecting game balls and the magnetism detection switch 3024 for detecting cheating using a magnet attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. It is input to the main control input circuit 4100c via the relay terminal board 4161, and is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I/O port 4100b.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, thereby controlling the starter solenoid 2105 and the attacker through the panel relay terminal plate 4161. Output a drive signal to the solenoid 2108, from the main control I / O port 4100b to the panel relay terminal plate 4161, and through the function display board 1191 upper special pattern display 1185, lower special pattern display 1186, upper special pattern storage A drive signal is output to the indicator 1184, the lower special symbol memory indicator 1187, the normal symbol indicator 1189, the normal symbol memory indicator 1188, the game state indicator 1183, and the round indicator 1190.

In this embodiment, the upper start switch 3022, the lower start switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110 are non-contact electromagnetic proximity switches. For the winning opening switches 3020, 3020, contact-type ON/OFF mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2350, so the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109 and the gate switch 2352 Game ball detection also occurs frequently. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the upper starter switch 3022, the lower starter switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. FIG. Also, when a big win game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and game balls enter frequently, so the game balls are frequently detected by the count switch 2110 . For this reason, the count switch 2110 also uses a long-life proximity switch. On the other hand, in general winning openings 2104 and 2201 into which game balls do not enter frequently, detection by general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general prize winning port switches 3020, 3020 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110 in a serial manner, and various commands related to the state of the pachinko game machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. etc. are received serially. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko game machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140. Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port for serially transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a is composed mainly of a main control CPU core 4100aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of the main control serial I/O ports, etc., are connected to the bus 4100ah. (see FIG. 106). The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 4140, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, etc. (Fig. 106). When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb, and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec transmits the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits multiple commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec after setting multiple commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. ) and BC0 (see FIG. 103). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off during the power cut-off process. When the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated when power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch 4100 e is also output to the payout control board 4110 .

[6-2. Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 98, a payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls includes a payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls related to payout, a launch control by a launch solenoid 654, and a ball feed by a ball feed solenoid 585. A firing control unit 4130 that performs control, an error LED indicator 860c that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator 860c, and FIG. A ball extraction switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail 731, and the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation is provided. .

[6-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 98, the payout control unit 4120, which performs various controls related to payout, has a payout control MPU 4120a, which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. are incorporated. And, a payout control I/O port 4120b as an I/O device and an external watchdog timer 4120c (hereinafter referred to as "external WDT 4120c") for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4120a is operating normally. ), a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, a payout control input circuit 4120e into which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, and a CR unit 6 and a CR unit input/output circuit 4120f for exchanging various signals. In the payout control MPU 4120a, in addition to the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), It also has built-in functions.

The payout control MPU 4120a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port 4120b, and clears the RAM from the main control board 4100. An operation signal (detection signal) of the switch 4100e is input via the payout control I/O port 4120b.

Shown in FIG. 70, a ball break switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of game balls in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741. The detection signal from the counting switch 751 for detecting the game balls to be played is first input to the payout control input circuit 4120e through the board 754 in the prize ball case of the prize ball device 740, and payout via the payout control I/O port 4120b. It is input to the control MPU 4120a. The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection plate 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first sent to the rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device 740, and then to the prize ball case inner board 754. is input to the payout control input circuit 4120e via and is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I/O port 4120b.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame open switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first sent to the dispensing control input circuit 4120e. , and is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I/O port 4120b.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4120e via the main door relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I/O port 4120b.

The payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I/O 4120b and the board 754 in the prize ball case, and the state of the pachinko game machine 1 is indicated by the error LED A signal for displaying on the indicator 860c is output to the error LED indicator 860c via the payout control I/O port 4120b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is sent to the payout control I/O port. 4120b to the main control board 4100 in a serial manner, or output the number of game balls actually put out to the external terminal plate 784 through the payout control I/O port 4120b. This external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko game machine 1, the game information of the pachinko game machine 1, and the like.

The error LED indicator 860c is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860c are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 4110), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it informs that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, "the ball is caught." (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the payout rotating body 748 and the game ball are engaged near the entrance, making it difficult for the payout rotating body 748 to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, indicates that the counter switch 751 is malfunctioning based on the detection signal from the counter switch 751), and when the number "5" is displayed, it is a "retry error" (specifically, When the number "6" is displayed, it is notified that the retry count of the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit value, and that the tank is "full" (specifically, the full tank switch 550 is turned on). Based on the detection signal, it informs that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of stored game balls), and when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR not connected" (discharge It informs that the electrical connection is cut off anywhere from the control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number "9" is displayed, it is "in stock" (specifically, , that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending switch 365a and a prepaid card return request signal from the return switch 365b are first sent to the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and then the game ball lending device connection terminal plate. 869 to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is received at the payout control I/O port 4120b via the input/output circuit 4120f and is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the residual of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the residual on the residual display 365c. The signal is output to the device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[6-2-2. Launch control unit]
A firing control unit 4130, which performs firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585, has a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are inputted, as shown in FIG. 4130a, a transmission circuit 4130b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit 4130c that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this launch. It has a firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit 4130e that outputs a drive signal to the ball-feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit 4130c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls are shot toward the game area 1100 per minute based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4130b, and outputs it to the firing solenoid driving circuit 4130d. At the same time, a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit 4130e.

A touch switch 516 detects whether or not the palm or fingers are in contact with the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and a shooting stop switch 518 detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the firing control input circuit 4130a through the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the firing timing control circuit 4130c. When the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit 4130a and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4130c. there is A signal from a potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting a game ball toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotating handle main body is first applied to the handle relay terminal plate 192 and then to the main door relay terminal plate 880. input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d.

The firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, based on the signal from the potentiometer 512, applies a drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506. Triggered by the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654 . On the other hand, the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit 4130e supplies a constant current to the ball-feeding solenoid 585 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the handle relay terminal plate 192 when the ball-feeding reference pulse is input. By outputting, the ball-feeding member 584 of the ball-feeding unit 580 accepts one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and when the input of the ball-feeding reference pulse ends, the constant current By stopping the output of , the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball forwarding solenoid drive circuit 4130e to the ball forwarding solenoid 585 is constant. controlled.

In addition, the power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 has a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 103) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. . Due to this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4120a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off in the process at the time of power cutoff. When the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[6-2-3. Exchanging various signals with the connection terminal board for rental equipment such as game balls]
Here, exchange of various signals between the payout control section 4120 and the CR unit 6 and exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 99, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, and also connects the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365. It also relays the electrical connection between the substrates. Between the payout control board 4110 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and between the frequency display plate 365 and the game ball rental device connection terminal The substrates with the plate 869 are electrically connected by respective wirings (harnesses). AC 24 V, which will be described later, is supplied from the power supply board 851 to the CR unit 6 via a terminal board 869 for renting equipment such as game balls. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V by a built-in voltage generating circuit (not shown), and generates the voltage together with the ground LG. , to the payout control board 4110 and the frequency display board 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 .

The frequency display plate 365 has a ball rental switch 365a, which is a push button switch, mounted at a position corresponding to the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360 shown in FIG. A return switch 365b, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the button 362, and a remaining number indicator 365c, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining rental display section 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

The ball lending switch 365a and the return switch 365b are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. FIG. When the ball lending button 361 is pressed, the ball lending switch 365a is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS is input to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. It has become so. When the return button 362 is pressed, the return switch 365b is switched on (ON) so that the return operation signal RES is input to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. It's becoming

The remaining number indicator 365c is composed of three segment indicators arranged in a row. Of these three-digit segment indicators, each one-digit segment indicator is sequentially driven. The lighting of the segment display is controlled. With such lighting control, the remaining credits indicator 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or an error of the CR unit 6. FIG. The remaining number indicator 365c includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a one-digit segment display out of three-digit segment displays, and the specified one-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be lit and displayed are input from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, according to the digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G which have been input, the 1-digit segment displays are sequentially illuminated, and the contents of the 3-digit segment displays are displayed as the loan balance. It can be visually recognized through the display unit 363 . A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the power display plate 365 adjacent to the remaining power display 365c. A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365d via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. As shown in FIG. A predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lendable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via a CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 851 with a built-in voltage creation circuit, and when the ball lending switch 365a and the return switch 365b are valid and the ball lending possible state controls the logic of the ball lendable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the remaining number indicator 365c through the current limiting resistor mounted on the terminal board 869 for connecting the game ball lending device.

When the ball rental button 361 is pressed and the ball rental operation signal TDS is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, the CR unit 6 outputs the ball rental request signal BRDY. , game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a). Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rental balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which is equivalent to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying the start or end of one payout operation, to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. to output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board for connecting the machine for renting game balls, etc. 869 to the CR unit 6. For example, if the hall clerk or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that game balls worth 200 yen are paid out when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. is performed twice in a row, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen will be paid out, and a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

When the return button 362 is pressed and the return operation signal RES is input from the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 from the frequency display plate 365, the CR unit 6 ejects the prepaid card from an insertion slot (not shown). to be returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount after subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball rental button 361 .

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 4140 includes, as shown in FIG. and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5; A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds information and music and sound effects that flow from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 and a volume adjustment volume 4140a for adjusting the volume of such as by rotating the knob.

[6-3-1. Peripheral control unit]
Peripheral control unit 4150, which performs performance control, includes, as shown in FIG. Various information (for example, specifying the screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900) that continues across the peripheral control unit steady-state processing that is executed each time a V blank signal is input from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 Peripheral control RAM 4150c that stores information for managing schedule data that determines the light emission mode of various LEDs, etc., and various information that continues over the day (for example, when a big hit game state occurs Peripheral control SRAM 4150d for storing information for managing history, information for managing special effect flags, etc.) and peripheral control external watchdog for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally and a timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 4150e”). Peripheral control RAM 4150c can retain the stored contents only for a period of time when power is restored immediately after an instantaneous power failure occurs. ), the peripheral control SRAM 4150d loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"). As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM is provided on the power supply board 851, when the game board 4 is removed from the pachinko game machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. can no longer hold and lose its contents. The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a fixed period, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when various commands from the main control board 4100 are received, based on these various commands, each decoration board The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the plurality of LEDs provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 and / or the plurality of decorative LEDs 3400 a of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 is sent to the serial I / O for the lamp drive board The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the lamp drive board 4170 from the port and for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are motor driven. Door-side motor drive data for transmitting from the board serial I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 and for outputting drive signals to the electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 is frame-decorated. It is transmitted from the drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. The door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the LED etc. is sent from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and then to the peripheral door relay terminal. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the plate 882 .

Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Also, detection signals from rotation detection switches 432a and 432b for detecting rotation (rotation direction) of dial operation portion 401 and operation of pressing operation portion 405, which are provided in operation unit 400 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the press detection switch 432c for detection is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is sent to the door-side serial transmission circuit. , is input to the operation unit detection serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 .

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 . It is serialized by a serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable object detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor drive board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"). It is diagnosed whether or not

[6-3-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 101, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a peripheral control CPU core 4150aa as the center, a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I/O controllers. /O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads/writes various data from/to the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via the internal bus 4150ah. Various data are read from and written to the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h. , an internal bus 4150ah, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and an external bus 4150h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d. /O port 4150ag and peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built into the peripheral control MPU 4150a, a peripheral control various serial I/O port 4150ae built into the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af. , peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A/D converters 4150ak and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, to transfer data independently. In addition, while reading and writing the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab via the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, and It reads and writes from/to an input/output device such as a peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak via a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and a peripheral bus 4150ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I/O Port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak and other input/output devices are independent without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the external bus 4150h. I/O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak, and other input/output devices via peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150ai , read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Storage devices such as SRAM 4150d, input/output devices such as peripheral control serial I/O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control parallel I/O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A/D converters 4150ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control various serial I/O ports 4150ae are serial I/O port for lamp drive board, serial I/O port for motor drive board, serial I/O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, serial I/O port for main control board, and serial I/O port for acquisition of operation unit information.

A peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer, and does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer expires) to the WDT 4150af with built-in peripheral control, it is reset. will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the WDT 4150af with built-in peripheral control within a certain period, it can restart the timer count, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control parallel I/O port 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. output a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and the upper decoration on the door frame 5 A lighting signal for the LED 286b mounted on the upper decoration board 286 of the unit 280 is output. As described above, the LED 286b is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big win game state is confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED 286b and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 4150ag are directly connected electrically, the path between the LED 286b and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 4150ag can be shortened. Noise countermeasures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED 286b, which has a significant meaning in the game. The lighting control of the LED 286b is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, and the other LEDs excluding this LED 286b are executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing described later. It has become.

Peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to volume control volume 4140a, and its resistance value is varied by rotating the knob of volume control volume 4140a. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. A speaker 821 provided on the body frame 3 and speakers 130 and 222 provided on the door frame 5 by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source to be described later) so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6. , 262 to play music and sound effects. In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying pachinko game machine 1 clerk or the like of the occurrence of malfunctions of the pachinko game machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko game machine 1, content related to game performance, etc. (For example, to make the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 more powerful, or to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will shift to an advantageous game state for the player, etc.) Notification sounds also flow from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, but the notification sounds and notification sounds are not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all. The sound volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source to be described later) by a program from mute to maximum sound volume. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. As a result, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob portion of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided on the door frame 5 can be turned on. 130, 222, and 262, the sound effects such as music and sound effects are reduced. , maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen unfolding on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, and the player is notified that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can also

[6-3-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound generation schedule for generating music, sound effects, and the like. data, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 . The schedule data for generating the light emission mode is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. and a track number for indicating in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are directly read out from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed. Some copies are read and executed. Various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may also be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or stored in the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. Some of them are read out by copying them in .

Further, the peripheral control ROM 4150b includes a luminance correction program for correcting the luminance of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the operating time of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165. ing. This luminance correction program corrects the decrease in luminance due to aging of the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type. The date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the 4165, and the acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and brightness adjustment information that is currently set. For example, based on the date and time when the power of the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is initially turned on. If six months have already passed since the date and time when the power was turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the brightness is adjusted to 80% by adding 5%, which is the acquired correction information, to the 75%, based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. to adjust the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and turn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and if twelve months have already passed since the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information ( For example, 10%) is acquired, and when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LEDs included in the brightness setting information is 75%, only 10%, which is the acquired correction information for this 75%, Further, the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the added brightness is 85%.

[6-3-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
A peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150ca for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs; A backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are copied. various control program copy area 4150cd for exclusively storing the data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b; A copy area 4150ce and a backup unmanaged work area 4150cf for exclusively storing information not to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs are provided. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), a value of 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf to clear it to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, the first backup area 4150cb, and the second backup area 4150cc, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, a power-on command (see FIG. 120) from the main control board 4100 starts the RAM clear effect and When it is to instruct the start of each state production (for example, to instruct the start of production when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated), it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 4150ca is performance information (which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit regular processing executed each time a V blank signal is input from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, which will be described later). 1fr) for exclusive use as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. and Bank0 (1 ms) which is exclusively stored as a backup target. The names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms) will be briefly explained here. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150 cc, which will be described later, are of the same storage area as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(1fr)" is a state in which, as will be described later, when VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to liquid crystal display device 1900, screen data from peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted. Since a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a to indicate that the Therefore, the effect information (1fr) attached to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" (effect information (1fr) and effect backup information (1fr) described later have the same meaning). As will be described later, "(1ms)" is defined as "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", and "Bank2" because the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. It is added to "Bank3" and "Bank4" (effect information (1ms) and effect backup information (1ms) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 and/or a plurality of decoration LEDs 3400a of the sub-liquid crystal unit 3400 is stored. It is a storage area in which the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for output is set, and in the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 are stored. is a storage area in which door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is set to the reception command storage area 4150cac. It is a storage area in which various commands are received and the received various commands are set. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a described later) is set. The schedule data storage area 4150cae is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) are set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy area 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set

Bank 0 (1 ms) is provided with frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the like. It is Door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. This is a storage area to be set, and in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 is stored. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. This is a storage area in which various types of information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set. Various information (for example, the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400) obtained by acquiring the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (rotation direction) history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in Bank 0 (1fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf in Bank 0 (1ms). and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa when the peripheral controller steady-state processing described later is executed. , when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, and the peripheral control unit steady-state Each time the process is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the current peripheral control unit steady process, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame-decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. be. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in this peripheral control unit steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It's becoming

In the frame-decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the door is added to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is stored in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 4150caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing was executed. Based on this, the process proceeds.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It's like

Next, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc dedicated to storing copies of performance information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the first backup area 4150cb and the second backup area 4150cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Effect information (1 ms), which is copied at high speed to the first backup area 4150cb and the second backup area 4150cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used. , as effect backup information (1 ms), is transferred to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Copied quickly. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the first backup area 4150cb, one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is changed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

In the backup second area 4150cc, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is changed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

Thus, in this embodiment, in the first backup area 4150cb, one pair is Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr), and one pair is Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms). The backup second area 4150cc is an area for managing as a page. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 4150cb and the second backup area 4150cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as performance backup information (1fr) by the peripheral control unit every 1 frame. Each time a routine process is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to the first backup area 4150cb and the second backup area 4150cc, and the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. is backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed as backup backup information (1ms). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac executes high-speed copying by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in common. That is, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and the performance information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (common program execution).

[6-3-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs; A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are such that when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the power-on command (see FIG. 120) from the main control board 4100 is transmitted to the RAM. Even when instructing the start of the clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, when instructing the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated), zero clear not. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, backup first area 4150cb, and backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state, etc.) ) can be cleared, but the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

The backup management target work area 4150da includes performance information (SRAM), which is various information that continues over the course of the day (for example, information for managing the history of the occurrence of a big hit game state and for managing a special performance flag). information, etc.) to be backed up. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly explained. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a first backup area 4150db to a second backup area 4150dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(SRAM)" is for backing up various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. , and “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, a backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc dedicated to storing copies of performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The first backup area 4150db and the second backup area 4150dc are managed as one page, with two banks forming one pair. Effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Then, it is copied at high speed to the first backup area 4150db and the second backup area 4150dc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the first backup area 4150db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) form a pair, and this pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

In the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are paired, and this pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first backup area 4150db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page. 4150dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 4150db and the second backup area 4150dc.

[6-3-2. Liquid crystal and sound control section]
Rendering control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450, and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 are performed. As shown in FIG. 100, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 has a built-in sound source (hereinafter referred to as “internal sound source”) for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects. Sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4160a for controlling drawing of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450; and an audio data transmission IC 4160c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as audio data.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to commands from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. 4150cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the top screen data of the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After extracting from the control data copy area 4150ce and outputting to the VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator, when a V blank signal to be described later is input as a trigger, the first screen data is extracted according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. The following screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, stores the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data each time the V blank signal is input. Then, the screen data is output one by one from the first screen data to the VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a extracts the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. and set it to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After extracting from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the RAM 4150c and outputting it to the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a, when the V blank signal is input, the first sound is played according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Next sound command data following the command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and receives the V blank signal. Each time, the sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a one by one from the top sound command data.

When drawing data from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source is received by the sub-liquid crystal drive board 3425 via the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub-liquid crystal relay board 3422, the peripheral control MPU 4150a detects that the received drawing data is abnormal data. When the sub-liquid crystal drive board 3425 determines that it is difficult to draw on the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450, a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, is transmitted from the sub-liquid crystal drive board 3425 to the sub-liquid crystal relay board 3422, and then the liquid crystal output board 3420. It is designed to be entered via

[6-3-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the built-in tone generator described above, the VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. is extracted, sprite data is created, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and/or the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is generated. ”). The tone generator built-in VDP 4160a outputs the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the liquid crystal display device 1900 via the liquid crystal output board 3420 from the channels CH1 and CH2. Drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900 via the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, whereas drawing data output from the channel CH2 is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub-liquid crystal relay substrate 3422. , and is output to the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 via the sub-liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 .

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), whereas channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420 a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 and output to the sub-liquid crystal drive board 3425 via the sub-liquid crystal relay board 3422 . The serialized various signals are restored to parallel signals and output to the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 .

The game board side emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of decoration LEDs 3400a of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 shown in FIG. Upon receiving the game board side light emission data, the lamp drive board 4170 outputs a drive signal to the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 via the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422 based on the game board side light emission data. As a result, the sub-liquid crystal drive board 3425 outputs a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the plurality of decoration LEDs 3400a, and causes the plurality of decoration LEDs 3400a to be gradation lighting, lighting, or blinking. You can do it.

In this way, when peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs screen data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on liquid crystal display device 1900 and/or sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 to VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator, VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator receives this input. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and/or the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 by extracting character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the obtained screen data to create sprite data. is generated on the built-in VRAM, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 from channels CH1 and CH2. In other words, "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and/or the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is generated on the built-in VRAM. It is the data for

Here, the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. there is Channel CH2 uses a parallel interface as described above. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , the green video signal, and the blue video signal each consist of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits. It is input to IC3420a. Since the lower 2 bits are very weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator.

Three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source. and are input to the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a transmits three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock. These signals are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Ga-Thine Electronics Co., Ltd., and these various signals are serialized using only a differential 1-pair cable. is transmitted to the sub-liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 via the sub-liquid crystal relay substrate 3422 . Upon receiving the serial signal (serial data), the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 restores the various signals serialized in the liquid crystal output board 3420 to parallel signals and outputs them to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 . When the sub-liquid crystal drive board 3425 receives drawing data from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data and it is difficult to draw on the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450, it notifies that fact. A LOCKN signal to be transmitted, which will be described later, is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150 a of the peripheral control section 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the sub-liquid crystal relay board 3422 and the liquid crystal output board 3420 .

When the VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the liquid crystal display device 1900, it outputs a V blank signal indicating that it is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a. is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and for the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 as well, when drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output board 3420 from the channel CH2, the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted. A V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a to notify that it is ready. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 . Also, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a are mounted.

Note that the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer system. The "frame buffer system" is, for example, a frame buffer (internal VRAM) that holds drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and stores the data in the frame buffer (internal VRAM). This is a method of outputting retained drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the liquid crystal display device 1900 .

In addition, when the above-described sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on the command from the main control board 4100, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source displays the music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 or the fraudulent act on the pachinko game machine 1 A subvolume value is incorporated that adjusts the .

Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. . The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 are amplified to a master volume value, which is the sound volume, and the amplified production sound is serialized to be audio data. It is designed to output to the transmission IC 4160c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume is amplified to the master volume value, so that the speaker 821 and the The volume of sound emitted from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effect, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used and the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used By synthesizing the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the set volume adjustment volume 4140a, the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually output to the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the door. It amplifies to the master volume value which becomes the sound volume flowing from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided in the frame 5, serializes the amplified dramatic sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Sound data of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used, and volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used. , and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is the volume actually flowing from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5. is amplified to the master volume value, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

Here, when the effect sound is played from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, the pachinko game machine 1 malfunctions and fraudulent acts on the pachinko game machine 1 occur. To give a brief explanation of the control of playing the notification sound to notify the hall clerk, etc. The sound data, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the informational sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and this synthesized The volume of the effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are amplified to a master volume value which is the volume actually flowing from the speaker 821 provided on the body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222 and 262 provided on the door frame 5, and this amplification is performed. The produced sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. In other words, the sounds that are actually emitted from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 are only the notification sounds with the maximum volume. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, but the effect sound does not flow from the above-described sound generation schedule data. is proceeding according to

In this embodiment, the notification sound is emitted from the speaker 821 provided on the body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). Then, the volume of the effect sound progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute until now is reduced to the sub-volume value by the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. (At this time, if the adjustment is made by shifting to the setting mode by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound ), and the sound flows from the speaker 821 provided on the body frame 3 and the speakers 130 , 222 and 262 provided on the door frame 5 .

In this way, when the performance sound is being played from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, the pachinko game machine 1 malfunctions and fraud occurs. When the notification sound is played to notify the staff of the hall of the action, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is emitted from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222 and 262 provided on the door frame 5. Although it flows, this muted effect sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation. When the sound stops flowing from 222, 262, the effect sound does not start playing again from the point where the informational sound started to flow, but starts playing again from the point where it progressed according to the schedule data for sound generation until a predetermined period has elapsed since the informational sound started to flow. It's getting started.

[6-3-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, as shown in FIG. 102, draws main liquid crystal character data for drawing various images in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and various images in the display region of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. In addition to character data for sub-liquid crystal for sub-liquid crystal display, various sound data such as music, effect sound, notification sound, notification sound, etc. are stored in advance.

[6-3-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
As shown in FIG. 102, the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives serialized audio data from the built-in sound source VDP 4160a, and relays the right audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. Through the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, while transmitting toward the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame peripheral relay terminal as differential serial data with positive signal and negative signal. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 . As a result, the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5 reproduce music, sound effects, etc. in stereo according to various presentations. The audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as differential serial data between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, the plus signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are synthesized by the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194 to form one left-side audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[6-3-3. RTC control section]
As shown in FIG. 100, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a incorporates a RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that holds calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko game machine 1) without being supplied with power at all from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko game machine 1). As a result, even if power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. The effect based on this can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 . For example, if it is December 25th, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a Christmas tree or reindeer screen, or if it is New Year's Eve, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a New Year countdown screen. and so on. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED luminance setting information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is of an LED type. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs backlight luminance adjustment by PWM control. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900. and the brightness of the LEDs that are the backlights of the . In addition to the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date and hour, minute, and second first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is designed to ON/OFF control or ON only the backlight when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is of cold cathode tube type. Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date/time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set on the production line of the game machine manufacturer. In order to perform various tests such as a display test of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the production line, the input date and time information is the date and time when the power supply of the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on. is set to the date and time of manufacture.

In this way, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores information such as brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type. The information that needs to be maintained can be stored independently of the model information of the machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state with a low probability or a high probability).

In addition, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright or too dark depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. Sometimes it's too much. Therefore, by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. there is When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in a customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 . to be displayed. By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, it is possible to reset calendar information and time information and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a desired brightness. can. This adjusted desired luminance is overwritten (updated and stored) as the luminance of the LED stored in the luminance setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described luminance correction program so that when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type, the secular change of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is corrected. It corrects the decrease in brightness that accompanies it. Peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires input date and time information from RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, and converts calendar information specifying the date and hour, minute, and second. Brightness adjustment information for acquiring time information to be specified, specifying the current date and time, and adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. and the currently set luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

For example, based on the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first powered on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first powered on, the peripheral control ROM 4150b responds. Correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired, and when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LEDs included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% by adding 5%, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on first. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power was turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%. When the backlight of the display device 1900 is turned on, the brightness is adjusted to 85% by adding 10%, which is the acquired correction information, to the 75%, based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on. The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 to specify the current date and time.

[6-3-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume control volume 4140a rotates the knob to adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like, which are played from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5. can be adjusted by As described above, the volume control volume 4140a is adapted to vary its resistance value by rotating the knob thereof, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak is connected to the knob. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into values in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. A speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and speakers 130 and 222 provided on the door frame 5 are controlled by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source to be described later) so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6. , 262 to play music and sound effects.

In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko game machine 1, Announcing the contents of the game performance (for example, making the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 more powerful, notifying that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.) ) also flows from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound can be adjusted based on the turning operation of the knob. It is designed to flow without any dependence, and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source to be described later) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 levels described above. As a result, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob portion of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided on the door frame 5 can be adjusted. 130, 222, and 262, the sound effects such as music and sound effects are reduced. , maximum volume) can be played.

Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the fraudulent act of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen unfolding on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, and the player is notified that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can also

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a, the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, the setting mode can be entered and the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in a customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 . to be displayed. By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume.

Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. . This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data such as music, sound effects, etc. is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is adjusted. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume control volume 4140 a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 , the body frame 3 must always be left open from the outer frame 2 . Then, the person who can turn the knob of the volume control volume 4140a is the store clerk in the hall. However, with the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, the player may find the music and sound effects to be too soft and difficult to hear, and the player may feel loud and the music and sound effects loud. Therefore, after the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, within a predetermined period of time, the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated, or the liquid crystal display device 1900 is put into a customer waiting state and a demonstration is performed. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the operation unit 400 is in, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the operation is performed according to the screen of the setting mode. By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the unit 400, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. The dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a non-playing state for a predetermined period of time, and the customer waiting state is reached and the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 is repeated (for example, 10 times), the previous , the volume adjusted by the player sitting in front of the pachinko game machine 1 and playing the game is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is set to the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a. As a result, if the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko game machine 1 last time felt that the adjusted sound volume was too small to hear the music and sound effects, the player could sit in front of the pachinko game machine 1 this time. A player who sits down and plays a game can operate the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level. If the player who has been playing pachinko feels the adjusted volume is loud and the music and sound effects are loud, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko game machine 1 and plays the game can press the dial operation section of the operation unit 400. 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired volume.

[7. power supply system]
Next, power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. FIG. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko game machine, and FIG. 104 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 851 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds of various substrates and the grounds of various terminal plates are electrically connected to the ground of the power supply substrate 851, although not shown.

[7-1. Power board]
The power board 851 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 852 shown in FIG. 79 is operated, power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 851, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be powered on.

As shown in FIG. 103, the power supply board 851 includes a full-wave rectifying circuit 851a, a power factor improving circuit 851b, a smoothing circuit 851c, a +5.2V generating circuit 851d, a +5.25V generating circuit 851e, a +12V generating circuit 851f, and a +24V generating circuit. A circuit 851g is provided. The full-wave rectifier circuit 851a full-wave rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 851b. The power factor correction circuit 851b improves the power factor of the full-wave rectified power to produce DC +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 851c. This smoothing circuit 851c removes the input +37V ripple, smoothes +37V, and generates +5.2V generation circuit 851d, +5.25V generation circuit 851e, +12V generation circuit 851f, +24V generation circuit 851g, payout control board. 4110, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, respectively. The +5.2V generating circuit 851d generates DC +5.2V (DC+5.2V, hereinafter referred to as "+5.2V") from the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. A power supply system to which this +5.2V is applied and supplied becomes a +5.2V power supply line. The +5.25V generating circuit 851e generates DC +5.25V (DC +5.25V, hereinafter referred to as "+5.25V") from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power system to which this +5.25V is applied and supplied becomes the +5.25V power supply line. The +12V generating circuit 851f generates DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V") from the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. A power supply system to which this +12V is applied and supplied becomes a +12V power supply line. The +24V generating circuit 851g generates DC +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. A power supply system to which this +24V is applied and supplied becomes a +24V power supply line. The voltage generated by the +5.2V generation circuit 851d, the +12V generation circuit 851f, and the +24V generation circuit 851g is supplied to the payout control board 4110, and the +5.25V generation circuit 851e, the +12V generation circuit 851f, and the +24V generation circuit 851g. The generated voltage is supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 851 in addition to the full-wave rectifier circuit 851a.

The power supply board 851 also includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. Capacitor BC0 is a backup power supply for RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in main control MPU4100a of main control board 4100, capacitor BC1 is built in payout control MPU4120a of payout control unit 4120 in payout control board 4110 It is a backup power supply for RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

+5.2V generated by the +5.2V generation circuit 851d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, as will be described later. +5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. The +5.2 V supplied to the main control board 4100 is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 (hereinafter referred to as “the negative terminal of the capacitor BC1”) is connected to the ground, while its positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as the “positive terminal of the capacitor BC1”). ) is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 4110. That is, the power from the +5.2V generation circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM in the forward direction due to the diode PD0, the + terminal of the capacitor BC1, A current flows in the direction of In this way, the capacitor BC1 is +5.2V by an electrical connection method in which +5.2V generated by the +5.2V generating circuit 851d is returned to the payout control board 4110 and then from the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board 851 again. 2V is applied to enable charging. As a result, when power from the +5.2V generating circuit 851d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a because it is blocked by the diode PD0, the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 (hereinafter referred to as "the - terminal of the capacitor BC0") is grounded, while its positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as the "+ terminal of the capacitor BC0"). ) is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. In other words, the power from the +5.2V generation circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is forward due to the diode MD0, and the + terminal of the capacitor BC0. A current flows in the direction of In this way, the capacitor BC0 is an electrical circuit in which +5.2V created by the +5.2V creation circuit 851d returns to the power supply board 851 from the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the payout control board 4110 again. Depending on the connection method, +5.2 V is applied to enable charging. As a result, when power from the +5.2V generating circuit 851d is no longer supplied to the main control board 4100, the charges charged in the capacitor BC0 are supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a does not operate because the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a. It has become so.

[7-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline about the voltage supplied to each control board etc. is demonstrated, Then, the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the firing power supply board 831 is demonstrated.

Three kinds of voltages +5.2V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110 as shown in FIG. 4100 is also supplied. The four types of voltages +5.25 V, +12 V, +24 V, and +37 V generated by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and are supplied to the peripheral control board via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. 4140, three voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, and +24 V among the four voltages are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 .

The four types of voltages +5.25 V, +12 V, +24 V, and +37 V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are applied to the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180 as shown in FIG. 104(a). 4180a, a drive signal is output from the drive source drive circuit 4180a to an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the game board 4, and two of the four voltages, +24V and +37V, are displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is supplied to the device 1900. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a liquid crystal module 1900a for which drawing is controlled, and a backlight power supply circuit 1900b for generating power for the backlight of the liquid crystal module 1900a. is supplied to the backlight power supply circuit 1900 b , and one of the four voltages, +12 V, is supplied to the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 . The liquid crystal output board 3420, in addition to the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a shown in FIG. A circuit 3420b and the like are provided. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 3420b is supplied to the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and the like.

Of the four voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, +24 V, and +37 V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140, three voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, and +24 V are applied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170. Various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal are output to the sub-liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 via various decoration substrates of the game board 4 and/or the sub-liquid crystal relay substrate 3422 from the lamp driving circuit 4170a. .

The sub-liquid crystal relay board 3422 is supplied with three voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, and +24 V through the lamp drive board 4170, and also a voltage of LCD +12 V obtained by branching +12 V at the liquid crystal output board 3420. The voltage of each kind is relayed to the sub-liquid crystal drive board 3425 .

The sub-liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 is supplied with four voltages of +5.25V, +12V, +24V, and LCD+12V via the sub-liquid crystal relay substrate 3422 . +12V and LCD+12V are originally the same voltage, but on the sub-liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, a wiring pattern is formed so that +12V and LCD+12V are not electrically connected. This prevents the formation of a +12V closed loop power supply circuit by electrically connecting +12V and LCD +12V. The sub-liquid crystal drive board 3425 includes a +3.3V generation circuit 3425a that generates +3.3V from the LCD +12V. and a sub-liquid crystal unit 3400 shown in FIG. 95 to which the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is attached. +3.3 V created by the +3.3 V creation circuit 3425a and the backlight power source created by the backlight power supply circuit 3425b are the sub-liquid crystal display device. 3450 supplied.

+5.25V is supplied to the decoration LED drive circuit 3425c and +12V and +24V are supplied to the decoration LED 3400a which is a full color LED. A plurality of decoration LEDs 3400a arranged around the character body of the sub-liquid crystal unit 3400 to which the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is attached are composed of two systems in which three full-color LEDs are electrically connected in series, and four full-color LEDs. are electrically connected in series, and a total of 14 full-color LEDs are provided. A full-color LED contains three LEDs of red, green, and blue in one package. Since the voltage Vf is about 3 V, when three full-color LEDs are electrically connected in series, Vf of blue and green is about 9 V. When four full-color LEDs are electrically connected in series, Vf of blue and green becomes about 12V. For this reason, +12V is supplied to two systems in which three full-color LEDs are electrically connected in series, while +12V is supplied to two systems in which four full-color LEDs are electrically connected in series. , +24V are supplied. That is, some of the decoration LEDs 3400a, which are full-color LEDs, are supplied with +12V and others with +24V. Dimly lit, illuminated, or flashing. A drive signal from the lamp drive board 4170 is input to the decoration LED drive circuit 3425c.

On the other hand, the three voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 104(b). Of the three voltages, +12V is supplied to a +9V generating circuit 194a to generate DC +9V (DC+9V, hereinafter referred to as "+9V"). The frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 supplies four types of voltages including the +9V generated by the +9V generating circuit 194a in addition to the three types of voltages to various decoration boards of the door frame 5 and the like.

[7-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 103, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and a power outage monitoring circuit 4110b in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a. This payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with +5.2V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from this +5.2V. This +5.2V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120, for example. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 851, and monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when detecting a sign of +12V and +24V power failure or momentary power failure. This blackout warning signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal display device 1900, as shown in FIGS. While being transmitted to the backlight power supply circuit 1900b, it is also transmitted to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and is transmitted to the door frame 5 via the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. It is designed to be transmitted to various decorative substrates and the like.

Note that +12V and +24V are supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, +12V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4120e of the payout control unit 4120, and +24V is supplied to the payout control unit 4120, for example. It is also supplied to the motor driving circuit 4120d and the like. Also, +37 from the power board 851 is not used at all in the payout control board 4110 and is supplied to the firing power board 831 as it is via the payout control board 4110 . The firing power supply board 831 creates a predetermined voltage, which will be described later, from the supplied +37V, and supplies it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the firing control section 4130 .

In this way, by providing the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in the payout control board 4110 on the side of the main body frame 3, there is no need to install the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b each time the game board 4 is manufactured. can contribute to reduction.

Here, in this embodiment, the reason why the payout control board 4110 is provided with the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b will be briefly described. +5.2V, +12V and +24V from the power board 851 are supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 as described above. In other words, +5.2V, +12V, and +24V from the power supply board 851 provided on the side of the main body frame 3 are transmitted to the main control board 4100 provided on the side of the game board 4 through the main body frame, which has the closest relationship as a transmission path. It is supplied via a payout control board 4110 provided on the 3 side. As a result, compared to the case where the power supply board 851 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit, it is possible to monitor +12V and +24V power failures or signs of momentary power failures in a closer relationship as a transmission path to the main control board 4100. Shortening the transmission path for transmitting the notice signal to the main control board 4100 can contribute to speeding up the timing at which the main control board 4100 starts backing up important game information. Also, by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power supply lines, the +12V power supply line and the +24V power supply line, the voltage applied to either the +12V power supply line or the +24V power supply line is monitored. Signs of power interruptions such as power outages or momentary interruptions can be more accurately grasped than in the case. In recent pachinko machines, door frames, game boards, etc., are provided with an extremely large number of electric decorations to provide players with gorgeous and powerful and attractive effects. tend to increase. Along with this, the power consumption is also increasing, and the opportunity to improve the power supply board is also increasing. On the other hand, since the payout control board is a board exclusively for performing game ball payout operations and the like, there is very little opportunity to recreate it unless there is a major system improvement related to payout. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the reason described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is not provided on the power supply board 851, but is provided on the payout control board 4110.

[7-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 103, the main control board 4100 includes a main control filter circuit 4100g in addition to the main control MPU 4100a. The main control filter circuit 4100g is supplied with +5.2V from the payout control board 4110, and removes noise from this +5.2V. This +5.2 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 via the diode MD0, and also supplied to the main control MPU 4100a, for example. +12V from the payout control board 4110, for example, is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100c, etc., +24V from the payout control board 4110, for example, is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d.

[7-2-3. Voltage supplied to the launch power supply board]
The launch power supply board 831, as shown in FIG. 103, includes a DC/DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 (capacitance: 4700 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). DC / DC converter 831a steps down the +37V from the payout control board 4110 to create DC +35V (DC +35V, hereinafter referred to as "+35V") to drive the firing solenoid of the firing control unit 4130 in the payout control board 4110 It feeds into circuit 4130d.

The negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (hereinafter referred to as "the negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0") is connected to the ground, while its positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as the "+ terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0") is grounded. is electrically connected to the +35V output terminal of the DC/DC converter 831a. That is, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is charged by applying +35V output from the DC/DC converter 831a. In this embodiment, the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are merged so that the combined current flows through the discharge solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the payout control board 4110 It's becoming A detailed description thereof will be given later.

As described above, +5.2V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the payout control board 4110, while +5.25V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. there is +5.2V and +5.25V are control reference voltages for each control board. For the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100, which have short power supply paths, +5.2V is supplied from the power supply board 851 because the voltage drop (voltage drop) associated with the wiring can be estimated to be small. On the other hand, the total length of the wiring, that is, the power supply path is longer than the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100. However, for the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and various decoration boards on the door frame side that are subordinate to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, the voltage drop (voltage drop) associated with the wiring cannot be ignored. +5.25V, which is a voltage higher than +5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100, is supplied from the power supply board 851.

[8. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. FIG. 105 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, and FIG. 106 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. First, the main control filter circuit 4100g shown in FIG. 103 will be described, followed by the power supply, main control system reset IC, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, and main control I/O port created by the main control board 4100. Various input/output signals such as 4100b and inter-board communication interface circuits between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 105, the main control board 4100 includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control I/O port 4100b, a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, and peripheral circuits such as a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, It mainly consists of a main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 (24 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal.

[8-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 105, the main control filter circuit 4100g is mainly composed of a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has +5.2V applied to its first terminal from the power supply board 851 through the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. +5.2 V from which the noise component has been removed is output from the No. terminal. The +5.2 V applied to the No. 1 terminal is first smoothed by removing ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) by an electrolytic capacitor MC0 connected to the ground (GND).

The +5.2V output from the 3rd terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples by a capacitor MC1 and an electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) which are grounded. has been made This smoothed +5.2 V is applied to the main control system reset MIC1 power supply terminal, the main control crystal oscillator MX0 power supply terminal VDD terminal, the main control MPU 4100a power supply terminal VDD terminal, and the main control I/O port 4100b. are applied to the VCC terminals, etc., which are power supply terminals of the .

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor MC3, and the VCC terminal of the main control I/O port 4100b is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor MC4. And the +5.2V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is grounded, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control I/O port 4100b, is grounded.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and is also electrically connected to the grounded capacitor MC5. ing. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the capacitor MC5, and is electrically connected to the + terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 103 via the resistor MR0. properly connected. That is, the +5.2V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. It is applied to the + terminal of the capacitor BC0. As a result, as described above, when power from the +5.2V generating circuit 851d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. is supplied to the main control board 4100 as a main control board 4100, the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a. The memory contents are held by applying the main VBB.

[8-2. Main control system reset IC]
The +5.2 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I/O port 4100b, and has a built-in delay circuit. A grounded capacitor MC6 is electrically connected to the delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, and the delay time of the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC6. . Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time when +5.2 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold (for example, 4.25 V).

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the RESETN terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control I/O port 4100b. The output terminal is of an open collector output type, and is pulled up to +5.2 V by a pull-up resistor MR1. The voltage pulled up to the +5.2V side is smoothed by removing ripples by a grounded capacitor MC7 (the capacitor MC7 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. While being input to the RESETN terminal of the O port 4100b, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESETN of the main control I/O port 4100b. input to the terminal. The SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESETN terminal of the main control I/O port 4100b are negative logic inputs. A reset is applied to the O port 4100b. The power terminal is electrically connected to the ground and a capacitor MC8, and the +5.2 V input to the power terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground, and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[8-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5.2 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to a grounded capacitor MC9, and the +5.2 V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5.2 V is also input to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5.2 V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The main control MPU 4100a to which this clock signal is input outputs the clock signal from its E terminal. The E terminal is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control I/O port 4100b, and receives the 24 MHz clock signal output from the E terminal. A terminal between the E terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the CLK terminal of the main control I/O port 4100b is pulled up to the +5.2V side by a pull-up resistor MR2. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded, and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically disconnected from the outside. ing.

[8-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 4100c receives detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, and the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. In addition, it is a circuit to which a detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e and a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 103 are input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is input and the circuit to which the power failure warning signal is input will be described here. .

[8-4-1. Circuit to which the detection signal from the RAM clear switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 105, the 3rd pin as the output pin of the RAM clear switch 4100e is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor MR3 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 through the resistor MR4. properly connected. A base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR5 which is grounded in addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR4. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5.2V by a pull-up resistor MR6 to be electrically connected to the input pin PA0 of the input port PA of the main control I/O port 4100b. It is connected to the. The 1st and 2nd pins of the RAM clear switch 4100e are grounded, and the 4th pin is electrically connected to the 3rd pin. As a result, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated, the 3rd and 4th pins are pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor MR3, while when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the 3rd pin is pulled up. and the 4th pin are electrically connected to the 1st pin and the 2nd pin to pull down to the ground side.

A circuit composed of the transistor MTR0 and resistors MR4 and MR5 is a switch circuit. When the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated, a voltage pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor MR3 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0. , the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin PA0 of the main control I/O port 4100b. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground side, thereby turning off the transistor MTR0 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR6, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input pin PA0 of the main control I/O port 4100b. be done.

[8-4-2. Circuit where blackout warning signal is input]
As shown in FIG. 105, the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR7, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 via the resistor MR8. properly connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR1 is electrically connected to the resistor MR8 and also electrically connected to the grounded resistor MR9. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled up to +5.2 V by a pull-up resistor MR10 to be electrically connected to the input pin PA1 of the input port PA of the main control I/O port 4100b. It is connected to the. A power failure monitoring circuit 4110b that outputs a power failure warning signal is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded, and is pulled up to the +12 V side by a pull-up resistor MR7. As a result, the voltage is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR7 when the power failure warning signal is not input, and is pulled down to the ground side when the power failure warning signal is input.

A circuit composed of the transistor MTR1 and the resistors MR8 and MR9 is a switch circuit. When the power failure warning signal is not input, the voltage pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor MR7 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1. When the voltage is applied, the transistor MTR1 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the power failure warning signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin PA1 of the main control I/O port 4100b. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled down to the ground side, thereby turning off the transistor MTR1 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor MR10, and the power failure warning signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is applied to the input pin PA1 of the main control I/O port 4100b. is entered.

The detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3, while the power failure warning signal is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR7. This is because the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is input to the main control board 4100, while the power failure warning signal is input via the payout control board 4110. That is, between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, A higher voltage of +12V is used to improve signal reliability. As a result, the detection signals from the general winning opening switch 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, and the lower starting opening switch 2109, which are input to the main control board 4100, are pulled up in the same manner as the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e. While being pulled up to the +5.2V side by the resistance, detection from the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, the general winning opening switch 3020, and the gate switch 2352 is input via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 shown in FIG. The signal is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor in the same manner as the power outage warning signal from the payout control board 4110 .

[8-5. Various input/output signals such as main control I/O port]
Next, various input/output signals of the main control MPU 4100a and main control I/O port 4100b will be described. The data input/output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control I/O port 4100b exchange various information and various signals with the data input/output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control MPU 4100a via a data bus.

Serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 97 is input as a payer serial data reception signal to the RXA terminal, which is a serial data input terminal of the main control MPU 4100a. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the main control MPU 4100a, output the serial data to be sent to the payout control board 4110 from the TXA terminal as a main payment serial data transmission signal, and from the TXB terminal, to FIG. The serial data to be transmitted to the indicated peripheral control board 4140 is output as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal.

The above-mentioned main control input is the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 that informs the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal to the input pin PA2 of the input port PA of the main control I/O port 4100b. Input via the circuit 4100c and other input pins of the input port PA and the input pin of the port set as the input port among the ports PB to PE are connected, for example, to the upper starting port switch 3022 shown in FIG. Detection signals from various switches such as are input via the main control input circuit 4100c. Various detection signals input to the main control I/O port 4100b are input to the main control MPU 4100a via the data bus.

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a main payment ACK signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal from the output pin PB0 of the output port PB of the main control I/O port 4100b via the data bus. Then, from the output pin of the port set as the output port among the ports PB to PE, for example, a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. It outputs or outputs a drive signal to various display devices such as the upper special symbol display device 1185 shown in FIG.

[8-6. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, an interface circuit for communication between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 4100 is supplied with +12V and +5.2V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. is transmitted using +12V, which is higher than +5.2V, which is the control reference voltage, to improve its reliability.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, the main control board 4100 mainly includes a pull-up resistor MR20, resistors MR21 and MR22, and a transistor MTR20 as a communication interface circuit. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 includes, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). ) are mainly composed.

+12V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD20 of the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD20 is an electrolytic capacitor whose minus terminal is grounded. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of MC20 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD20 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. As a result, for example, due to power failure or momentary power failure, when the power from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 is no longer supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 The charged charge can continue to be applied from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 as +12V.

Here, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance: 470 μF) shown in FIG. Since the charge is applied as +5.2V, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 by this applied +5.2V is at least the main peripheral serial data transmission signal built in the main control MPU 4100a. Transmission of the main serial data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae can be completed. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. In order to suppress the effects of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by being transmitted using a voltage of +12V, which is higher than the control reference voltage of +5.2V. In other words, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the main control MPU 4100a can complete transmission of the main circumference serial data set in the transmission buffer register of the serial transmission unit, but the main circumference serial data is used as the control reference. Even if the main-periphery serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI due to the voltage +5.2V is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, the main-periphery serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI due to +12V is output from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20. cannot output. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC20 is applied as +12 V from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140. The main peripheral serial data set in the transmission buffer register of the serial transmission unit of the main control MPU 4100a can be output from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI by +12V. there is As a result, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main peripheral serial data is reliably received by the peripheral control board 4140 without being interrupted. In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a is 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data of up to 10 packets are stored in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. Also, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (third terminal) of photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of main control board 4100 via resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). A resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR22 grounded in addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR21. The emitter terminal of transistor MTR20 is grounded.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground side. The transistor MTR20 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main-peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor MR20 to turn on the transistor MTR20, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be done. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5.2 V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is the negative terminal. is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor AC10 which is grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded, and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC is +5 by a pull-up resistor AR11 electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the .2V side and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler AIC10, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is transmitted as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. is input to the input terminal of As a result, as described above, for example, due to a power failure or momentary power failure, when the power from the power supply board 851 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 via the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 , the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as +5.2V. When a power outage or momentary power failure occurs, +5.2V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, so that the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is at least The data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a can be transmitted completely, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main peripheral serial The data is reliably received by the peripheral control board 4140 without being interrupted or missing.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground side and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. By doing so, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is LOW. , the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR20 to turn on the transistor MTR20, thereby turning on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the AIC 10 is pulled down to the ground side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Thus, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. It is the logic of

Thus, in the present embodiment, +5.2V which is supplied to various electronic components through the main control filter circuit section 4100g, that is, +5. A power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs in the +5.2V power line to which 2V is applied and the +12V power line to which +12V is applied through the diode M20, that is, +12V created by the +12V creation circuit 851f is applied as a communication control voltage. Countermeasures are taken when this occurs and the reference control voltage and communication control voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, the +5.2V power supply line and the positive voltage of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit section 4100g as the first auxiliary power supply. and are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the reference control voltage applied from the +5.2V power supply line drops, the main control filter which is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the reference control voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the circuit section 4100g, the state in which the reference control voltage is applied can be maintained. , MR22, and a transistor MTR20, +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied as a communication control voltage to the anode terminal of the diode M20. The positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20, which is an auxiliary power supply, is electrically connected in parallel, causing a power failure or momentary power failure, and the communication control voltage applied from the +12V power supply line via the diode MD20 drops. Also, the state in which the communication control voltage is applied can be maintained by applying the communication control voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20, which is the second auxiliary power supply. As a result, the command being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 can be prevented from being interrupted, and the peripheral control board 4140 can reliably receive the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate command failures immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during an instantaneous power failure.

In addition, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a are all used as main peripheral serial data, and are composed of a pull-up resistor MR20, resistors MR21 and MR22, and a transistor MTR20. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is set to 470 μF, and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC20 is set to 220 μF so that transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the interface circuit. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb are all sent to the peripheral via the interface circuit as main peripheral serial data. Since the transmission to the control board 4140 can be completed, the peripheral control board 4140 can reliably receive the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb without interruption or omission.

[9. Circuit of Payout Control Board]
Next, the circuit etc. of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 98 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 112. FIG. FIG. 107 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, FIG. 108 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control unit circuit, etc., FIG. 109 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, and FIG. 110 is a CR unit input/output circuit diagram. 111 is a circuit diagram showing a firing control input circuit, and FIG. 112 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. be. First, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b will be described, followed by the payout control filter circuit 4110a, the payout control unit 4120 circuit, the launch control unit 4130 circuit, various input/output signals with the main control board 4100, and to the external terminal board 784 Various output signals will be described.

[9-1. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 103, the payout control board 4110 is supplied with +24V, +12V, and +5.2V from the power supply board 851, and +24V and +12V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of +24V and +12V, and when the power failure or momentary power failure signs are detected, a power failure warning signal is sent as a power failure warning to the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. In addition, it outputs to the main control MPU 4100a. Here, first, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described, and then the monitoring of +24V power failure or momentary power failure and +12V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring will be described.

[9-1-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 107, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b mainly includes a shunt stabilized power supply circuit PIC20, an open collector output type comparator PIC21, a D-type flip-flop PIC22, and a transistor PTR20 (2SC1815 in this embodiment). there is

+5.2 V is applied to the REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC20 through the resistor PR20, and the current input to the REF terminal is applied to the resistor PR20. Limited by The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in this embodiment) that serves as a comparison reference voltage for the comparator PIC21. This reference voltage Vref is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) by a grounded capacitor PC20 (the capacitor PC20 also serves as a low-pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC20, is grounded (GND).

The comparator PIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (PIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V and the reference voltage Vref, and the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied to the + terminal. A reference voltage Vref is input to the - terminal. The remaining one (PIC21B) is used to compare the +12V monitoring voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref, and the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is input to the + terminal and the reference voltage Vref is input to the - terminal. there is These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop PIC22. This D-type flip-flop PIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (PIC23A) is used in this embodiment. Note that the +5.2 V input to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator PIC21, is smoothed by removing ripples from the grounded capacitor PC21. Also, the +5.2 V input to the D-type flip-flop PIC22 is smoothed by removing ripples from the grounded capacitor PC22.

[9-1-2. +24V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +24V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the PIC21A of the comparator PIC21 comparing the +24V monitor voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 107, +24V is divided by the resistance ratio of resistors PR21 and PR22, and the ripple is removed by a capacitor PC23 connected to the ground and input to the + terminal of PIC21A (the capacitor PC23 is (It also acts as a low-pass filter.) The values of the resistors PR21 and PR22 are such that, when +24V is interrupted or instantaneously interrupted, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the voltage is applied. When the voltage of +24 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result the logic becomes LOW. Pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, its logic becomes HI, the ripple is removed by the grounded capacitor PC24, and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 (capacitor The PC 24 also serves as a low-pass filter). Since this PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is greater than the reference voltage Vref, from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, the payout control of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. Power failure warning signal 1 is not output to I/O port 4120b.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result the logic becomes HI. becomes LOW, the ripple is removed by a capacitor PC24 connected to the ground and input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. Since this PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is lower than the reference voltage Vref, the power failure warning signal 1 is sent from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, to the payout control I/O port 4120b. output.

[9-1-3. +12V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +12V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by comparing the +12V monitor voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref by the PIC21B of the comparator PIC21, as described above. As shown in FIG. 107, +12V is divided by the resistance ratio of resistors PR24 and PR25, and the ripple is removed by capacitor PC25 connected to the ground, and input to the + terminal of PIC21B (capacitor PC25 is (It also acts as a low-pass filter.) The values of the resistors PR24 and PR25 are set such that when +12V is interrupted or instantaneously interrupted, the voltage starts to drop from +12V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the voltage is applied. When the voltage of +12 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result the logic becomes LOW. Pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, its logic becomes HI, the ripple is removed by the grounded capacitor PC24, and the voltage is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. Since this PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is greater than the reference voltage Vref, from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, the payout control of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. Power failure warning signal 1 is not output to I/O port 4120b.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result the logic becomes HI. LOW, the ripple is removed by the grounded capacitor PC24 and input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. Since this PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is smaller than the reference voltage Vref, the power failure warning signal 1 is sent from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, to the payout control I/O port 4120b. output.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR26. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26 and also electrically connected to the grounded resistor PR27. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor MR7 of the main control input circuit 4100c shown in FIG. 105 via wiring (harness). Therefore, the signal output from the 1Q terminal is raised to the +12V side and transmitted to the main control board 4100 as a blackout warning signal. That is, the transistor PTR20 is configured as an open-collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded. Thus, between the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22 and the input terminal of the payout control I/O port 4100b, the D type flip-flop PIC22 and the payout control I/O port 4100b pay out. Since it is mounted on the control board 4110, a power failure warning is performed by the power failure warning signal 1, which is an ON/OFF signal using the control reference voltage +5.2 V, whereas the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 In order to suppress the influence of noise intruding into the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the substrates, +12 V, which is higher than the control reference voltage +5.2 V, is used between the substrates and the ON/ A power failure warning is performed by a power failure warning signal, which is an OFF signal.

Also, to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, a power failure clear signal is input from the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 98 via the payout control I/O port 4210b. It's like Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the payout control MPU 4120a is input to the CLR terminal via the payout control I/O port 4210b with its logic LOW. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the payout control MPU 4120a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the payout control I/O port 4210b and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 is designed to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state with the logic LOW at the PR terminal. The 1D terminal that is the D input terminal, the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal, and the GND terminal that is the ground terminal are grounded. In addition, the negative logic 1Q terminal obtained by inverting the logic of the 1Q terminal is electrically disconnected from the outside.

[9-2. Dispensing Control Filter Circuit]
As shown in FIG. 108, the payout control filter circuit 4110a is mainly composed of a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with +5.2 V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. +5.2V is output. The +5.2 V applied to the No. 1 terminal is first smoothed by removing ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) by an electrolytic capacitor PC0 connected to the ground (GND).

The +5.2V output from the 3rd terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 which are grounded. This smoothed +5.2 V is the Vcc terminal that is the power supply terminal of the external WDT 4120c, the VCC terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the payout control I/O port. 4120b is applied to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of 4120b.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor PC3, and the VCC terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor PC4. And the +5.2V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, is grounded, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b, is grounded.

Moreover, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (withdrawal control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a, and is electrically connected to the ground and grounded capacitor PC5. ing. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the capacitor PC5, the VBB terminal of this payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the + terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 103 via the resistor PR0. properly connected. That is, the +5.2V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and through the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, It is applied to the + terminal of the capacitor BC1. As a result, as described above, when power from the +5.2V generating circuit 851d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. Since it is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate. The memory contents are held by applying VBB.

[9-3. Circuit of Payout Control Unit]
As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the payout control unit 4120 includes a payout control MPU 4120a, a payout control I/O port 4120b, an external WDT 4120c, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d, a payout control input circuit 4120e, and a CR unit input/output circuit 4120f. In addition, as a peripheral circuit, a payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) is mainly configured. Here, the external WDT 4120c will be described first, followed by payout control crystal oscillator PX0, payout motor drive circuit 4120d, payout control input circuit 4120e, CR unit input/output circuit 4120f, various input/output signals such as main control I/O port, Various input/output signals such as payout control I/O port will be described.

[9-3-1. External WDT (external watchdog timer)]
The +5.2V smoothed by the noise component removed by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the external WDT 4120c, as shown in FIG. The external WDT 4120c resets the payout control MPU 4120a and incorporates a watchdog timer. The external WDT 4120c has a function of monitoring +5.2V voltage input to the Vcc terminal and a function of monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4120a is operating normally, and is input to the Vcc terminal When the +5.2V voltage reaches the threshold value (in this embodiment, it is set to 4.2V), a reset signal is output from the negative logic RESET terminal, or the payout control MPU4120a payout control I/ If the external WDT clear signal is not input to the CK terminal through the O port 4120b within the clear signal release time, the reset signal is output from the negative logic RESET terminal.

A TC terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to a grounded capacitor PC6, and an RCT terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor PR1 pulled up to +5.2V. The clear signal cancellation time described above can be set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC6 and the resistance value of the pull-up resistor PR1. In addition, in this embodiment, 35 ms (=1.75 ms×20 times) corresponding to 20 times of the interrupt timer (1.75 ms) of the payout control MPU 4120a is set as the clear signal cancellation time.

The negative logic RESET terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to the RST0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the RESETN terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b. The negative logic RESET terminal is of an open collector output type and is pulled up to +5.2 V by a pull-up resistor PR2. The voltage pulled up to the +5.2V side is smoothed by removing ripples by the grounded capacitor PC7 (the capacitor PC7 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the voltage input to the Vcc terminal is greater than the threshold, the negative logic RESET terminal is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI. While being input to the RESETN terminal of the /O port 4120b, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW and the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN of the payout control I/O port 4120b input to the terminal.

The negative logic RESET terminal is pulled up to +5.2 V by a pull-up resistor PR2 when the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal is switched from ON to OFF within the clear signal release time and the external WDT clear signal is released. The logic becomes HI and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b, while the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal is turned ON within the clear signal cancellation time. When the external WDT clear signal is not canceled while being held, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b.

Since the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b are negative logic inputs, the voltage input to the Vcc terminal becomes smaller than the threshold or is input to the CK terminal When the external WDT clear signal is not released while being ON within the clear signal release time, the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I/O port 4120b are reset. The Vs terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to a grounded capacitor PC8, and the Vcc terminal is electrically connected to a grounded capacitor PC9. The +5.2V input to the Vcc terminal is smoothed by removing ripples through the capacitor PC9. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the external WDT 4120c, is grounded to the ground, and the positive logic RESET terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[9-3-2. Dispensing Control Crystal Oscillator]
The +5.2 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to a grounded capacitor PC10, and the +5.2 V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5.2V is also input to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0. The payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, when +5.2 V is input to its OE terminal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the ground.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b. It is input to the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I/O port 4120b.

[9-3-3. Dispensing Motor Drive Circuit]
As shown in FIG. 108, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d is mainly composed of the drive PIC1. This drive PIC1 has four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminal is grounded, and when the payout motor drive signal is input to the base terminal, the excitation signal is generated from the corresponding collector terminal. A driving pulse is output.

+24 V supplied from the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 103 is input to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 through the Zener diode PZD0 as shown in FIG. The anode terminal of Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to +24V, and the cathode terminal of Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of drive PIC1. The +24 V input to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 serves as the drive power supply for the payout motor 744. The base terminal of the drive PIC1 is electrically connected to the output pins PC0 to PC3 of the output port PC of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and corresponds according to the payout motor drive signal output from the output pins PC0 to PC3. A drive pulse, which is an excitation signal, is sent from the collector terminal to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase). These drive pulses are generated by switching exciting currents flowing through the phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, and /A phase) of the payout motor 744 to rotate the payout motor 744 . When the driving pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is interrupted by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive PIC1, the drive PIC1 will be damaged. Therefore, for protection, the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 are electrically connected.

[9-3-4. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 4120e is a circuit to which detection signals from the door frame open switch 618, the body frame open switch 619, the error release switch 860a, and the ball removal switch 860b shown in FIG. 98 are input. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618 is input will be described, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame open switch 619 is input, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the error cancellation switch 860a is input. , the circuit to which the detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b is input.

[9-3-4(a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 109, one end of the door frame open switch 618 is applied with +12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR30 via the resistor PR30 and the resistor PR31. A grounded resistor PR32 and a grounded electrolytic capacitor PC30 are electrically connected between the resistor PR30 and the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR30 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31 and also electrically connected to the grounded resistor PR33. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR30 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is pulled up to +5.2V by a pull-up resistor PR34 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR31 through a resistor PR35. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR32 via resistor PR36.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR31 is electrically connected to the resistor PR35 and also electrically connected to the grounded resistor PR37. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR31 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by a pull-up resistor PR38 to connect to the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I/O port 4120b shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to a predetermined input pin among them. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR31 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b as the door opening signal.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR32 is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR36, but also electrically connected to the grounded resistor PR39. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR32 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97, and the transistor PTR32 is an open circuit with the emitter terminal grounded. Configured as a collector output type. A collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), and is pulled up to +12 V by this pull-up resistor. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR32 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the frame opening information output signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR30, PR32, and electrolytic capacitor PC30 turns on the door frame open switch 618 when the door frame 5 is opened from the body frame 3 or when the door frame 5 is closed by the body frame 3. is a chattering prevention circuit for absorbing fluctuations in the voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the .

A circuit composed of resistors PR31, PR33, and transistor PTR30 is a first-stage switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from the door frame open switch 618. A circuit composed of resistors PR35, PR37, and transistor PTR31 is , the last-stage switch circuit that outputs the door opening signal to the payout control I/O port 4120b by turning ON/OFF by the ON/OFF signal from the first-stage switch circuit, and is composed of resistors PR36, PR39, and transistor PTR32. The circuit to be switched is the last-stage switch circuit that outputs the frame opening information output signal to the main control board 4100 by being turned on/off by the ON/OFF signal from the first-stage switch circuit.

When the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so the chattering of the +12 V supplied through the door frame open switch 618 is absorbed by the chattering prevention circuit and the first stage is closed. When the voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR30 that constitutes the switch circuit, the transistor PTR30 is turned on, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned on. When the switch circuit in the first stage is turned on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is pulled down to the ground side, so the voltage applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 constituting the switch circuit in the final stage is also grounded. By pulling down, the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 are turned off, and the last-stage switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR38, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b. Then, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor provided on the main control board 4100, and the frame open information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the main control board 4100. becomes.

On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed to the body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is turned off, so +12 V is cut off by the door frame open switch 618 and the base of the transistor PTR30 constituting the first stage switch circuit. When the voltage applied to the terminal is pulled down to the ground side, the transistor PTR30 is turned off, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned off. When the switch circuit of the first stage is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor PR34, so that this voltage is applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 constituting the switch circuit of the final stage. , the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 are turned on, and the switch circuit at the final stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled down to the ground side, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is output. The voltage applied to is lowered and the frame open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the main control board 4100 .

In this way, when the door frame 5 is released from the body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the first stage switch circuit is turned on and the last stage switch circuit is turned off. A door frame open signal whose logic is HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and a frame open information output signal whose logic is HI is output to the main control board 4100. When the door frame open switch 618 is turned off when closed by the body frame 3, the switch circuit at the first stage is turned off and the switch circuits at the final stage are both turned on, so that the logic of the door frame becomes LOW. An open signal is output to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and a frame open information output signal whose logic is LOW is output to the main control board 4100.

[9-3-4(b). Circuit where the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input]
The body frame open switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 109, one end of the body frame open switch 619 is applied with +12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR33 via resistor PR40 and resistor PR41. A grounded resistor PR42 and a grounded electrolytic capacitor PC31 are electrically connected between the resistor PR40 and the resistor PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR33 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41 and also electrically connected to the grounded resistor PR43. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR33 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 is pulled up to +5.2 V by a pull-up resistor PR44 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR34 through a resistor PR45. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR35 via resistor PR46.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR34 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45 and also electrically connected to the grounded resistor PR47. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR34 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by a pull-up resistor PR48 to connect to the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I/O port 4120b shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to a predetermined input pin among them. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR34 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b as the body frame opening signal.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR35 is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR46, but also electrically connected to the grounded resistor PR49. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR35 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 and also electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. , the transistor PTR35 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded. A collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), and is pulled up to +12 V by this pull-up resistor. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR35 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the frame opening information output signal. This frame open information output signal is output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 as well as from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32. An OR circuit is constructed.

A circuit composed of resistors PR40, PR42 and an electrolytic capacitor PC31 turns on the body frame open switch 619 when the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2. is a chattering prevention circuit for absorbing fluctuations in the voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the .

A circuit composed of resistors PR41, PR43, and transistor PTR33 is a first-stage switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from the body frame open switch 619, and a circuit composed of resistors PR45, PR47, and transistor PTR34. , the switch circuit of the final stage that outputs the body frame open signal to the payout control I / O port 4120b by turning ON / OFF by the ON / OFF signal from the switch circuit of the first stage, from the resistors PR46, PR49, and the transistor PTR35 The configured circuit is a final-stage switch circuit that outputs a frame open information output signal to the main control board 4100 by being turned on/off by an ON/OFF signal from the first-stage switch circuit.

When the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so the +12 V supplied through the body frame open switch 619 absorbs the chattering in the chattering prevention circuit and the first stage is closed. When the voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR33 that constitutes the switch circuit, the transistor PTR33 is turned on, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned on. When the switch circuit of the first stage is turned on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 is pulled down to the ground side, so the voltage applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 constituting the switch circuit of the last stage is also grounded. By pulling down, the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 are turned off, and the switch circuit at the final stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the body frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b. Then, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor provided on the main control board 4100, and the frame open information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the main control board 4100. becomes.

On the other hand, when the body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off. When the voltage applied to the terminal is pulled down to the ground side, the transistor PTR33 is turned off, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned off. When the first-stage switch circuit is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor PR44, so that this voltage is applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 constituting the final-stage switch circuit. , the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 are turned on, and the switch circuit at the final stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled down to the ground side, and the body frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is output. The voltage applied to is lowered and the frame open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the main control board 4100 .

In this way, when the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, turning on the body frame opening switch 619 turns on the first-stage switch circuit and turns off the last-stage switch circuit. A main body frame open signal whose logic is HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and a frame open information output signal whose logic is HI is output to the main control board 4100. When the body frame open switch 619 is turned off in the state closed by the outer frame 2, the first-stage switch circuit is turned off and the final-stage switch circuit is turned on, so that the logic of the body frame becomes LOW. An open signal is output to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and a frame open information output signal whose logic is LOW is output to the main control board 4100.

In this embodiment, as described above, normally closed switches are used for the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619, so that the door frame open switch 618 is short-circuited and the switch is ON (conducted). Even if the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3, and the main body frame open switch 619 is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conducted), the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. state. By adopting normally closed switches for the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 in this way, it is possible to output, for example, a frame open information output signal to the main control board 4100 even in the event of a short circuit. can determine the state in which the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 and the state in which the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 .

If the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are replaced from normally closed switches to normally open (NO) switches (door frame open switch 618' and body frame open switch 619'), , the door frame open switch 618' is turned ON (conducting) when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3. . The body frame open switch 619 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2 and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 . Then, even if the door frame open switch 618' is disconnected and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 5 is released from the body frame 3, and the body frame open switch 619' is disconnected and the switch is turned off. is turned off (disconnected), the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 . In this way, even if normally open switches are employed for the door frame opening switch 618' and the body frame opening switch 619', it is possible to output, for example, a frame opening information output signal to the main control board 4100 even when the wire is broken. The main control MPU 4100 a of the control board 4100 can determine the state in which the door frame 5 is released from the body frame 3 and the state in which the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 .

[9-3-4(c). Circuit to which the detection signal from the error release switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 109, the 1st pin as the output pin of the error cancellation switch 860a is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR50, and the input port PA of the payout control I/O port 4120b shown in FIG. is electrically connected to the input pin PA0 of the . The 1st pin of the error cancellation switch 860a is electrically connected to the 2nd pin, and the 3rd and 4th pins are grounded. As a result, when the error cancellation switch 860a is not operated, the 1st and 2nd pins are pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR50, while when the error cancellation switch 860a is operated, the 1st pin is pulled up. and the 2nd pin are electrically connected to the 3rd pin and the 4th pin, thereby being pulled down to the ground side.

The error cancellation switch 860a is electrically connected to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I/O port 4120b. (It also acts as a low-pass filter.) When the error release switch 860a is not operated, the error release detection signal whose logic is HI after being pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR50 is input to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I/O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the error release switch 860a is operated, an error release detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I/O port 4120b.

[9-3-4(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the ball removal switch is input]
The 1st pin as the output pin of the ball removal switch 860b is pulled up to the +5.2V side by a pull-up resistor PR51 as shown in FIG. is electrically connected to the input pin PA1 of the . The first pin of the ball removal switch 860b is electrically connected to the second pin, and the third and fourth pins are grounded. As a result, when the ball removal switch 860b is not operated, the 1st and 2nd pins are pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR51, while when the ball removal switch 860b is operated, the 1st pin is pulled up. and the 2nd pin are electrically connected to the 3rd pin and the 4th pin, thereby being pulled down to the ground side.

In addition to being electrically connected to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I/O port 4120b, the ball removal switch 860b is smoothed by removing ripples from the grounded capacitor PC33 (the capacitor PC33 is (It also acts as a low-pass filter.) When the ball removal switch 860b is not operated, the ball removal detection signal, which is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR51 and the logic becomes HI, is input to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I/O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the ball removal switch 860b is operated, a ball removal detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I/O port 4120b.

[9-3-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input/output circuit 4120f for inputting/outputting various signals to/from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 99 will be described. The payout control board 4110 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as described above. , are supplied, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and ground LG created from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. Through the terminal plate 869, an EXS signal to inform that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible. and output As shown in FIG. 110, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals and the like is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC60 to PIC64 (which incorporate an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 via the resistor PR60. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 . A resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC60. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned ON, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60. Sometimes, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 via the resistor PR61. electrically connected to the terminal. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is electrically connected to the resistor PR61 and also electrically connected to the pull-up resistor R63 pulled up to the +5.2V side.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the resistor PR61 and also electrically connected to the grounded resistor PR64. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR60 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by a pull-up resistor PR65 to connect the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I/O port 4120b shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to a predetermined input pin among them. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR60 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor TR61 is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR62, but also electrically connected to the grounded resistor PR66. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR61 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled up to +5.2 V by a pull-up resistor PR67 and electrically connected to a firing timing circuit 4130c, which will be described later. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR61 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61, and the signal is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a CR connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR61, PR64, and transistor PTR60 is a switch circuit. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned off, When the voltage pulled up by the up resistor PR63 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60, the transistor PTR60 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled down to the ground side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled down to the ground side. The PTR 60 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PTR65, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is HI is applied to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b. is entered.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR62, PR66 and the transistor PTR61 is also a switch circuit, and when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned off, When the voltage pulled up by the up resistor PR63 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR61, the transistor PTR61 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled down to the ground side, and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled down to the ground side. The PTR 61 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PTR67, and the CR connection signal whose logic is HI is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c. This switch circuit constitutes a part of the input circuit of a firing control input circuit 4130a, which will be described later.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 via the resistor PR68. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61. A resistor PR68 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC61. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by a pull-up resistor PR69. It is electrically connected to the specified input pin. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC61 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b as the BRDY signal.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned ON. A BRDY signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC61 is pulled down to the ground side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR69, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is the same logic as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6. FIG.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 via the resistor PR70. BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62. A resistor PR70 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC62. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC62 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by a pull-up resistor PR71, and the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I/O port 4120b are connected in advance. It is electrically connected to the specified input pin. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC62, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 changes, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b as a BRQ signal.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC62 is pulled down to the ground side, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR71, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is the same logic as the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6. FIG.

The EXS signal output from the output pin PB0 of the output port PB of the payout control I/O port 4120b shown in FIG. 108 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR72. +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via a resistor PR73. A resistor PR73 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC63. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 through the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC63 turns ON. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 through the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC63 It is designed to be turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6 together with the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60. , is raised to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 and electrically connected to its built-in control device. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC63 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63, and the signal is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 through the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC63 turns ON. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is pulled down to the ground side, and EXS whose logic becomes LOW is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 . On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 through the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC63 In order to turn OFF, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by a pull-up resistor PR74, and EXS whose logic is HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. FIG. Thus, the EXS logic output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is the same logic as the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b.

The PRDY signal output from the output pin PB1 of the output port PB of the payout control I/O port 4120b shown in FIG. 108 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR75. +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via a resistor PR76. A resistor PR76 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC64. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 through the resistor PR76 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC64 turns ON. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 through the resistor PR76 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC64 It is designed to be turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6 together with the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 and the emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC63. Via the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 and electrically connected to its built-in control device. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC64 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 through the resistor PR77 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC64 turns ON. Therefore, PRDY in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is pulled down to the ground side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. FIG. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 through the resistor PR77 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC64 In order to turn OFF, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR77, and PRDY with logic HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. FIG. Thus, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is the same logic as the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b.

[9-3-6. Various input/output signals of payout control I/O port]
Next, various input/output signals of the payout control I/O port 4120b will be described. Data input/output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control I/O port 4120b exchange various information and various signals with the data input/output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control MPU 4120a via a data bus.

As shown in FIG. 108, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b, receives the serial data from the main control board 4100 as the main payment serial data reception signal. On the other hand, serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 4100 is output as a payer serial data transmission signal from the TXD terminal, which is a serial data output terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b.

An error release detection signal from the error release switch 860a is input to the input pin PA0 of each input pin of the input port PA of the payout control I/O port 4120b. A detection signal is input, a primary payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 is input to the input pin PA2 to notify the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal, and an input pin PA3 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. Power failure warning signal 1 is input. Further, the predetermined input pins of the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I/O port 4120b are supplied with a BRQ signal, which is a one-time payout operation start request signal from the CR unit 6, and a ball rental request from the CR unit 6. Various signals from the CR unit 6 such as the BRDY signal, which is a signal, and the CR connection signal 1 that conveys whether or not the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected, the door from the door frame opening switch 618 In addition to the frame open signal and the body frame open signal from the body frame open switch 619, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 and the like are input.

On the other hand, from each output pin of the output port PB of the payout control I/O port 4120b, an EXS signal is output from the output pin PB0 to indicate that one payout operation has started or ended, and from the output pin PB1. , a PRDY signal is output to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible or impossible, and the latched state of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 of the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is released from the output pin PB2. A blackout clear signal is output for the purpose, a payer ACK signal is output from the output pin PB3 to indicate the completion of normal reception of the primary payment serial data reception signal, and an external WDT clear signal is output from the output pin PB4 to the external WDT 4120c. It is Also, from the output pins PC0 to PC3 of the output port PC of the payout control I/O port 4120b, a payout motor drive signal is output, and from each output pin of the output port PD of the payout control I/O port 4120b, an error LED display A drive signal for the device 860c is output.

[9-4. Circuit of launch control unit]
Next, the firing control section 4130 will be described. The firing control section 4130, as shown in FIG. 98, comprises a firing control input circuit 4130a, an oscillator circuit 4130b, a firing timing circuit 4130c, a firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e. Here, the firing control input circuit will be described with reference to FIG. 111, and a detailed description of the configuration of the firing timing circuit 4130c and the like will be given later.

[9-4-1. Launch control input circuit]
111, a detection signal from the touch switch 516 of the handle device 500 and a detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 of the handle device 500 are relayed to the firing control input circuit 4130a of the payout control board 4110. It is input via the substrate 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . The touch switch 516 detects whether or not the palm or fingers are in contact with the front 506 of the rotary handle body of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. By operating 520, it is detected whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the touch switch 516 is input will be described, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 will be described.

[9-4-1a. Circuit to which the detection signal from the touch switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 111, one end of the touch switch 516 is applied with +12 V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. The other end of the touch switch 516 is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the handle relay board 192, and is input to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the payout control board 4110, and the resistor PR81. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 via. A base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is electrically connected to a resistor PR81, a grounded resistor PR82, and a grounded capacitor PC80. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is smoothed with noise removed by the capacitor C80. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR80 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled up to +5.2 V by a pull-up resistor PR83 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR80 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c as a touch detection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR81, PR82, and transistor PTR80 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from the touch switch 516. When the front 506 of the rotary handle main body is not touched by the palm or fingers, the handle relay board is turned on. A voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor provided at 192 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80, thereby turning on the transistor PTR80 and also turning on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled down to the ground side, and the touch detection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the palm or fingers are in contact with the front 506 of the rotating handle main body, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled down to the ground side, turning off the transistor PTR80 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic HI touch detection signal is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c.

[9-4-1b. Circuit to which the detection signal from the firing stop switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 111, one end of the firing stop switch 518 receives +12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. The other end of the firing stop switch 518 is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the handle relay board 192, and is input to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the payout control board 4110, and the resistance It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 via PR85. The base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is electrically connected to a resistor PR85, a grounded resistor PR86, and a grounded capacitor PC81. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is smoothed with noise removed by the capacitor C81. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR81 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled up to +5.2 V by a pull-up resistor PR87 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR81 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c as the firing stop detection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR85, PR86, and transistor PTR81 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from the firing stop switch 518, and is provided on the handle relay board 192 when the single-shot button 520 is not operated. A voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81, thereby turning on the transistor PTR81 and also turning on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled down to the ground side, and the firing stop detection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the one-shot button 520 is operated, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled down to the ground side, the transistor PTR81 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR87, and the firing stop detection signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c.

The switch circuit composed of resistors PR62, PR66, and transistor PTR61 shown in FIG. 110 is also a part of the input circuit of the firing control input circuit 4130a, and the CR connection signal output from the collector terminal of this transistor PTR61. is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c in addition to the touch detection signal and firing stop signal described above.

[9-5. Various input/output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[9-5-1. Various input/output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 4100 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), the payout control board 4110 sends a payer serial data transmission signal, a payer ACK signal, a blackout warning signal, frame opening information output information, etc. to the main control board 4100. Output. On the other hand, the payout control board 4110 includes a main payout serial data reception signal, a main payout ACK signal, a RAM clear signal, a jackpot information output signal such as a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, etc., and a probability variation. The main control board 4100 inputs game information signals such as a medium information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output signal, and a start winning prize information output signal.

[9-5-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(b), in addition to the door frame opening signal and the body frame opening signal, prize balls indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. In addition to jackpot information output signals such as a number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, and a 2-round jackpot information output signal from the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special Game information signals such as a pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a start winning prize information output signal are output to the external terminal plate 784 .

The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and monitors the games played by the players. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer outputs the number of jackpots with two rounds (2-round jackpot number of occurrences) and the number of big wins with 15 rounds (occurrence number of 15 round big wins) is the number of big wins of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, since the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of the 2-round big win and the number of occurrences of the 15-land big win from the summed number of big wins, the actual number of big wins occurring in the pachinko game machine 1 is large. However, it is not possible to grasp whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. A data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko game machine 1, and some players refer to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter to decide whether or not to play the game. Some choose. However, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased toward the number of occurrences of the two-round big win, so even when the player starts playing, only the two-round big wins occur. Sometimes the 15 round jackpot doesn't happen easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily stir up the gambling spirit of the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by separately outputting the 15 round big win information output signal and the 2 round big win information output signal as the big win information output signal to the hall computer, the hall computer can output the number of occurrences of the 2 round big win, The number of 15-round big hits and the number of occurrences can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big wins that actually occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 was the 2-round big win or the 15-round big win. Since the number of occurrences of the round big win and the number of occurrences of the 2nd round big win can be separately displayed or only the number of occurrences of the 15 round big win can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the big win game state, it is possible to arouse the gambling spirit of the players more than necessary. Nor.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round big win information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round big win to the end of the 2-round big win, and the 15-round big win information output signal is also in the state where the 15-round big win occurs. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from generation to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round big win occurs, the 2-round big win information output signal is output for a predetermined period. The 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information are output to the hall computer, and when the 15-round big win occurs, the 15-round big win information output signal is outputted to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer only for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[10. How to drive the firing solenoid]
Next, a method of driving the firing solenoid 654 shown in FIG. 63 will be described with reference to FIGS. 113-116. FIG. 113 is a block diagram showing the drive circuit of the firing solenoid, FIG. 114 is a circuit diagram showing the shunt regulator circuit, amplifier circuit, and operational amplifier circuit group, and FIG. 115 is a diagram showing the characteristics of the DC/DC converter. 116 is a timing chart of predetermined points in the firing solenoid drive circuit of FIG. 113. FIG. First, the drive system for the firing solenoid 654 will be described, followed by a description of input/output currents, output voltages, signal logic and waveforms, etc. at predetermined points of the drive circuit.

[10-1. Drive system for firing solenoid]
113, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 mainly includes a firing control input circuit 4130a, a transmission circuit 4130b, a firing timing circuit 4130c, a firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, and a ball It is composed of a transmission solenoid drive circuit 4130e, a DC/DC converter 831a of the emission power supply board 831, an electrolytic capacitor SC0, a power factor improvement circuit 851b of the power supply board 851, and a smoothing circuit 851c.

As described above, the launch control input circuit 4130a receives the CR unit 6 from the pachinko game machine 1 when the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. A touch switch 516 that receives a signal to notify that power (24 VAC) is being supplied and outputs it to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a CR connection signal, and detects whether or not the front 506 of the rotating handle body is in contact with the palm or fingers. When the detection signal from is input, it is output to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a touch detection signal, and the detection from the firing stop switch 518 detects whether or not the shooting of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the will of the player. When the signal is input, it is output to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a firing stop detection signal.

The firing timing circuit 4130c permits or prohibits the launching of the game ball by the firing solenoid 654 based on the CR connection signal, touch detection signal, and firing stop detection signal from the firing control input circuit 4130a. Specifically, the firing timing circuit 4130c does not receive the CR connection signal because the CR unit 6 is not electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. In the first case, the touch detection signal indicates that the front 506 of the rotating handle main body is not touched by the palm or fingers. When even one of the third cases of transmission is applicable, the launching of the game ball by the firing solenoid 654 is prohibited, and when none of the cases is applicable, the launching of the game ball by the firing solenoid 654 is permitted.

The launch timing circuit 4130c receives the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4130b, and when the release solenoid 654 is allowed to launch the game balls, 100 game balls per minute are generated based on this clock signal. A firing reference pulse is generated and output to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d so as to be launched toward the game area 1100 shown in , and a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse (five times in this embodiment). is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e. The firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d drives the firing solenoid 654 of the ball shooting device 650 with a combined current of the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit 4130e drives the ball-feeding solenoid 585 with +24V from the power supply board 851. FIG.

The firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d is mainly composed of a shunt regulator circuit 4130da, an amplifier circuit 4130db, a voltage comparator circuit 4130dc, and a switching circuit 4130dd. The shunt regulator circuit 4130da is supplied with +5.2V generated by the +5.2V generation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851, and the DC +2.5V (DC+2.5V, hereinafter referred to as " +2.5V") is created and supplied to the amplifier circuit 4130db.

As shown in FIG. 114(a), the shunt regulator circuit 4130da is mainly composed of a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90. This shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 has reduced temperature drift due to ambient temperature, and can create and supply a stabilized power supply that is maintained at a constant voltage to a load. +5.2 V is applied through a resistor PR90 to the REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90, and is input to the REF terminal through this resistor PR90. Current is limited. The K terminal outputs +2.5V to the amplifier circuit 4130db. This +2.5 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) by a grounded capacitor PC90 (the capacitor PC90 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90, is grounded (GND).

Returning to FIG. 113, the amplifier circuit 4130db doubles the +2.5 from the shunt regulator circuit 4130da to generate DC +5.0 V (DC +5.0 V, hereinafter referred to as “+5.0 V”). , the main door relay terminal plate 880 , and the handle relay board 192 to the potentiometer 512 in the handle device 500 .

The amplifier circuit 4130db is mainly composed of an operational amplifier PIC91, as shown in FIG. 114(a). The operational amplifier PIC91 is configured as a non-inverting amplifier circuit, and +2.5 V from the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 of the shunt regulator circuit 4130da is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC91. is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR91 whose one end is grounded, and the other end of a resistor PR92 whose one end is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91 is connected to the inverting input terminal (− terminal) of is electrically connected to The resistance values of the resistors PR91 and PR92 are set so that the amplification factor (flat loop gain) of the operational amplifier PIC91 is doubled. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91 is +5.0V obtained by doubling the +2.5V applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC91, as described above. It is supplied to the potentiometer 512 in the handle device 500 via the relay board 192 . This +5.0 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) by a grounded capacitor PC91 (the capacitor PC91 also serves as a low-pass filter). Note that +24 V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91 is smoothed by removing ripples by a capacitor PC92 connected to the ground.

Returning to FIG. 113, potentiometer 512 is a three-terminal variable resistor having a first fixed terminal, a second fixed terminal, and a variable terminal, the first fixed terminal being +5.0 V from amplifier circuit 4130db described above. is supplied, and the second fixed terminal is electrically connected to the resistor PR100 of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay board 192 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The other end of this resistor PR100 is grounded. When the rotary handle main body front 506 is rotated, the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 also rotates, and the voltage applied to the first fixed terminal and the second fixed terminal is detected by the rotary handle main body front 506. , that is, according to the rotational position of the detection shaft portion 512 a of the potentiometer 512 . The voltage extracted from the variable terminal of potentiometer 512 is applied to resistors PR93 and PR94 (described later) in firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of payout control board 4110 via handle relay board 192 and main door relay terminal board 880 (Fig. 114(b)). ), and the voltage handled by the resistor PR94 is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the firing intensity target voltage.

The voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 is grounded via the handle relay board 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 as shown in FIG. 114(b). Ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed and smoothed by the capacitor PC93 (the capacitor PC93 also plays a role as a low-pass filter.) It is applied to an operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower. As shown in FIG. 114(b), this operational amplifier circuit group mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage and an operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage. The voltage from the handle device 500 is a volt-order voltage and is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92. The output terminal of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 multiplies the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC92 by 1, that is, outputs it as a volt-order voltage as it is. Although the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 simply outputs the input voltage, which is a volt-order voltage, as it is, it outputs the first-stage input side circuit for applying the voltage from the handle device 500 and the voltage to the subsequent operational amplifier PIC93. The circuit separation between the first-stage output side circuit and the circuit is realized. As a result, a voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the first-stage input side circuit to the first-stage output side circuit, and the influence of the first-stage output side circuit can be eliminated from the first-stage input side circuit. Note that the +24 V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 is smoothed by removing ripples by a capacitor PC94 connected to the ground.

The output terminal of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR93 in addition to its own inverting input terminal (- terminal), and the other end of this resistor PR93 is connected to the non-inverting input terminal of the subsequent-stage operational amplifier PIC93 ( + terminal). The non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR93 and the other end of the resistor PR94, one end of which is grounded. As a result, the voltage from the output end of the operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage is a volt-order voltage because the input voltage, which is a volt-order voltage, is simply output as is, as described above, and is divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94. This voltage is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage as a voltage of millivolt order. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage multiplies the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC92 by 1, that is, the millivolt-order voltage as it is is output to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the firing intensity target voltage. do. The operational amplifier PIC93 in the latter stage simply outputs the input voltage, which is the voltage assigned to the millivolt-order resistor PR94 divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94, as it is. Circuit separation between the post-stage input side circuit for applying the voltage that PR94 takes charge of and the post-stage output side circuit for outputting the voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is realized. As a result, a voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the post-stage input side circuit to the post-stage output side circuit, and the post-stage output side circuit can be prevented from being affected by the post-stage input side circuit. Note that the +24 V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 is smoothed by removing ripples by a capacitor PC95 connected to the ground.

Returning to FIG. 113, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball shooting device 650 flows through a resistor PR101 whose one end is grounded. Applied to 4130dc. The voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is also applied with the above-described firing intensity target voltage, which is a voltage on the order of millivolts. In this way, the firing control voltage and the firing intensity target voltage to be compared by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc are, as described above, in the payout control board 4110 (firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d) resistance from the volt-order voltage to the millivolt-order voltage. The voltages assigned to PR101 and PR94 are stepped down respectively. In other words, since the voltage is applied via the wiring pattern formed on the payout control board 4110, this wiring pattern is less susceptible to noise, and the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc outputs the firing control voltage and the firing intensity target voltage with voltages on the order of millivolts. On the other hand, between the board devices of the payout control board 4110 and the batted ball launcher 650 and between the board devices of the payout control board 4110 and the handle device 500, wiring (harness) is used. The wiring (harness) is susceptible to noise because the wiring (harness) is electrically connected.

The voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is an inverting circuit that compares the firing control voltage and the firing intensity target voltage, and outputs the comparison result to the switching circuit 4130dd. The result of the comparison by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is a logic output of HI or LOW. is smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, it becomes HI (hereinafter referred to as "H"). Since the output logic becomes H or L according to the comparison result of the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, the output signal is input to the switching circuit 4130dd as an ON/OFF signal.

The switching circuit 4130dd switches the current from the DC/DC converter 831a provided in the emission power supply board 831 according to the ON/OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc each time the emission reference pulse is input from the emission timing circuit 4130c, A current resulting from the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and a combined current flow through the firing solenoid 654 of the batted ball firing device 650. FIG. Specifically, when the ON signal is input from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, the switching circuit 4130dd outputs a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current resulting from the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. While flowing to the firing solenoid 654, when the OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is input, the current flowing to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off. In other words, the switching circuit 4130dd receives the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, and outputs a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current resulting from the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. When the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is divided by the resistor PR101 and becomes larger than the firing intensity target voltage as the firing control voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc becomes L and OFF. A signal is output to switching circuit 4130dd, which interrupts the constant current flowing through firing solenoid 654 . As a result of this cutoff, no current flows through the firing solenoid 654, the firing control voltage becomes smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc becomes H again, the ON signal is output to the switching circuit 4130dd, and the switching circuit 4130dd passes a combined current to firing solenoid 654, which is the current from DC/DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge of electrolytic capacitor SC0, as described above. Thus, according to the ON/OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, the switching circuit 4130dd outputs the combined current of the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current resulting from the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. The switching circuit 4130dd controls the self-excited oscillation in response to the ON/OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc to flow the current to the firing solenoid. In other words, the switching circuit 4130dd functions as a "self-oscillating constant current circuit" and brings the firing control voltage closer to the firing intensity target voltage. As a result, the front rotary handle main body 506 is rotated, and the shooting solenoid 654 is driven with a shooting strength corresponding to the rotational position of the front rotary handle main body 506, so that the game ball can be launched toward the game area 1100. - 特許庁

When the player touches the front rotary handle body 506 and is in the original rotation position where the front rotary handle body 506 is not rotated, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 is the second fixed voltage of the potentiometer 512. This is the voltage that the resistor PR100 applied to the terminal takes charge of. That is, the second fixed terminal of the potentiometer 512 is in a state in which the voltage handled by the resistor PR100 is applied as an offset voltage. This offset voltage is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower described above, and is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the firing intensity target voltage. In this case, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is output to the switching circuit 4130dd, the switching circuit 4130dd combines the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current resulting from the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. combined current to firing solenoid 654 . The current output from this DC/DC converter 831a is the minimum output current. At this time, the firing strength of the firing solenoid 654 is such that it jumps over at least the firing rail 660 shown in FIG. That is, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR100 is the firing intensity target voltage, the current corresponding to that voltage (the minimum output current output from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined. 1111 of the game board 4 shown in FIG. Since it cannot reach the play area 1100, it is received and collected as a foul ball at the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. In other words, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR100 is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower and applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the firing intensity target voltage, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 becomes the minimum current. However, even if this minimum current flows to the firing solenoid 654, all the game balls that have been hit are recovered as foul balls. As a result, it is possible to prevent overlapping of the game ball sent to the shooting rail 660 by the ball sending solenoid 585, so that the shooting solenoid 654 prevents the overlapping game ball from being launched toward the game area 1100. In addition, it is possible to prevent the firing solenoid 654 from being overloaded and prevent failure.

Further, as described above, the offset voltage is set to a voltage for obtaining the minimum firing intensity corresponding to the original rotation position when the front rotary handle main body 506 is at the original rotation position. A game ball shot out along the shooting rail 660 and the outer rail 1111 by the hitting ball shooting device 650 is received as a foul ball at the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 located in the lower part of the foul space 626 and collected. It has become so. As a result, at the time when the player starts rotating the rotary handle main body front 506, even if the player cannot rotate the rotary handle main body front 506 to increase the firing intensity, all the game balls can jump over the launch rail 660, so that the game balls can avoid colliding with each other on the launch rail 660.例文帳に追加For this reason, before the next game ball is hit by the shooting solenoid 654, the player rotates the rotary handle main body front 506 to increase the shooting strength, so that the game ball hit this time with the shooting strength can be shot on the outer rail. By colliding with the previously launched game ball descending along the line 1111, the game ball launched this time together with the previously launched game ball can jump out into the game area 1100. Even if the ball cannot be ejected, it will be received as a foul ball at the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 located in the lower part of the foul space 626, and all of them will be recovered. In other words, even if the player cannot rotate the front 506 of the rotating handle main body to increase the shooting intensity, the shooting intensity enough to jump over the shooting rail 660 is given. colliding on the launch rail 660 to cause jamming. Also, when the player rotates the front 506 of the rotating handle main body to increase the firing intensity, the game ball hit this time with the firing strength is pushed down along the outer rail 1111 to the game ball hit last time. A foul ball of a foul cover unit 540 positioned in the lower part of a foul space 626 as a foul ball even if the game ball hit this time together with the game ball hit last time cannot be jumped out to the game area 1100 by colliding. Since all of them are received and collected at the entrance 542e, the player rotates the rotary handle main body front 506 to further strengthen the shooting intensity, so that the game balls can be ejected into the game area 1100 without causing ball clogging. . That is, the game ball hit this time collides with the game ball hit last time descending along the outer and inner rails 1111, and the game ball hit this time jumps out to the game area 1100 together with the game ball hit last time. Even if it is not possible to cause the player to feel uncomfortable, the player rotates the rotary handle main body front 506 to further strengthen the shooting intensity, so that the game ball can be played without clogging. Since it can be made to jump out to the area|region 1100, the discomfort can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the player's discomfort due to ball clogging at the start of the rotating operation of the front 506 of the rotating handle main body.

In this embodiment, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 for the shunt regulator circuit 4130da, the firing intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is +2.5 V, which is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4130da. +5.0 V amplified by the amplifier circuit 4130db is divided by the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and this divided voltage is also maintained at the same rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506. When the voltage is set, the voltage is kept constant without fluctuation. As a result, the switching circuit 4130dd causes the combined current to flow to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball shooting device 650 to bring the firing control voltage closer to the firing intensity target voltage, and when the firing control voltage becomes equal to the firing intensity target voltage, the rotation When the rotational position of the front handle body 506 is held at the same rotational position, the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not fluctuate and a constant current flows. The firing intensity to be launched toward will be the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the "flying unevenness" of the game ball due to the driving discharge of the discharge solenoid 654. - 特許庁

Also, the pachinko island facility where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed has a game ball circulation system in which game balls discharged from a plurality of pachinko game machines are polished and supplied to the pachinko game machines again. For this reason, the temperature inside the pachinko island equipment is extremely high due to the heat generated by polishing the game balls, the heat generated by the collision and friction between the game balls, and the heat generated by the power supply board of the pachinko machine and various kinds of illumination. . In this embodiment, as described above, the shunt regulator circuit 4130da employs the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90, thereby stabilizing +2.5V even in an environment where the pachinko equipment is filled with heat. It can be output. As a result, the +2.5 V fluctuation due to temperature is suppressed, and the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512, that is, the "fluctuation" of the firing intensity target voltage can be suppressed. , voltage comparison circuit 4130dc can output a control signal to switching circuit 4130dd. In other words, when the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotating handle main body is the same rotational position, it is possible to suppress the "unevenness" in the shooting intensity of the game ball toward the game area 1100, thereby suppressing the "flying unevenness" of the game ball. be able to.

[10-2. Input/output current and output voltage of DC/DC converter]
Next, regarding the input/output current and output voltage of the DC/DC converter 831a, the input current at point TA and the output current and output voltage at point TB shown in FIG. 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The TA point is a point for referring to the input current Iin of the DC/DC converter 831a, and the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC/DC converter 831a. Note that this output voltage Vout is a potential difference from the ground.

First, the relationship between the output voltage Vout and the output current Iout at the TB point is such that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from +35 V, as shown in FIG. 115(a). Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from +35 V to +30 V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, and in the section B where the output voltage Vout is from +30 V to +20 V, the output voltage Vout decreases as the output voltage Vout decreases. In section C where the current Iout increases from 360 mA to 400 mA by about 40 mA, and the output voltage Vout increases from +20 V to +10 V, as the output voltage Vout decreases, the output current Iout increases by about 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA, and the output voltage Vout increases by about 260 mA. to +5 V, the output current Iout increases from 660 mA to 1010 mA by about 350 mA as the output voltage Vout decreases. Note that the output current Iout is approximately 1010 mA from +5 V to near zero V.

As for the relationship between the input current Iin at point TA and the output current Iout at point TB, as shown in FIG. 115(b), as the output voltage Vout decreases from +35 V, the input current Iin decreases and the output current Iout increases. relationship. Specifically, in section A where the output voltage Vout is from +35 V to +30 V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, while the input current Iin decreases from 400 mA to 320 mA by about 80 mA. In this section A, a current corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 flows through the firing solenoid 654, and when the input current Iin is larger than the output current Iout, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is still in the game. While the firing intensity is such that it is difficult to reach the region 1100, when the current corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin begins to become smaller than the output current Iout, the game is played. A game ball launched toward the area 1100 has a shooting intensity that reaches the game area 1100. - 特許庁In section B where the output voltage Vout is from +30V to +20V, the output current Iout increases from 360mA to 400mA by about 40mA, while the input current Iin decreases from 320mA to 260mA by about 60mA. , the input current Iin is completely reduced. In section C where the output voltage Vout is from +20 V to +10 V, the output current Iout increases from 400 mA to 660 mA by approximately 260 mA, while the input current Iin decreases from 260 mA to 210 mA by approximately 50 mA. , the input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout. In section D where the output voltage Vout is from +10 V to +5 V, the output current Iout increases from 660 mA to 1010 mA by approximately 350 mA, while the input current Iin decreases from 210 mA to 175 mA by approximately 35 mA. As in C, the input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout.

When the value of the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a is 360mA, the combined current of 360mA and the current resulting from the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the minimum current. 506 is touched and the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 when the front 506 of the rotary handle body is not rotated is the original rotation position, whereas the value of the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a is 1010 mA. At some point, the combined current of 1010 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the maximum current. is the current through the firing solenoid 654 when it is at the limit rotational position. Thus, the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a has a minimum output current value of 360 mA and a maximum output current value of 1010 mA. When the value of the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a exceeds 1000 mA, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 is already such that the game ball that has hit the play area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 collides with the impinging portion 1114. Then, it rolls downstream along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and is strong enough to be collected at the out hole 1151 without entering various winning holes. Therefore, the range of the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a when the player rotates the front rotary handle body 506 clockwise to play a game is larger than 360 mA and smaller than 1000 mA. (360mA<value of output current Iout<1000mA), the current is on the order of milliamperes.

[10-3. Relationship between input/output current and output voltage of DC/DC converter and firing reference pulse from firing timing circuit]
Next, at a constant rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle main body, the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC/DC converter 831a at the point TB shown in FIG. 113, the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c, will be described with reference to FIG. The TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout (potential difference from the ground) of the DC/DC converter 831a, as described above, and the TC point is a reference pulse for firing from the firing timing circuit 4130c. This is the point for referencing T0.

The firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c is, as described above, when permitting the firing of game balls by the firing solenoid 654, 100 game balls per minute, ie, 60000 ms, are sent toward the game area 1100. Since it is set to be projected, the pulse width is 30 ms and the period T is 600 ms, as shown in FIG. 116(a).

Here, when the player touches the front rotary handle main body 506 and rotates the front rotary handle main body 506 to the limit rotation position, and when it is at the original rotation position without rotation, DC/DC A waveform of the output voltage Vout of the converter 831a will be described.

When the front rotary handle body 506 is at the limit rotation position, the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, as shown in FIGS. 116(b) and (c). As described above, the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current resulting from the discharge of the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined to form the maximum current described above, which begins to flow through the firing solenoid 654 (timing t0 ). When this maximum current is flowing through the firing solenoid 654, according to the characteristics of the DC/DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of 831a becomes 1010 mA, which is the maximum output current described above. When the input of the firing reference pulse T0 is stopped 30 ms after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, discharge progresses until the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches near zero V (timing t1). By cutting off the maximum current to the firing solenoid 654, the output voltage Vout of the DC/DC converter 831a gradually recovers to +35V. Along with this, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC/DC converter 831a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 115, the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases while the output voltage Vout decreases. Immediately after the maximum current is interrupted, the output voltage Vout of the DC/DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is near zero V, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is at the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a. Charging is started with a certain current of 1010 mA, and when the output voltage Vout of the DC/DC converter 831a recovers to around +35 V, charging is continued with a current of 360 mA, and then charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). In other words, the charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input to when the next firing reference pulse T0 is input after 30 ms.

On the other hand, when the front rotary handle main body 506 is at the original rotation position, the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d. As shown in (d), the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined, and the combined current becomes the above-mentioned minimum current, and the discharge solenoid 654 It starts to flow (timing t0). When this minimum current is flowing through the firing solenoid 654, the voltage of the DC/DC converter 831a (the voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0) drops slightly according to the characteristics of the DC/DC converter 831a shown in FIG. It belongs to section A, and the value of the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a is 360 mA, which is the above-described minimum output current. When the input of the firing reference pulse T0 is stopped 30 ms after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 progresses slightly (timing t1). With the minimum current to the firing solenoid 654 interrupted, the output voltage Vout of the DC/DC converter 831a gradually recovers to +35V. Along with this, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC/DC converter 831a. Specifically, as described above, the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a has the characteristic that the output current Iout increases while the output voltage Vout decreases. Immediately after the minimum current is interrupted, the output voltage Vout of the DC/DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 drops slightly, but belongs to the section A, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the output of the DC/DC converter 831a. Charging is started with a current of 360 mA, which is the current Iout, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). In other words, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the time when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input after 30 ms have passed.

In this way, even if the maximum current and the minimum current flow through the firing solenoid 654, due to the characteristics of the DC/DC converter 831a, the charge discharged from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 within the discharge time of 30 ms after the current firing reference pulse T0 is input. can be fully charged within the remaining 570 ms charging time until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

Here, consider a case in which the DC/DC converter 831a alone applies a current to the firing solenoid 654 in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 within a period of 30 ms from the input of the firing reference pulse T0. Looking at it, in this control method, the current that the DC/DC converter 831a alone flows to the firing solenoid 654 is about 2 A to 3.5 A, so this current is supplied from the power supply board 851. When the firing solenoid 654 is driven, a momentary high current of greater than 2A to 3.5A flows. Then, every time the firing reference pulse T0 of 30 ms is generated with a period T of 600 ms, the load on the power supply board also increases for each period T of 600 ms. In other words, the power supply board supplies a predetermined current to electronic parts and electric decorations used for decoration in addition to the momentary large current that flows when the firing solenoid 654 is driven, so the total power of these If the power supply upper limit is exceeded, the power supply is cut off for safety. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the DC/DC converter 831a alone drives the firing solenoid 654 in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the period of 30 ms, which is the pulse width of the firing reference pulse T0 after the firing reference pulse T0 is input, The ampere-order current supplied from the DC power supply of +37V of the power supply board 851 to the DC/DC converter 831a is extended to the period of 600 ms from the time the firing reference pulse T0 is input until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. , a "first current" in the milliampere order supplied to the DC/DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of +37 V on the power supply board 851 when the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the combined current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0. and a "second current" of milliampere order that is supplied to the DC/DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of +37V of the power supply board 851 when the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is charged with the power from the DC/DC converter 831a. can do. As a result, in the period of 30 ms, which is the pulse width of the firing reference pulse T0 after the firing reference pulse T0 is input in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the DC power supply of +37V of the power supply board 851 supplies the DC/DC converter 831a with ampere-order power. Current is supplied from the DC power supply of +37 V of the power supply board 851 to the DC/DC converter 831a during the period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is input with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 present until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. It can be averaged by the supplied "first current" and "second current" on the order of milliamps. Therefore, the power supply board 851 can be freed from a load for supplying an instantaneous large current by driving the firing solenoid 654 . Also, it is possible to eliminate the need to spend time designing operating conditions for the safety device when the power supply board 851 is overloaded.

[10-4. Relationship between firing reference pulse from firing timing circuit and ball forwarding reference pulse]
Next, the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c and the ball-feeding reference pulse T1 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the TC point is a point for referring to the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c, and the TD point shown in FIG. It is a point to do.

The ball feed reference pulse T1 is set to 150 ms (=T0 (30 ms)×5), which is five times the 30 ms of the launch reference pulse T0. When the firing reference pulse T0 is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, as shown in FIGS. When the signal is input to the circuit 4130e (timing t0, 150ms later, the input is stopped (timing t3). Thus, the setting of the game ball to be launched next can be completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input, and each time the firing reference pulse T0 is input, the game ball is moved to the game area 1100. You can launch continuously towards

[11. Circuit of sub liquid crystal drive board]
Next, the circuit etc. of the sub-liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 shown in FIG. 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. FIG. 117 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the sub-liquid crystal drive substrate, and FIG. 118(a) shows the relationship (characteristic curve) between the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume and the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device. FIG. 118B is a schematic diagram showing brightness adjustment of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device. First, reception of a serial signal and the like will be described, followed by description of the power supply circuit for the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 and the operation of adjusting the brightness of the backlight.

[11-1. Reception of serial signals, etc.]
The sub-liquid crystal drive board 3425 mainly includes a sub-liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 as shown in FIG.

The sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 receives a serial signal (serial data) from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a of the liquid crystal output board 3420 shown in FIG. When transmitted as a plus signal and a minus signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, respectively, and this common mode choke coil SDL0 can separate the noise from the plus signal and the minus signal, respectively. The noise-separated plus signal and minus signal are input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, thereby preventing disturbance of the serial signal.

The sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 generates three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, and a horizontal synchronization signal. signal, vertical synchronizing signal, and clock signal (that is, restore the parallel signal before being serialized). Although the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source are each 8 bits, as described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are , the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 3425a. A terminal, LVDSGND application form, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminals are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal that serves as the ground for this digital circuit, and the +3.3 V power supply is supplied to the VDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal that serves as the ground for this TTL output. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal that serves as the ground for this LVDS input, and the capacitor SDC2 is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal that serves as the ground for this PLL circuit, and the power is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

When +3.3 V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating normal operation. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via a resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of a varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltages on the +3.3V electrical line supplied through resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (logic transitions from LOW to HI) or falling edge (logic transitions from HI to LOW). As shown, the falling edge is designated by grounding the EDGE terminal. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, a rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal instructs whether or not to permit output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals, D0 to D17 terminals, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal, the output is always enabled. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, it will be in a state where it cannot be output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them. Operation modes include a normal mode and a handshake mode. In normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal are generated based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. , and three synchronous signals (3-bit synchronous signals) of a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 shown in FIG. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering). This shake hand mode is automatically switched.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the parallel signal restored by the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signals), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, is abnormal data. When it is difficult to draw on the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the resistor SDR2, which is the damping resistor of the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, and the liquid crystal output board 3420. FIG. When the LOCKN signal is input, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a signal to the INIT terminal of the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 to inform the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a of this effect. When this signal is input to the INIT terminal, the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is connected between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for restoring the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 . When such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is received by the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The INIT terminal of the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420 a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 may be electrically connected directly.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal connects the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal for outputting a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control MPU 4150 a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the resistor SDR2 which is the damping resistor of the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 and the liquid crystal output board 3420 .

The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. terminal. In this embodiment, since the restored three synchronization signals, ie, the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal, are not used, the SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal that indicates whether the data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid. A DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 via a resistor SDR3, which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit incorporated in the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0. A clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 via a resistor SDR4, which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals receive three video signals (18 This is a data output terminal for outputting a 1-bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. They are input to the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 through the ladder resistor SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. They are input to the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 through the ladder resistor SDRA1. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. They are input to the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 through the ladder resistor SDRA2.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 4140, the liquid crystal output board 3420, the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 are electrically connected to form the same ground. Also, +3.3 V generated by the +3.3 V generating circuit 3425 a is supplied to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 .

[11-2. Power supply circuit for backlight of sub-liquid crystal display device]
Next, the power supply circuit for the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 will be described. As shown in FIG. 117, the sub-liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 is supplied to the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 (in this embodiment, the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 uses a white LED). A backlight power supply circuit 3425b is provided for generating power to operate. The backlight power supply circuit 3425b mainly includes an LED current adjustment circuit 3425f that is optimally designed for constant current lighting of white LEDs.

+3.3 V is supplied to the power supply terminal of the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f, and the GND terminal is grounded. A capacitor SDC4 is electrically connected between the power supply terminal and the GND terminal to remove high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line supplied to the power supply terminal.

The SW terminal of the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f is supplied with +3.3V via the coil SDL1 and is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode SDD0. The cathode terminal of the diode SDD0 is electrically connected to the OVD terminal of the LED current adjusting circuit 3425f and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor SDC5 grounded at one end.

The SW terminal is a terminal where switching is performed by an Nch MOSFET (not shown) incorporated in the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f. By this switching, when the switch is turned on, energy is stored in the coil SDL1, and when the switch is turned off, the energy stored in the coil SDL1 is released via the diode SDD0.

The OVD terminal is a terminal for monitoring whether or not the voltage due to this release becomes an overvoltage when the energy stored in the coil SDL1 is released through the diode SDD0. When the overvoltage is detected, switching by the Nch MOSFET (not shown) incorporated in the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f is stopped. When the applied voltage falls below the detection level, switching is resumed.

In this embodiment, eight white LEDs are electrically connected in series as the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450, and the anode terminal of the first-stage (first) white LED is provided with the light generated by the switching operation described above. is supplied as an LED anode, and is input to the FB terminal of the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f as an LED cathode from the cathode terminal of the final stage (eighth) white LED. The If adjustment terminal of the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f is electrically connected to a brightness adjustment circuit 3425g for adjusting the current If that flows through the first stage (first) white LED to the final stage (eighth) white LED. . This brightness adjustment circuit 3425g is composed of resistors SDR5 and SDR6 which are fixed resistors, and a brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 which is a semi-fixed variable resistor. One end of the resistor SDR6 and one fixed end of the two fixed ends of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 are grounded, while the other end of the resistor SDR6 and the remaining one fixed end of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 (ground and ground) are grounded. By electrically connecting both ends of the resistor SDR6 and the two fixed ends of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0, one end of the resistor SDR5 is connected to the other end of the resistor SDR6. The other end of the resistor SDR5 is electrically connected to the variable end of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 while the other end of the resistor SDR5 is electrically connected to the remaining one fixed end of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 (the fixed end not grounded to the ground). It is One end of SDR5, the other end of resistor SDR6, and the remaining fixed end (fixed end not grounded) of brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 are electrically connected to the If adjustment terminal of LED current adjustment circuit 3425f. .

The brightness adjustment circuit 3425g is composed of resistors SDR5 and SDR6, which are fixed resistors, and brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, which is a semi-fixed variable resistor, as described above. As the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated from the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 toward the maximum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, the amount of change in the combined resistance RSENS with respect to the operation amount of the rotation operation becomes constant and linear. Instead, it has a characteristic that the combined resistance RSENS changes in a curved line in which the change amount of the combined resistance RSENS with respect to the operation amount of the rotation operation becomes small. The LED current adjustment circuit 3425f adjusts the current If flowing through the first stage (first) white LED to the final stage (eighth) white LED so as to match this characteristic. In other words, the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f adjusts the current If flowing through the first stage (first) white LED to the final stage (eighth) white LED from the minimum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 to the maximum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. As the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated toward the LED, the amount of change in the current If flowing through the first stage (first) white LED to the final stage (eighth) white LED with respect to the operation amount of the rotation operation becomes smaller. change in a curved line.

In this embodiment, if the current applied to the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is set to about 15 mA to 25 mA so as not to exceed the maximum rated current (30 mA (milliampere)) of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450, it is fixed. A combined resistor RSENS composed of the resistors SDR5 and SDR6, which are resistors, and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, which is a semi-fixed variable resistor, is about 12Ω to 20Ω. A general-purpose, easily available and inexpensive 24Ω resistance value is selected as the fixed resistor SDR5, and a general-purpose, easily available and inexpensive 27Ω resistance value is selected as the fixed resistor SDR6, As the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0, which is a semi-fixed variable resistor, a 100 Ω chip-type cermet film ceramic semi-fixed variable resistor VG039N manufactured by Hokuriku Denki Kogyo Co., Ltd., which is a general-purpose, easily available, and inexpensive variable resistor, is selected, and the rotation angle is set to 0. The resistance value can be adjusted from the minimum resistance value of 0 Ω (zero Ω) to the maximum resistance value of 100 Ω by rotating from ° to 270 °. It can be varied by 0.37Ω. 118(a), the solid line in FIG. , the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is the maximum of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 when the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is the minimum resistance value of 0Ω (zero Ω). The resistance values of the resistors SDR5 and SDR6, which are fixed resistors described above, are selected so that the brightness is about 45% of the rated brightness. is also about 85% of the maximum rated luminance of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 .

The relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 at the ambient temperature during the backlight brightness adjustment work is shown by the solid line curve in FIG. 118(a). When the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is operated, the relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the amount of change in the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 (that is, the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 The slope of the solid line curve in FIG. As shown by the two-dot chain line curve in FIG. 118(a), when the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated, the inclination of the characteristic curve of the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the rotation operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is However, in the resistance value range of 0Ω (zero Ω) to 10Ω of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, the rotation angle decreases by about 0.37% for a rotating operation of a rotation angle of 27°, and the rotation angle in the resistance value range of 10Ω to 20Ω Approximately 0.25% decrease for a rotation operation of 27°, a decrease of about 0.16% for a rotation operation of a rotation angle of 27° in the 20Ω to 30Ω range of the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 In the resistance value range of 30Ω to 40Ω, the resistance value decreases by about 0.11% for a rotating operation with a rotation angle of 27°. Decrease by 0.08%, about 0.06% decrease in the resistance value range of 50Ω to 60Ω of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 for rotating operation of the rotation angle of 27°, and the rotation angle in the resistance value range of 60Ω to 70Ω of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. Approximately 0.05% decrease for a 27° rotation operation, approximately 0.04% decrease in the resistance value range of 70Ω to 80Ω of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, and approximately 0.04% decrease in the resistance value range of 80Ω to 90Ω of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. 05%, and about 0.09% in the resistance value range of 90Ω to 100Ω of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0.

In this embodiment, the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 adjusted in the brightness adjustment work of the backlight is set to be about 72.5% of the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450. , adjust the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. In this case, the relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 at the ambient temperature during the backlight brightness adjustment work is shown in FIG. 118(a). When the curve is a solid line, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, which is about 72.5% of the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450, is about 38Ω.

By the way, in the hall, since a plurality of pachinko game machines are arranged in a row opposite to the pachinko island facility, the internal temperature of the pachinko island facility gradually rises after the start of business. Therefore, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, which is about 72.5% of the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 at the ambient temperature during the backlight brightness adjustment work, is about 38Ω. Even with adjustment, temperature drift will also change the luminance. For example, immediately after the opening of the hall, the internal temperature of the pachinko island equipment is also low during the brightness adjustment work of the backlight. When the solid line curve in FIG. 118(a) shifts downward to the one-dot chain line curve in FIG. less than .5%. Then, when the hall starts operating and the internal temperature of the pachinko island equipment rises to the ambient temperature at which the brightness of the backlight is adjusted, the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 increases according to the solid curve in FIG. 118(a). It is approximately 72.5% of the maximum rated luminance. Then, if the internal temperature of the pachinko island equipment rises further, and the resistance value increases by 5%, the solid curve in FIG. When the dashed curve of 118(a) is reached, the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is greater than about 72.5% of the maximum rated brightness.

Here, the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g composed of resistors SDR5 and SDR6 which are fixed resistors and brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 which is a semi-fixed variable resistor is divided into a resistor SDR6' which is a fixed resistor and a brightness adjustment volume which is a semi-fixed variable resistor. Consider the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g', which is configured by electrically connecting the volume SDVR0' and the volume SDVR0' in series. The brightness adjustment circuit 3425g' is electrically connected in series with a variable terminal of a brightness adjustment volume SDVR0' having a semi-fixed variable resistor at the other end of a resistor SDR6' which is a fixed resistor grounded at one end. A fixed terminal of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0', which is a fixed variable resistor, is electrically connected to the If adjustment terminal of the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f. In order not to exceed the maximum rated current (30 mA) of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450, as described above, if the current flowing through the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is set to about 15 mA to 25 mA, it is a fixed resistance. A combined resistance RSENS' composed of the resistance SDR6' and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0' which is a semi-fixed variable resistance is about 12Ω to 20Ω. If 10Ω is selected for the resistor SDR6', which is a fixed resistor, 10Ω must be selected for the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0'. A semi-fixed variable resistor of 10Ω is not a general-purpose item, is not easily available, and is expensive. As the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0′ is rotated toward 10Ω, the amount of change in the combined resistance RSENS′ with respect to the operation amount of the rotation operation becomes constant and linear.

Suppose that the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 when the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0′ is 0Ω (zero Ω), which is the minimum resistance value, and the brightness adjustment volume at the solid curve in FIG. The luminance of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is the same when the resistance value of SDVR0 is the minimum resistance value of 0Ω (zero Ω), and the resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0′ is the maximum resistance value of 10Ω. The brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 at a certain time and the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 when the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 in the curve of the solid line in FIG. 118(a) is the maximum resistance value of 100Ω and are the same, the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 will reach the maximum rated brightness when the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0′ is the minimum resistance value of 0Ω (zero Ω), as described above. On the other hand, it is about 45%, and when the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0' is 10Ω which is the maximum resistance value, it is about 85% of the maximum rated brightness.

Then, as the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0′ is rotated from 0Ω (zero Ω), which is the minimum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0′, toward 10Ω, which is the maximum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0′, the rotation operation is performed. Since the amount of change in the combined resistance RSENS' with respect to the manipulated variable is always constant, it does not take the curved shape shown in FIG. That is, the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 changes from 0Ω (zero Ω), which is the minimum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0′, toward 10Ω, which is the maximum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0′. ' changes linearly from about 45% to about 85% with respect to the maximum rated luminance as the ' is rotated. , the total amount of change in the brightness of the backlight is about 40%.

Assuming that the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0′ has a rotation angle of 0° to 270° as with the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, the slope of the straight line with respect to the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is approximately 0.148% (=approximately 40%/270°). If the resistance value of the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g' consisting of the resistor SDR6', which is a fixed resistor, and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0', which is a semi-fixed variable resistor, increases by 5% due to temperature drift, the above-described When the characteristic line moves upward, the luminance of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 increases by 5%, while the resistance value decreases by 5% due to temperature drift. By moving downward, the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 decreases by 5%. On the other hand, in the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g of this embodiment, the brightness adjustment volume is adjusted so that the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is approximately 72.5% on the solid line curve in FIG. 118(a). If the resistance value of SDVR0 is adjusted to about 38 Ω and the resistance value increases by 5% due to temperature drift, resulting in the dashed curve in FIG. At this resistance value, the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is about 77%, which is about 4.5% higher. ), the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is about 36Ω, and the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 at this resistance value is about 68%, and about 4.5%. become smaller.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if temperature drift occurs, the above-described characteristic curve moves upward or downward, but the amount of change in the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is about ±4.5. %, the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g' is configured by electrically connecting a resistor SDR6', which is a fixed resistor, and a brightness adjustment volume SDVR0', which is a semi-fixed variable resistor, in series. The amount of change in the luminance of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 can be reduced by as much as 10% compared to the amount of change in the luminance of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 3450 (within ±5%). Therefore, fluctuations in brightness of the backlight due to temperature changes (temperature drift) can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as described above, even if the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted to the maximum resistance value of 100Ω, the solid line in FIG. is about 85% of the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450, and even if the internal temperature of the pachinko island facility rises due to temperature drift, the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is at its maximum. It is about 90% of the rated luminance. In other words, even if temperature drift occurs, the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 does not reach the maximum rated brightness.

[11-3. Backlight brightness adjustment work]
Next, the operation of adjusting the brightness of the backlight will be described. This backlight luminance adjustment work is performed before the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, and the unused sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 that has never been mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 is used. In addition, this is also done when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is removed from the pachinko game machine 1 once installed in the hall and reused.

The brightness adjustment work of the backlight is performed by the manufacturer's worker in the backlight brightness adjustment work process. The brightness adjustment work process of the backlight is performed using various jigs and various devices fixed to the workbench. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(b), a mounting base ARL to which the luminance measuring device MOL is mounted, a jig ARSL for mounting the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450, and a sub-liquid crystal driving device for driving the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 are provided. A jig ARSD for attaching a sub-liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430 in which the substrate 3425 is housed is fixed to the workbench. The measurement surface of the luminance measuring device MOL attached to the mounting base ARL faces the center of the display area of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 attached to the jig ARSL, and the luminance measuring device MOL mounted to the mounting base ARL faces the center of the display area. The mount ARL and the jig ARSL are fixed to the workbench so that the distance dimension between the surface and the display area of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 attached to the jig ARSL is a predetermined distance d. The luminance measured by the luminance measuring device MOL is displayed on a luminance display (not shown). The sub liquid crystal display device 3450 attached to the jig ARSL is electrically connected to various wirings from the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430 attached to the jig ARSD. The sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 of the sub liquid crystal drive board box 3430 attached to the jig ARSD is also electrically connected to wiring from a controller (not shown) for rendering the entire display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 white. ing.

In the sub liquid crystal drive board box 3430, the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 is accommodated between a base member and a cover member combined with this base member, and the cover member and the base member are made of a transparent synthetic resin material. ing. The cover member is formed with an adjustment hole 3430a into which an adjustment tool for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 of the sub-liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 can be inserted. A wiring port is formed for this purpose, and a plurality of ventilation holes for cooling the internal air of the sub liquid crystal drive board box 3430 are formed along the upper and lower sides, respectively.

An operator of the manufacturer operates a controller (not shown) to transmit drawing data for drawing the entire display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 in white to the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 of the sub liquid crystal drive board box 3430, and the sub liquid crystal is displayed. The drive substrate 3425 renders the entire display area of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 in white. While looking at the brightness displayed on the brightness display (not shown), the manufacturer's worker adjusts the jig ARSD so that it is about 72.5% of the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450. An adjustment tool is inserted through an adjustment hole 3430a formed in the attached sub liquid crystal drive board box 3430 to rotate the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 of the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 housed in the sub liquid crystal drive board box 3430. FIG. Since the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated by inserting an adjustment tool from an adjustment hole 3430a formed in the sub liquid crystal drive board box 3430, it is possible to directly touch the adjustment hole 3430a with a finger. It is not possible. In other words, even if the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the hall, even a hall clerk or the like cannot rotate the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0.

The relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 at the ambient temperature during the backlight brightness adjustment work is shown by the solid line curve in FIG. 118(a). In this case, operate the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 to adjust the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 to about 38Ω so that the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is about 72.5%. There is a need. As described above, the inclination of the characteristic curve of the luminance of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the rotational operation of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 is a rotation angle of 27 in the resistance value range of 0Ω (zero Ω) to 10Ω of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0. 0.37% for a rotating operation of 27°. In the resistance value range of 20Ω to 30Ω, it decreases by about 0.16% for a rotation operation with a rotation angle of 27°. .11%, the manufacturer's operator rotates the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 from the minimum resistance value of 0Ω (zero Ω) as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. The amount of change in the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the operation amount for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 decreases as it approaches the target resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, which is about 38 Ω. As the resistance value of about 38Ω is approached, the operation amount for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 increases, and the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can be gradually brought closer to the target resistance value of about 38Ω. That is, in the present embodiment, as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 approaches the target resistance value, the slope of the characteristic curve of the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the turning operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 smoothly decreases. Therefore, the amount of operation for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can be increased as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 approaches the target resistance value.

Here, let us consider the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g' configured by electrically connecting in series the resistor SDR6', which is a fixed resistor, and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0', which is a semi-fixed variable resistor. Since the slope of the characteristic curve of the luminance of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the rotating operation of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 is constant at about 0.148%, Even if the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated from the minimum resistance value of 0Ω (zero Ω), the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0′ is quickly adjusted so that the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is obtained. The target resistance value cannot be approached and adjustment is difficult. On the other hand, in the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g of the present embodiment, as described above, as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 approaches the target resistance value, the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 responds to the rotating operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. Since the slope of the characteristic curve of the brightness of the backlight decreases smoothly, the slope is slightly large until it approaches the target resistance value (the slope is the highest in the range of the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 from 0Ω (zero Ω) to 10Ω). The slope in the 10Ω to 20Ω section is large, and the slope in the 20Ω to 30Ω section is large), the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can be quickly brought close to the target resistance value (approximately 30Ω), and the target When approaching the resistance value (approximately 30Ω), the slope becomes smaller as it approaches the target resistance value (the slope after the resistance value of 30Ω of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 becomes smaller as it approaches the target resistance value). is increased as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 approaches the target resistance value, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can gradually approach the target resistance value, making adjustment easier. . Therefore, fine adjustment of the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 can be easily performed.

In addition, when the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is removed from the pachinko game machine 1 once installed in the hall and reused, the maximum backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 has already been set in the brightness adjustment work process of this backlight. Although the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted to the target resistance value of about 38 Ω so that it is about 72.5% of the rated brightness, assuming that it has deteriorated by about 10%, the manufacturer , the operator is working while looking at a luminance display (not shown) that displays the luminance measured by the luminance measuring device MOL. %, even if the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted to the target resistance value of about 38 Ω, actually according to the solid line curve in FIG. The resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted to about 76Ω so that the maximum rated brightness of the light is about 82.5%.

[12. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, FIG. 120 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. 120 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. 122 is a table showing an example of various commands received by the main control board from the payout control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110, will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. Various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the board 4100 will be described.

[12-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. Upon input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko game machine 1 and drive the payout motor 744 of the pachinko game machine 1 (prize ball device 740) to drive the upper tray 301 or the storage tray. When the lower tray 302 is electrically connected to a device that pays out game balls as rental balls (such a pachinko game machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. In the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110, command 10H to command 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared, and one prize ball is prepared at command 10H. Command 11H designates 2 prize balls, . . . , Command 1EH designates 15 prize balls. The payout control board 4110 controls to drive the payout motor 744 and pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302, which are storage trays, as rental balls) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). When the game machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko game machine is called a "general machine"), payout is made from the main control board 4100 as shown in FIG. 119(b). Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted to the control board 4110. Command 20H designates one prize ball, command 21H designates two prize balls, and so on. 2EH specifies 15 prize balls. The payout control board 4110 controls to drive the payout motor 744 and pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to CR machines and general machines, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 119(c), and this command 30H specifies a self-check. If an ACK signal output from the receiving side as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input. Check connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 4110 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6 .

[12-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. and a mode showing variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

Various commands, as shown in Figure 120 and Figure 121, special figure 1 synchronization effect related, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power on, normal figure synchronization effect related, normal electric role effect related, notification display, status classified into display and others.

[12-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022 shown in FIG. 97, and as shown in FIG. Regarding the upper special symbol display device 1185, it is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization production start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization production end, and state designation at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , Toku-zu 1 synchronization production end command is intended to indicate the end of Toku-zu 1 synchronization production, the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production start, special figure 1 synchronization The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the special symbol win-loss information designation. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing which will be described later.

[12-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronization Production Related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 97, and as shown in FIG. Regarding the lower special symbol display device 1186, it consists of commands named special figure 2 synchronization production start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization production end. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization production instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization production.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 120, the section related to big win includes big win opening, big win 1 open Nth display, big win 1 closed display, big win 1 count display, big win ending, big win pattern display, small win opening. , small-hit open display, small-hit count display, and small-hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of jackpot opening, and the N-th display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start of opening the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (the attacker unit 2100 shown in FIG. 95). During the N-th round opening or opening of the large winning gate 2103, the large winning gate 1 closed display command instructs the large winning gate 1 to be closed between rounds (the large winning gate 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is closed). 2103 during closing or closing start), and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that 0 to 10 counts have been counted (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 97, The number of game balls entering the big winning opening 2103) is transmitted, the big winning ending command instructs the start of the big winning ending, and the big winning pattern display command instructs the display of the big winning pattern information. be.

In addition, the small winning opening command is for instructing the start of the small winning opening, and the small winning opening display command is for starting the small winning opening (during opening or opening the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 at the time of the small winning) start), and the small hit count display command is a small hit middle and large winning opening winning effect production), and the small hit ending command instructs the start of the small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the command for displaying the jackpot 1 Nth time is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds. When the winning opening 2103 is opened for the Nth round), the large winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when closing the large winning opening 1 (starting closing of the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100), and the large winning The mouth 1 count display command is when the big winning mouth 1 is opened and the count changes to the big winning mouth 1 (when the big winning mouth 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and the game ball entering the big winning mouth 2103 counts switch 2110), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot is opened (when the jackpot 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened). be.

Further, the small win opening command is transmitted at the start of the small winning opening, and the small winning opening display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small winning (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the time of the small winning). The hit count display command is transmitted when the small hit middle big winning opening is won (when the game ball entering the big winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110 during the small winning), and the small winning ending command is Sent at the start of the jackpot ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 120, the category of power-on consists of various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, it instructs the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated. ).

As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at times other than RAM clear and RAM clear at power-on of the main control board. Specifically, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, when it recovers from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is executed. A power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-5. Related to Futsuzu Synchronization Production]
The general pattern synchronization production relation is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 97, and as shown in FIG. Consists of commands with the names of normal pattern synchronization production start, normal pattern designation, general pattern synchronization production end, and change state designation regarding the device 1189. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The normal pattern synchronization production start command instructs the start of the general pattern synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern specification command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronous production end command indicates the end of the normal figure synchronous production, and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern synchronization production start command is sent at the start of normal pattern 1 fluctuation, the general pattern designation command is sent immediately after the general pattern synchronization production start, and the general pattern synchronization production end command is , It is transmitted when the normal pattern fluctuation time elapses (normal pattern is determined), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the normal pattern win-loss information is designated. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
95, which is opened and closed by driving the starter solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 97. It is composed of commands named opening per figure, open display of general electrics, and ending per per figure. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The general pattern opening command is for instructing the start of the general pattern opening, and the general pattern opening display command indicates that the general pattern is open during start (a pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened in the left and right direction by driving the start port solenoid 2105). It is intended to indicate the state or when to spread), and the ending command per normal pattern instructs the start of ending per normal pattern.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal per pattern opening command is transmitted at the start of per normal per pattern opening, and the general power open display command is transmitted at the time of normal power opening (a pair of movable pieces 2106 are driven by the start port solenoid 2105 When spreading in the left and right direction), the ending command per normal pattern is sent at the start of the ending per normal pattern. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 121, the classification of the notification display consists of commands named winning error display, connection error display, disconnection/short circuit error display, magnetic detection switch error display, door open, and door close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 when the game ball enters the big winning opening other than during the big win (when the condition device is in operation). When the count switch 2110 detects), the connection abnormality display command instructs the start of the winning abnormality notification, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, the electrical connection in the path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 When there is an abnormality, it instructs the start of connection abnormality notification. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command instructs the start of the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display when the disconnection/short circuit of the electrical connection occurs. In this case, it instructs the start of the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification.

Further, the door opening command is based on detection signals (opening signals) from the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 or when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the door open notification is instructed. Based on detection signals from the door frame open switch 618 and the main body frame open switch 619, the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When it is in the state, it instructs to end the door open notification.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a large winning opening other than during the jackpot (condition device is in operation), and the connection abnormality display command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 It is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of command transmission to, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110 etc. , is sent when any one of them is disconnected or short-circuited, the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is sent when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected, and the door open command is sent when the door is detected to be open (door frame open) Based on the detection signals from the switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619, when the body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 or when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the body frame 3 The door closing command is sent when door closing is detected (based on the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619, the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2). and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 121, the state display is divided into commands named frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame state 2. In FIG. These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and detailed descriptions thereof will be given later. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. Along with setting the status, the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, the additional information "7*H" is added to these received commands. is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is transmitted when power is restored, when the frame state changes, and during error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted when power is restored. , and when the frame state changes. Note that these formatted frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-9. test related]
As shown in FIG. 121, the test-related section consists of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the sound source IC 4150c of the peripheral control section 4150, the liquid crystal control section 4160, the liquid crystal output board 3420, the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, and the Various substrates such as the lamp driving substrate 4170, the motor driving substrate 4180, and the frame decoration driving amplifier substrate 194 are inspected).

As for the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at times other than the RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on and the RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, or when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, main control side power-on processing described later is executed. A test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-10. others]
As shown in FIG. 121, the other divisions include start-up winning, variable reduction operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The starting opening winning command is for instructing the start of starting opening winning effect, and when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, the starting of the production and the lower Based on the detection signal from the starting port switch 2109, the start of the effect when the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102, and the command to specify the end of the variable shortening operation, from the variable shortening operation state. It instructs the state transition to the variable reduction non-operating state, the high probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command is the special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (the number of balls that have not yet been used for special symbol fluctuation display on the upper special symbol display device 1185 of the function display board 1191 after the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 shown in FIG. 95 ( The number of reservations))), and the special symbol 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 2 reservations (a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. 95 and the lower special of the function display board 1191 The symbol indicator 1186 transmits the number of balls (reserved number) that has not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols. The game ball passes through the part 2350 and the normal symbol display device 1189 of the function display board 1191 conveys the number of balls (reserved number) that is not yet used for the variable display of the normal symbol, and special symbol 1 memory prefetch effect Before the special symbol 1 reserve is used for the variable display of the special symbols in the upper special symbol display 1185 of the function display board 1191, the command is read ahead and displayed by the upper special symbol display 1185 based on the special symbol 1 reserve. The special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the lower special symbol display 1186 on the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191. It is intended to instruct the start of the look-ahead effect to look ahead and notify the advance notice of the display result by the lower special symbol display device 1186 based on the special symbol 2 reservation.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting entrance winning command is set at the time of starting entrance winning (when the game ball enters the upper starting entrance 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting entrance switch 3022, or when the lower starting entrance switch 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, and the upper left speaker shown in FIG. The change shortening operation end designation command is transmitted from the lower speaker 262 or the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. When the high probability end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period (after the end of the stop period) after the high probability number of times in the case of "high probability N times" The special symbol 1 storage command is transmitted, and when the number of special symbol 1 operation pending balls changes (the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the special symbol is displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 of the function display board 1191) In a state in which there is a reserved number that has not yet been used, when a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the upper special pattern display device 1185 displays a variable display of special patterns. The special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls is reduced using the special symbol 2, and the special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation reserved balls changes In a state where there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for variable display of special patterns on the special symbol display 1186, when the game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is lowered When the reserved number is reduced by using the special symbol display device 1186 for variable display of special symbols, the normal symbol storage command is transmitted when the normal symbol 1 operation reserved ball number changes (when the game ball passes through the gate part 2350 When there is a reserved number that has passed and is not yet used for variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 1189 of the function display board 1191, the game ball passes through the gate section 2350 and the reserved number increases. , When the reserved number is reduced by using the normal symbol display device 1189 for the variable display of the normal symbol from the reserved number), the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command is sent when the special symbol 1 operation reserved ball number increases (When the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the number of reservations increases), the special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command is sent when the number of special symbol 2 operation reservation balls increases (the game ball at the lower start port 2102 is sent when the ball enters and the number of holds increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is issued at the time of starting opening winning (when a game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or from the lower starting opening switch 2109). When the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal of ), the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821 notify that effect mainly by voice. However, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 100 utilizes the starter winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko game machine. For example, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to notifying by voice from the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821, it is also used to monitor the presence or absence of fraud. It is a specification to do. On the other hand, in other pachinko game machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start winning command, and the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821 can be heard by voice. Some specifications do not notify.

[12-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 122, various commands from the payout control board 4110 are divided into commands named frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame state 2. The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command includes out of ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, abnormal connection and CR unconnected. A value of 1 is set, bit 1 (B1) is set to a value of 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value of 1 when the stock is 50 or more, and bit 3 (B3) is set to a value of connection failure. 1 is set, and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 1 command have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

Error cancellation navigation commands are prepared for sphere detection, count switch error, and retry error. Bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 for sphere detection, and bit 3 (B3) is set for count switch error. It is set to 1, and a retry error sets bit 4 (B4) to the value 1. Here, "counting switch error" indicates whether or not the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 98 is malfunctioning. A "retry error" indicates that an inconsistent game ball was repeatedly put out by a retry operation. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value of 0 in B0, a value of 0 in B1, a value of 0 in B5, a value of 1 in B6, A value of 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is provided with "draw ball", and bit 0 (B0) is set to "1" during ball draw. Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command have a value of 0 in B1, a value of 0 in B2, a value of 0 in B3, a value of 0 in B4, a value of 1 in B5, a value of 1 in B6, and A value of 0 is set in B7.

As transmission timings for these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at power restoration, frame state change, and error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation. is sent when power is restored and when frame status changes. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S360 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[13. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125. FIG. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 123, and FIG. 125 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the initial value update type counter (range toward the maximum value side), and FIG. 155 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the initial value update type counter (minimum range toward the value side). First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, and a jackpot determination initial value determination for use in determining the initial value of the jackpot determination random number Random numbers for use, reach determination random numbers for use in determining whether or not to generate reach (reach loss) when not generating a jackpot gaming state, and upper special symbol display 1185 and lower special shown in FIG. A random number for the variation display pattern for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 1186, and the upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186 when generating the jackpot game state. A jackpot pattern random number for use in determining the jackpot pattern to be derived and displayed, a jackpot pattern initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the jackpot pattern random number, and when generating a small win game state A small hit symbol random number for use in determining the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186, and a small hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of this small hit symbol random number. Random numbers for initial value determination for symbols are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece 2106 shown in FIG. A random number for determining the initial value for determination of a normal symbol to be used, and a random number for a normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol to be variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 1189 shown in FIG. 97, etc. are provided.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for judging a big hit is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the minimum value is 0 to the maximum value is 32767). The range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for big win determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determination of the initial value for big win determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an "initial value updating type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for judging a big win can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a big win. In addition, the normal symbol hit determination random number and the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are the same as the method of updating the big hit determination random number described above.

In the present embodiment, when the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, as described above, the initial value for determination of the jackpot determination The random number is updated by executing the initial value lottery process, but when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when it does not match the stored checksum value (sum value) at (power off), the random number for determining the initial value for judging a big hit is The main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 97 extracts the ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for judging the big hit based on the extracted ID code. , and this derived fixed value is set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for judging a big hit is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value to be set to the initial value determination random number for judging a big hit is derived using an ID code, and is stored in a non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 4100a. The first security measure is that once the code is stored, the ID code cannot be rewritten using an external device. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value by using two security measures is taken to prevent analysis.

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a and using the taken out ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for judging a big hit will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 4 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that is obtained illegally and updates the random number for judging a big hit matches the value for judging a big hit, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a' provided in the other game board 4'. In other words, on the other game board 4', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the big-hit judgment random number and the big-hit judgment value match is completely different from that of the obtained game board 4. - 特許庁In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless in the other game board 4', that is, in the other pachinko game machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained, and a game ball is entered into the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102 at each predetermined interval as shown in FIG. A game state cannot be generated.

[13-2. Operation of initial value update type counter]
The initial value update type counter, as shown in FIG. 154, when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when clearing the RAM), the main control MPU 4100a takes out the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and this Based on the extracted ID code, an initial value deriving process is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed value range of the counter for updating the big hit judging random number, and the derived fixed value is set. In the first cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the fixed value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for judging a big hit, one value is selected from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for judging a big hit as a random number for determining the initial value for judging a big hit. An initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by lottery to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for judging a big hit, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is set. , as the third cycle, the value obtained by lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. In this embodiment, as the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range), a value of 32668 to 32767 is set for a low probability, and is read from the normal determination table, whereas a value of 31768 to 31768 is set for a high probability. 32767 is set, and is read from the determination table at the time of probability variation. In this embodiment, the counter for updating the random number for judging a big hit updates a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot judgment value (jackpot judgment range) is the middle value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. is set.

Here, as the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range), a value of 10 to 209 is set at a low probability, and a value of 10 to 339 is set at a high probability. As shown in , the range of the jackpot judgment value (jackpot judgment range) is the middle value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. will be set to In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes value 0 to the time when it becomes the first value 10 in the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range), and this value 10 When comparing the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767), the former period has a much lower probability of being selected by the initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes value 0 to the final value (value 209 at low probability, value 339 at high probability) in the range of jackpot determination values (jackpot determination range) and the range from the value next to this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767). The probability of being selected by the initial value lottery process is extremely low compared to the range. Then, for example, by illegally acquiring the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating radio waves toward the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102, the game ball starts upward. If a fraudulent act is performed by pretending that the ball has entered the opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter becomes one of the jackpot determination value ranges (jackpot determination range). It can be said that the probability is high.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range) is between the low probability and the high probability. If it is set to a range closer to the maximum value, the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 and before it becomes the first value in the range of the jackpot judgment value (jackpot judgment range) The period until the value (low probability value 32667, high probability value 31767) and the period from the first value (low probability value 32668, high probability value 31768) to the maximum value (value 32767) , the former period has a much higher probability of being selected by the above-described initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes value 0 (value 32667 at low probability, value 31767 at high probability) and the range from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is better than the latter range. The probability of being selected by the initial value lottery process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from 0 to the value before the first value in the range of the jackpot judgment value (jackpot judgment range) (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). Among them, one of the values will be the value selected by the initial value lottery process and will be set to the above-described random number for determining the initial value for judging a big hit, so from the value obtained by this lottery toward the maximum value. It counts up, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for judging a big hit, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is set. , the value obtained by lottery will be counted up toward the maximum value. That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range) has a low probability and a high probability. If it is set to a range close to , the value (low The period until the value 32667 in probability and the value 31767 in high probability is irregular and rich in randomness. As a result, for example, by illegally obtaining the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating radio waves toward the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102, the game ball can move upward. Even if a cheating act pretending to have entered the starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is within the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range). It can be said that the probability of obtaining a value is low.

Note that the initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated within the range from the minimum value to the maximum value, as shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 . From the initial value to the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (jackpot judgment range) until the counter reaches the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (jackpot judgment range) in the second cycle The required time is time T0. In the third cycle from time T0, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range) is time T1, and time T1 is shorter than time T0. . In the 4th cycle from time T1, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the range of jackpot determination values (jackpot determination range) is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. . In this way, in the initial value update type counter, by giving fluctuations to the time when the updated counter reaches the minimum value (first value) of the range of jackpot determination values (jackpot determination range) (periodicity are excluded) so that it is not detected by the player.

[13-3. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. When this main-control-side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 4100a sets a stack pointer (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a temporary return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the register contents, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

After step S10, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S12), and it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. be. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and is stabilized. ms) is set. The determination in step S14 is performed based on the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. FIG.

Following step S14, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 has been operated (step S16). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control MPU 4100a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated. When the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated.

When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated in step S16, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 (step S18). The notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 0 (step S20). This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM".) This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase information, and is set to a value of 1 when game information is erased and a value of 0 when game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

After step S18 or step S20, wait timer process 2 is performed (step S22). This wait timer process 2 waits until the system for performing drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the liquid crystal control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 100 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

Following step S22, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S26, whether or not the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off), which will be described later. (step S28). If they match, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S30). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, ie, when the main control side power failure processing is normally completed, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as when the power is restored (step S32). In this setting, in addition to setting the backup flag BK-FLG to 0, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and this power recovery The hour information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery of power" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the state in which the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure, and the state in which the high frequency radiation is detected and reset. It also includes the state after which it has returned.

Following step S32, power-on command creation processing is performed (step S34). In this power-on command generation process, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S24, that is, when game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S28 , or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in step S30, that is, when the main control side power failure processing is not normally completed, clear the entire area of the main control built-in RAM ( step S36). Specifically, the value 0 is written into the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM and set as the initial value). In addition, the above-described random number for determining the initial value of the big hit determination is used when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated to erase the game information, and when the sum values do not match. Or, when the main control side power failure processing is not normally completed, a unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is retrieved, and a random number for judging a big hit is generated based on the retrieved ID code. An initial value derivation process is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates , and this fixed value is set.

Following step S36, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as initial setting (step S38). For this setting, the initial information is read from the main control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S38, RAM clear notification and test command generation processing are performed (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 121 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

After step S34 or step S40, interrupt initialization is performed (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

After step S42, interrupt permission setting is performed. (Step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S44, a value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register WCL in this order.

After step S46, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S48). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off, power failure or momentary power failure, when the voltage becomes below the power failure notice voltage, a power failure notice signal is issued as a power failure notice. is input from The determination in step S48 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

If there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S48, a non-hit/fall random number update process is performed (step S50). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big win symbol initial value determination random number, small winning symbol initial value determination random number, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination) are updated. Incidentally, the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number, normal symbol variation display pattern random number, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S50, the process returns to step S46 to set the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. In step S48, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. For example, non-win-lose random number update processing is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeatedly performed. The processing of steps S46 to S50 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S48, interrupt prohibition is set (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM and protecting the game information from being rewritten.

Following step S52, starter solenoid 2105, attacker solenoid 2108, upper special symbol indicator 1185, lower special symbol indicator 1186, upper special symbol storage indicator 1184, lower special symbol storage indicator 1187 shown in FIG. , normal symbol display device 1189, normal symbol memory display device 1188, game state display device 1183, round display device 1190, etc. are stopped (step S54).

Following step S54, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S56). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

Following step S56, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to 1 (step S58). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S58, clear setting of the watchdog timer is performed (step S60). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, as described above.

After step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the value A, value B, and value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and thereafter the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on process again. The processing of steps S52 to S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

The pachinko game machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and after the power is restored, main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

[13-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed for each interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 123 and 124 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the value B to the watchdog timer clear register WCL as shown in FIG. 125 (step S70). At this time, in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the value B is set following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing).

After step S70, the interrupt flag is cleared (step S72). The interrupt period is initialized by clearing the interrupt flag, and the next interrupt period is counted from the initial value.

After step S72, switch input processing is performed (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I/O port 4100b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, detection signals from general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 shown in FIG. 2103 A detection signal from the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 97 for detecting a game ball entered, and an upper starting hole switch shown in FIG. 97 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting hole 2101 shown in FIG. A detection signal from 3022, a detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 97 for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 97 for detecting game balls, a detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting cheating using a magnet shown in FIG. A payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 indicating that the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 97 has normally received the prize ball command is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area. In addition, the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 that detects the game ball that entered the upper start port 2101, the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 that detects the game ball that entered the lower start port 2102 are read. 121 corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the upper starter switch 3022, the corresponding starter winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the lower starter switch 2109, A starting entry winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning gate switches 3020 and 3020 that detect the game balls that have entered the general winning gates 2104 and 2201, and the count switch 2110 that detects the game balls that have entered the big winning gate 2103 A detection signal from, a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, a detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102 , and the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate section 2350 are read first when this switch input processing is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has passed, , respectively are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is not the same, it is read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

Thus, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are received from the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Therefore, the reliability of detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 can be improved.

After step S74, timer subtraction processing is performed (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, according to the fluctuation display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process described later, the time when the upper special symbol indicator 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186 are lit, the normal symbol and In addition to the time when the normal symbol indicator 1189 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal electric accessory control process, the payout control board 4110 normally receives various commands sent by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal is input to inform that the receiver has received the ACK signal. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S76, win-lose random number update processing is performed (step S78). In this win/lose random number update process, the above-described random number for judging a big win, random number for a big win design, and random number for a small win design are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-hitting random number update process of step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol is also updated. These big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers and small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the random number for judging a big hit, the random number for a big hit pattern, and the random number for a small hit pattern are random numbers related to the judgment of winning (big hit judgment), each counter is updated only each time this random number update process is performed. counts up. For example, the counter that updates the random number for judging a big hit is, as described above, an initial value update type counter that has a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the minimum value is 32767) as a value from 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for judging a big win is counted up to the maximum value (value 32767), and then the random number for determining the initial value for judging a big hit is counted up from the minimum value (value 0). When the counter for updating the random number for judging a big win finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for judging a big win, the random number for determining the initial value for judging a big win is updated by the random number updating process. The random number for determining the initial value for judging a big win can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a big win. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win/lose random number update process. The normal symbol hit determination random number and the like are the same as the above-described method for updating the big hit determination random number, and the description thereof is omitted.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the big hit, the random number for determining the initial value for the big winning symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing), and the win-lose random number update process of step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. If the number of executions of the non-hit-lose random number update process in step S50 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs due to unevenness in the processing time , the random number for determining the initial value for determining the big hit, the random number for determining the initial value for the big winning symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol may be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S50.

Following step S78, prize ball control processing is performed (step S80). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a prize ball command shown in FIG. A self-check command shown in FIG. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 4110 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 2103 shown in FIG. 95, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as prize balls is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110, or this prize ball command is generated. When the payout control board 4110 does not receive a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 4110 has normally received the payout control board 4110 within a predetermined time, a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is created. and transmit it to the payout control board 4110.

After step S80, frame command reception processing is performed (step S82). The payout control board 4110 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) divided into state displays shown in FIG. In the frame command reception process of step S82, when these various commands are normally received as the payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 4110 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. . In addition, the command normally received as the payer serial data is formatted into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified by status display in FIG. 121 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame State 2 command)) is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S82, fraud detection processing is performed (step S84). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding prize balls is checked. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is input when the game is not in the jackpot game state (when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2103), etc. 121 is created as an abnormal state, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S84, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is performed (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric role product control process, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned big hit determination random number is taken out and it is determined whether or not it matches the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (big hit It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter for updating the random number for the big hit pattern is taken out and used as the probability variable hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It determines whether or not they match (determines whether or not to generate probability variation). Here, "probability change" means that the probability of winning a big hit changes to a high probability (probability variable time) set higher than the normal time (low probability). In this embodiment, as the range of the above-described jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range), a value of 32668 to a value of 32767 is set for a low probability. ~ value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation time determination table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S86, whether or not the value of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number and the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. When judging whether or not, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for updating the big-hit judging random number is included in the big-hit judging range.

If these determination results are due to the upper starting port switch 3022, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. In FIG. 120, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the upper special symbol indicator 1185 or The output of the lighting signal to the upper special design indicator 1185 or the lower special design indicator 1186 is set so as to light up the lower special design indicator 1186, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands classified as related to the big win shown in FIG. Closed display command, big winning opening 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or the opening and closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 95 is opened and closed. The drive signal output to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round display lamp 1190a of the round indicator 1190 shown in 91 is set so as to light the 2nd round display lamp 1190a, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area. In some cases, the output of the lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp 1190b of the round indicator 1190 shown in 89 is set so as to light up the 15th round indicator lamp 1190b, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, or the probability fluctuation The output of a lighting signal to the gaming state display 1183 is set so that the presence or absence of occurrence of is lit in a predetermined color, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S86, a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process is performed (step S88). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the result of this determination, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is extracted as gate information, and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted. memorize to

This gate information storage area has 0th to 3rd divisions (four divisions), and the gate information is stored in the order of the 0th division, the 1st division, the 2nd division, and the 3rd division. It's like For example, if the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, and the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information in the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes a free area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first and second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information so that the total number of the stored gate information is used as a holding ball and the normal symbol storage display 1188 is lit. Based on this, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol memory display 1188 is set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining per normal symbol is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece 2106 is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is to be performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 are expanded in the left-right direction so that the game ball can be received into the lower start opening 2102, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state. This decision and the corresponding normal symbol variation display pattern are determined based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, and various commands classified into normal symbol synchronization effects shown in FIG. 120 are created and sent as transmission information. While storing in the transmission information storage area described above, set the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 so as to light the normal symbol display 1189 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and set the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 as the output information Store in the output information storage area. In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role effect shown in FIG. is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the movable piece 2106, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the value of the taken-out normal symbol per determination random number does not match the normal symbol per determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol is based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random number. Determine the variable display pattern, create various commands classified into the normal pattern synchronization production related shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal design indicator 1189 is set so as to light the normal design indicator 1189, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S88, port output processing is performed (step S90). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area from the output terminal of the main control I/O port 4100b, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 4110 have been successfully received, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 4110, or the jackpot game In the state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2108 for opening and closing the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2103, and a drive signal is output to the starting solenoid 2105 for opening and closing the movable piece 2106. , 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, information output information during time saving, start winning prize information output signal, etc. Various information (game information) signals regarding the game are output to the payout control board 4110 .

Following step S90, peripheral control board command transmission processing is performed (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, shown in FIG. Commands, various commands classified as related to jackpots, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general pattern synchronization effects, various commands classified as normal electric role effects, as shown in FIG. Various commands classified into notification display, various commands classified into status display, various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into others are stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Following step S92, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

After step S94, the register is switched (restored) (step S96), and this routine ends. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a stacks the contents of the general-purpose register on the stack and saves it. This prevents destruction of the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main processing on the main control side. In step S96, the contents saved in the stack are read and written to the original register. It should be noted that the main control MPU 4100a sets interrupt permission after returning in step S96.

[14. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 98 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 144. FIG. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. 126, and FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process, FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing an example of a ball removal switch operation determination process, and FIG. 131 is a rotation 132 is a flow chart showing an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process; FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing an example of a ball stick determination process; FIG. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing an example of processing for adding stock number of prize balls for rental, FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing an example of processing for monitoring stock, 137 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout ball removal determination setting process, FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout setting process, FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing an example of the ball removal setting process, and FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing an example of a retry action monitoring process, FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process, and FIG. 143 is an error release. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing an example of switch operation determination processing, and FIG. 144 is a timing chart showing signal processing (a) during payout operation by lending a ball and input signal confirmation processing (b) from the CR unit.

First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be explained, followed by payout control unit timer interrupt processing, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball bite determination processing, award Ball stock number addition processing, rental ball stock number addition processing, stock monitoring processing, payout ball withdrawal determination setting processing, payout setting processing, ball catch operation setting processing, ball withdrawal setting processing, retry operation monitoring processing , inconsistency counter reset determination processing, and error cancellation switch operation determination processing will be described. In addition, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball catching determination processing, prize ball stock number addition processing, rental ball stock number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball removal determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the mismatch counter reset determination process, and the error cancellation switch operation determination process are part of the main operation setting process in step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. , ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball jam determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, mismatch counter reset determination processing, error release switch operation determination processing, The priority is set in the order of prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls, prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring processing, and payout ball removal determination setting processing.

[14-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 performs the payout control unit power-on processing as shown in FIGS. When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU 4120a. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority.

Following step S500, input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) is performed (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, the input/output setting of the I/O port of the payout control MPU 4120a is performed.

Following step S502, output of a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b shown in FIG. 107 is started (step S504). The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is composed of a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop IC. The voltage comparison circuit compares +24V with the reference voltage or compares +12V with the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison results. The result of this comparison is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, with logic HI when no power failure or momentary power failure has occurred. Its logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. In step S504, output of a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, is started. This blackout clear signal is input to the clear terminal via the payout control I/O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 with its logic set to LOW. As a result, the payout control MPU 4120a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, and until the latched state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. It is possible to invert and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and to monitor the signal from the 1Q terminal.

After step S504, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S506), and it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs (phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops and when it becomes smaller than the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input as a power failure forecast from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized. ms) is set. It is determined in step S508 whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. This determination is made based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, as the power failure warning signal.

Following step S508, output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, is stopped (step S510). By stopping the output of this power failure clear signal, the logic becomes HI through the payout control I/O port 4120b, and is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal. As a result, the payout control MPU 4120a can set the D-type flip-flop PIC22 to the latch state. When the D-type flip-flop PIC22 latches the state in which the PR terminal, which is its preset terminal, is input with logic LOW, it outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is its output terminal.

Following step S510, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e has been operated (step S512). This determination is made depending on whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, and when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated.

When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated in step S512, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 1 (step S514). A RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") built in the payout control MPU 4120a. For example, various flags and various information storage areas. Various information stored in the prize ball information storage area (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and stored in the CR communication information storage area PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set) is to be erased. are set to the value 0 when not cleared. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

Following step S514 or step S516, a setting is made to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting enables access to the payout control built-in RAM, and enables writing (storage) or reading of payout information, for example.

Following step S518, a stack pointer is set (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a temporary return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, it is determined whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S524). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S524, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the later-described payout control unit power-off process (power-off) (step S526). . If they match, it is determined whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in payout control unit power failure processing described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power failure processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power failure processing is not completed normally.

When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power failure processing is normally terminated, the work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as power recovery (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the ROM built in the payout control MPU 4120a (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") Reads the information at the time of power recovery, and this The power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage area (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area) Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area, in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of mismatch counter reset determination time, etc., stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "recovery of power" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, but also the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is erased, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in S528, that is, when the payout control unit power failure processing is not normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532 ). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the working area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, interrupt initialization is performed (step S536). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 1.75 ms.

After step S536, interrupt permission setting is performed (step S538). Due to this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 1.75 ms.

After step S538, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no power failure warning signal input in step S540, it is determined whether or not the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). This 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for timing 1.75 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 1.75 ms, which will be described later. Each is set to a value of 0 when 75 ms has not elapsed.

When the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 1.75 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input.

On the other hand, when the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S542, that is, when 1.75 ms has elapsed, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to 0 (step S544), and the external watchdog An external WDT clear signal is output to the timer (external WDT) 4120c (turned ON, step S546). This external WDT 4120c monitors the operation (system) of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I/O port 4120b when the external WDT clear signal is not stopped during the clear signal release time. (It is periodically diagnosed whether the system of the payout control MPU 4120a is out of control).

Following step S546, port output processing is performed (step S548). In this port output process, various kinds of information are read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payout motor 744, payout motor 744, payout motor 744, and payout motor 744 Various information such as drive information for controlling the drive to the payout motor 744, information on the number of balls actually paid out game balls, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 860c are stored. Based on the output information, when various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or the payout motor 744 or output the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 to the external terminal plate 784 as a winning ball number information signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 744 is actually 10 A winning ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 784 each time a game ball is paid out.), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator 860c.

Following step S548, port input processing is performed (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal of the error cancellation switch 860a, the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the detection signal from the counter switch 751, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal. , the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that informs that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, respectively, and stores them in the input information storage area as input information. .

After step S550, timer update processing is performed (step S552). In this timer update process, when it is determined whether or not the ball is caught by the payout rotor 748 shown in FIG. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination is not performed, the ball removal determination set when discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. time, full tank judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 by the detection signal from the switch 750 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the balls are set as the determination condition. In addition to time management such as determination time, the number of game balls received by the recess 748a of the payout rotator 748 and paid out and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 751 do not match each other. When determining whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not unmatched game balls are repeatedly put out, the judgment condition and the set inconsistency counter reset judgment time. time management. For example, when the ball sticking determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 1.75 ms, so the ball sticking determination time is subtracted by 1.75 ms each time this timer update process is performed. , and the result of subtraction becomes 0, so that the ball sway determination time is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball empty determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, the dead ball determination time is set to 119 ms, and the mismatch counter reset determination time is set to 7000 seconds (about 2 hours). Each time this timer update process is performed, the ball empty determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball exhausted determination time, and the mismatch counter reset determination time are subtracted by 1.75 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0. Accurately measures the time to determine whether the ball is empty, the time to determine whether the tank is full, the time to determine whether the ball is out, or the time to determine whether the mismatch counter is reset. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control.

Following step S552, CR communication processing is performed (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit 6, the payout control MPU 4120a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout such as PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the signal is set. By this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. just before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is executed and the payout operation cannot be continued due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the payout operation can be continued when power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 just enough. In other words, the payout control MPU 4120a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 in the CR communication process, and when game balls are being paid out to the upper tray 301 or the lower tray 302, momentary power failure or power outage causes CR Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the game ball payout cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the mismatch counter INCC at the time of power restoration. etc. are stored as payout backup information, and are restored to values such as prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before momentary power failure or power failure. , the exchange of various signals between the pachinko game machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before an instantaneous power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration, and the payout of game balls can be continued. It is possible. In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stop when the power is restored even if the momentary power failure or stop occurs. , and various signals from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 do not change due to the influence of an instantaneous power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 can be enhanced. Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to, for example, the logic state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible, the PRDY signal is put out and controlled. Output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the I/O port 4120b. Then, in, for example, a retry operation monitoring process that is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information to determine whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. It is determined that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball removal determination setting process, As a setting of the error state output to the CR unit 6, for example, the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal, which indicates that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible when the communication with the CR unit 6 is not in progress, is set to PRDY. It is set in the signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after the power is restored, and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b. Output to CR unit 6. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored when the power is restored. At an early stage, it is possible to output a PRDY signal to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, and the CR unit 6 receives the prize. It is possible to inform that the game ball payout operation by the ball device 740 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the CR unit 6 from outputting BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored. In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and when the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, it is possible to pay out the rented balls. In order to notify that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are not electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the rented balls are paid out. In order to notify that the payout operation for the purpose is impossible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW and output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b. It should be noted that the logic state of the EXS signal that informs the start or end of one payout operation is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and the payout control board 4110 and A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed (step S556). In this full-tank and out-of-ball check process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, the storage space 546 of the above-described foul cover unit 540 is stored by a detection signal from the full-tank switch 550. It is determined whether or not the tank is full of game balls, and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is a predetermined number or more according to the detection signal from the ball out switch 750. It is determined whether or not it is. For example, the determination of whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of stored game balls is made by using the timer interrupt period of 1.75 ms in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing. When the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF in the previous (1.75 ms ago) full tank and bulb out check process, that is, the detection from the full tank switch 550 When the signal transitions from OFF to ON, timing of the above-described full-tank determination time (504 ms) is started in the timer updating process of step S552. When the full-tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full-tank determination time comes, the full-tank and ball-out check process determines whether the detection signal from the full-tank switch 550 is ON. determine whether In this determination, when the detection signal from the full-tank switch 550 is ON, it is determined that the housing space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of game balls, and the above-mentioned state information is the full-tank information to convey that effect. Store in storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full-tank switch 550 is OFF, the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is not full with the game balls stored, and full-tank information is stored in the state information storage area to notify that effect. do.

Judgment whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also performed by using the timer interrupt cycle of 1.75 ms to check for the current full tank and out of balls. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is ON in the processing, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch is OFF in the previous (1.75ms ago) full tank and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection from the ball-out switch 750 When the signal transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process of step S552 starts counting the above-described dead ball determination time (119 ms). And when the ball out determination time becomes the value 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball out determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the ball out switch 750 is ON in this full tank and ball out check process determine whether In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball-out switch 750 is ON, the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize-ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball-out information to that effect is generated. While storing in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut-off switch 750 is OFF, the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not a predetermined number or more, and that fact is notified. The dead ball information is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, command reception processing is performed (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (prize ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 119) are received. When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 (abnormalities occur in various command signals). The information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, command analysis processing is performed (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, main operation setting processing is performed (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, rental balls, ball extraction and ball catching are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (stock number of prize balls) is monitored. do.

Following step S562, LED display data creation processing is performed (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860c of the payout control board 4110 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-described output information storage area. Remember. For example, the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, and based on the out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the winning ball device 740 is less than a predetermined number, a corresponding display is made. Data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created, and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, command transmission processing is performed (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read out from the above-described state information storage area, and based on the various types of information, various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame State 2 command) is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100 . For example, when the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the winning ball device 740 is less than a predetermined number, the frame state 1 command is issued. is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100 .

Following step S566, output of the external WDT clear signal to the external watchdog timer (external WDT) 4120c is stopped (turned off, step S568). As a result, the external WDT 4120c is cleared, and the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I/O port 4120b are not reset. Further, when the output of the external WDT clear signal is stopped, the external WDT 4120c starts counting the clear signal release time.

After step S568, the process returns to step S540 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. When the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, when 1.75 ms has elapsed, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to 0 in step S544. , an external WDT clear signal is output (ON) to the external WDT 4120c in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, timer update processing is performed in step S552, and CR communication is performed in step S554. In step S556, full tank and out of bulb check processing is performed, command reception processing is performed in step S558, command analysis processing is performed in step S560, main operation setting processing is performed in step S562, and LED display is performed in step S564. Data generation processing is performed, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, output of the external WDT clear signal to the external WDT 4120c is stopped (OFF) in step S568, and steps S540 to S568 are repeatedly performed. The processing of steps S540 to S568 is referred to as "payout control section main processing".

Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 4100, the processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 4120a fluctuates. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 4120a preferentially outputs to the main control board 4100 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 have been normally received. there is Thereby, the payout control MPU 4120a secures the processing time so as to sufficiently perform other fluctuating processing.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S540, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). Due to this setting, the later-described payout control section timer interrupt processing is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM and protecting the rewriting of the payout information described above. Following step S570, a power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 of the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, via the payout control I/O port 4120b (step S572). As a result, the D-type flip-flop PIC22 can release the latched state by outputting the power failure clear signal. After step S572, the output of the driving signal to the payout motor 744 is stopped (step S574). As a result, the payout of game balls is stopped. Following step S574, an external WDT clear signal is output to the external WDT 4120c to stop the output (ON/OFF, step S576). This clears the external WDT 4120c. Following step S576, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, as numerical values. Following step S578, the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information. Following step S580, access prohibition setting to RAM with built-in payout control is performed (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected. After step S582, an infinite loop is entered. This infinite loop does not turn ON/OFF the clear signal to the external WDT 4120c. Therefore, the external WDT 4120c resets by outputting a reset signal to the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I/O port 4120b. After that, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout control unit power-on processing again. Incidentally, the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power failure processing".

The pachinko game machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and the payout control unit power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, it is checked whether or not the payout control unit power failure processing has been completed normally. are inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information has been stored by fraud.

[14-2. Dispensing Control Unit Timer Interrupt Processing]
Next, the payout control section timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (1.75 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register, as shown in FIG. (Step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of general-purpose registers used in the payout control unit main processing.

Following step S590, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to 1 (step S592). This 1.75 elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 1.75 ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 1.75 ms, and has a value of 1, 1 when 1.75 ms has elapsed. Each is set to the value 0 when .75 ms has not elapsed. After step S592, the register is switched (restored) (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing. Following step S594, interrupt permission is set (step S596), and this routine ends.

[14-3. Ball removal switch operation determination processing]
Next, the ball removal switch operation determination processing will be described. In this ball removal switch operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the ball removal switch 860b shown in FIG. 98 is operated.

When the ball removal switch operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the ball removal switch 860b is operated as shown in FIG. 130 (step S600). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the ball extraction switch 860b in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S600, the input information is read from the input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b. When the input information includes a detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b, it is determined that the ball removal switch 860b has been operated. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b in the input information, it is determined that the ball removal switch 860b has not been operated.

When the ball removal switch 860b is operated in step S600, the value 1 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG (step S602). This ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. , are set to 0 when no game balls are discharged.

Following step S602, the above-described ball removal determination time is set to valid (step S604), and this routine ends. When this ball removal determination time becomes effective, the ball removal determination time is decremented in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

On the other hand, if the ball removal switch 860b has not been operated in step S600, this routine ends. It should be noted that the ball removal flag RMV-FLG set in step S602 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU4120a.

[14-4. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, the rotation angle switch history creating process will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation process, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 98 is created.

When the rotation angle switch history creation process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the payout control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. (Step S610). This rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). It has a storage capacity, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is stored in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST. In step S610, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

After step S610, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, the input information is read out from the input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752. When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the detection slit 749a for grasping the rotational position of the payout rotor 748 shown in FIG. It is determined that the transition state has occurred. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, it is determined that the detection slit 749a has shifted the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

When the detection slit 749a has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state of the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 in step S612, shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information is performed (step S614). In this shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is shifted to the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2. , B2.rarw.B1, B1.rarw.least significant bit B0, and so on.

Following step S614, the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is set to 1 (step S616), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when the detection slit 749a has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state of the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 in step S612, shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information is performed (step S618). In this shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information in step S614 is performed. B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0. do.

Following step S618, the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is set to 0 (step S620), and this routine ends.

In this manner, each time the rotation angle switch history creation process is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit 749a is The value of the least significant bit B0 is changed according to the state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is switched from the blocking state to the non-blocking state or the state in which the detection slit 749a transits the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since 1 or a value of 0 is set, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 can be created.

[14-5. Sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip processing skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 70 is at a fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It should be noted that the determination of the fixed position of the payout rotator 748 is also performed when the payout of game balls by the prize ball device 740 is completed. As a result, the rotation of the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 can be reliably started in a state in which the balls are not entangled.

When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. is determined (step S630). This fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed position determination of the payout rotator 748 is performed. When determining the fixed position of the payout rotator 748 (when not skipping), the value is set to 0 respectively.

When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 in step S630 (not skipped), that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotator 748 is performed, rotation is performed from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. The angular switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the home position determination value (step S634). This fixed-position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit). Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have a value of 1, the above-described detection slit 749a continuously emits light from the rotation angle switch 752 at four timer interrupt cycles. This means that the axis has transitioned from the blocked state to the non-blocked state. When the timer interrupt cycle occurs four times, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 98 rotates four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotor 748 of the rotation detection plate 749 via the first gear 745, the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 shown in FIG. Since the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 have play (backlash), the payout rotor 748 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. Since the rotation of the payout rotor 748 is designed to correspond to about two steps of rotation of the payout motor 744, in this embodiment, when determining the fixed position of the payout rotor 748, The history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation angle switch history creation process shown in FIG. 131, and the lower 4 of the created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST Bits B3 to B0, that is, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 due to the generation of the latest four timer interrupt cycles. As a result, since the payout motor 744 rotates four steps in four timer interrupt cycles, it rotates more than the payout rotator 748 rotates due to the backlash, and the rotation of the payout rotator 748 due to the backlash is absorbed. can do. Therefore, erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotator 748 due to backlash can be prevented, so that the rotational position of the payout rotator 748 can be correctly controlled by the rotational position of the payout motor 744 . In this embodiment, the period of four timer interrupts is 7 ms (=1.75 ms×4 times), which is set as the backlash absorption time.

In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S632 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, a fixed position determination skip flag is generated. SKP-FLG is set to 1 (step S636). Thereby, it is possible to set so as not to perform (skip) the determination of the fixed position of the payout rotating body 748 . The payout control MPU 4120a sets the rotational position of the payout rotator 748 to the fixed position of the payout rotator 748 in step S636.

After step S636, the skip determination time is set to valid (step S638), and this routine ends. Here, as shown in FIG. 71, the number of detection slits 749a is three, which is the same as the number of recesses 748a of the payout rotor 748, and the outer circumference of the rotation detection plate 749 is equally divided (every 120 degrees). there is Also, the rotation of the payout motor 744 becomes the rotation of the payout rotor 748 of the rotation detection plate 749 via the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747, as described above. In this embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits 749a (120 degrees) of the rotation detection plate 749 (dispensing rotator 748) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the dispensing motor 744 in 18 steps.

The payout control MPU 4120 a manages the rotational position of the payout rotor 748 based on the number of steps of the payout motor 744 . Specifically, (1) a transient state in which the detection slit 749a transitions from the blocking state to the non-blocking state of the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 (referred to as an “edge detection state”), and (2) the detection slit 749a (3) a state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is switched from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as a “fixed position fixed state”); It is managed in three states, ie, a transition state (“fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 744, the fixed position determination state (2) corresponds to four steps of rotation of the payout motor 744, and the fixed position determination skip state (3). corresponds to 13 steps of rotation of the payout motor 744, and a total of 18 steps of rotation controls the rotational position between the detection slits 749a of the rotation detection plate 749 (120 degrees), that is, the rotational position of the payout rotator 748. .

In the fixed position determination skip state (3), the detection slit 749a is in a state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is shifted from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. time is set. As described above, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 1.75 ms, so the skip determination time is 22.75 ms (=1.75 ms×13 steps).

By enabling the skip determination time in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 4120a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, sets the initial value 0 to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG.

On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S630 (when skipping), that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotor 748 is not performed, or in step S634, step If the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in S632 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, this routine ends. It should be noted that the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU4120a.

The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. led to. When game balls rub against each other and become charged, they generate static electricity and generate noise. For this reason, the prize ball device 740 is under the influence of noise and under the file environment. A rotation angle switch 752 is provided on the rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. Cheap. In addition, the wiring (harness) connecting between the payout control board 4110 and the prize ball case inner board 754 in the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. Cheap.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state of (3) described above, that is, the detection slit 749a changes from the non-blocking state to the blocking state of the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752. , the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed. As a result, the accuracy of determining the fixed position of the payout rotating body 748 is enhanced. As described above, the period and period necessary for detecting the fixed position of the dispensing rotator 748 can be calculated in advance, so that the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[14-6. Sphere Determination Processing]
Next, a description will be given of the ball sway determination process. In this ball entanglement determination process, it is determined whether or not a ball entanglement state due to the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 70 has occurred.

133, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 acquires the rotation angle from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

After step S640, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S642). This determination is to determine whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the home position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, as described above, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value is 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are 1. In step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the detection slit 749a rotates. Assuming that the optical axis of the angle switch 752 has changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, ie, the state in which the payout rotor 748 is rotating and the state in which the ball is not caught, this routine ends.

On the other hand, in step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the ball is caught. A middle flag PBE-FLG is set to 1 (step S644). This ball catching flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is being caught by the payout rotor 748. When the payout motor 744 is performing a ball catching operation, the value is 1, and the ball is caught. Each is set to a value of 0 when no operation is being performed.

Following step S644, the ball sway determination time is set to valid (step S646), and this routine ends. When this ball-sticking determination time becomes effective, the ball-sticking determination time is decremented in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. .

[14-7. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processing includes prize ball stock number addition processing and prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later. be. First, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In this embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be performed preferentially. After the game balls are paid out by the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70, it is set so as to carry out the prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls.

[14-7-1. Prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not there is a prize ball command as shown in FIG. 134 (step S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the received command information is read out from the received command information storage area to determine whether or not it is a prize ball command.

When the received command information is not a prize ball command at step S650, this routine is terminated as it is. Read from the number information table (step S652). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table in which the prize ball commands and the number of prize balls PBV are associated and stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM.

Following step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). This prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the prize ball device 740, that is, the number of balls that have not been paid out, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in this embodiment. ing. As a result, the prize ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the prize ball information storage area.

The number of prize balls PBV read out in step S652 is added to the number of prize balls in stock PBS read out in step S654 (step S656), and this routine ends. After the addition in step S656, the winning ball command read out in step S650 is erased from the received command information storage area.

[14-7-2. Addition processing of stock number of prize balls for rental]
Next, the processing for adding the stock number of prize balls for rental will be described. When this processing for adding the stock number of prize balls for lending is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not there is a ball lending request signal, as shown in FIG. (Step S660). This determination is performed based on the ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball rental request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the input information is read out from the input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a ball rental request signal.

When there is no ball lending request signal at step S660, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a ball lending request signal at step S660, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. (Step S662), the number of rental balls RBV is added to the prize ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine ends. The number of rental balls RBV is a fixed value, and is pre-stored in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, a value of 25 is set as the number of rental balls RBV. After addition in step S664, the ball rental request signal read out in step S660 is erased from the input information storage area. In addition, in the present embodiment, since prize balls are given priority (distinguishably managed between prize balls and rental balls), even when there is a ball rental request signal, the ball rental request signal is held. , Rental balls will be paid out upon completion of the payout of prize balls. Therefore, in this embodiment, the rental balls are paid out after the prize ball stock number PBS becomes zero.

[14-8. Stock monitoring process]
Next, stock monitoring processing will be described. This stock monitoring process is carried out to determine whether the player continues the game while the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. This is the process to monitor.

When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. Read (step S670), and determine whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is greater than or equal to the caution threshold TH (step S672). The caution threshold TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, a value of 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to 1 (step S674), and this routine ends. This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player starts stocking game balls in the housing space 546 of the foul cover unit 540, and the number of unpaid game balls (the number of prize balls stocked above) is equal to or greater than the caution threshold value TH. It is set to a value of 1 when reaching the caution threshold TH or more, and set to a value of 0 when not reaching the caution threshold TH or more.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to 0 (step S676), and this routine ends.

When the game state becomes a big win and the player is relaxing and watching the performance unfolding on the liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. In some cases, the played game ball is not removed from the lower plate 302 by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354 shown in FIG. If the game is continued in this state, the lower tray 302 is filled with game balls, and the game balls begin to accumulate in the housing space 546 of the foul cover unit 540.例文帳に追加When the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases and becomes equal to or higher than the caution threshold TH, and the caution effect shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 blink. By this flashing, for example, it is possible to inform the store clerk of the hall that he/she should be careful of the player's game. As a result, the hall clerk can tell the player to remove the game balls from the lower tray 302, and the player fills the lower tray 302 (accommodating space 546 of the foul cover unit 540) with game balls. It is possible to prevent continuation of the game with

In this embodiment, the caution threshold TH is set to a value of 50, which is approximately one-fifth of the upper limit of 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to inform the hall clerk that the player should pay attention to the game at the earliest possible stage.

[14-9. Outgoing Ball Removal Judgment Setting Process]
Next, the payout ball withdrawal determination setting process will be described. In this payout ball removal determination setting process, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. And the game balls stored in the tank rail 731 are discharged from the pachinko game machine 1, or the ball is caught, or the game balls are not discharged or discharged. .

When the payout ball removal determination setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. The square switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S680).

After step S680, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 70 (step S682). This determination is to determine whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the home position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, as described above, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value is 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are 1. In step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, a retry error flag RTERR- It is determined whether FLG is 1 (step S684). This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation, which will be described later, is operating abnormally. are set to the value 0 respectively when the operation is working normally).

In step S682, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, or in step S684 , when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, when the retry operation is not abnormally performed, it is determined whether or not the ball catching flag PBE-FLG is 1 ( step S686). This ball catching flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball catching state by the payout rotor 748 is occurring. Each is set to a value of 0 when no operation is being performed.

In step S686, when the ball-switching flag PEB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when the ball-switching operation is not performed, the prize ball stock is stored from the prize ball information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The number PBS is read (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is greater than 0 (step S690). This determination determines whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 744 .

When the prize ball stock number PBS is greater than the value 0 in step S690, that is, when there are unpaid balls, is the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 48 filled with stored game balls? It is determined whether or not (step S692). This determination is performed based on the full-tank information stored in the full-tank and out-of-ball check processing of step S556 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the aforementioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S692, the full tank information is read out from the state information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of stored game balls.

When the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is not full of stored game balls in step S692, a later-described payout setting process is performed (step S694), and this routine ends. In this payout setting process, a payout operation of putting out game balls to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 is performed.

On the other hand, when the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of stored game balls in step S692, this routine ends as it is. In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with stored game balls, the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped. When prize balls are generated while the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped, the number of balls not paid out by the payout motor 744 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition processing shown in FIG. will increase over time.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is not greater than the value 0 (the value is 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball number, it is determined whether or not the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is the value 1. (step S696). This ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are to be discharged. are set to the value 0 respectively. The determination of step S696 is made based on the determination result of step S600 in the ball removal switch operation determination process shown in FIG. That is, when an operation signal (detection signal) is input from the ball removal switch 860b shown in FIG. 98, the value 1 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG in step S602 in the ball removal switch operation determination processing.

When the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is 1 in step S696, that is, when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are discharged, the ball removal setting process described later is performed (step S698), Exit this routine. In this ball removal setting process, a ball removal operation for discharging game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 is performed.

Thus, when the ball removal switch 860b is operated after the power is turned on, the ball removal setting process is performed in step S698 of the payout ball removal determination setting process, and the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are executed. can be discharged. When this ejection is finished, the value 0 is set to the ball extraction flag RMV-FLG.

On the other hand, when the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in step S696, that is, when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are not discharged, this routine is finished as it is. . As a result, game balls are not paid out or discharged.

On the other hand, when the ball catching flag PBE-FLG is 1 in step S686, that is, when the ball catching motion is being performed, a ball catching motion setting process, which will be described later, is performed (step S700), and this routine ends. In this ball catching operation setting process, a ball catching operation to eliminate the ball catching state by the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is performed.

On the other hand, in step S684, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step S702). . In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

Following step S702, an error status output to CR unit 6 is set (step S704), and this routine ends. In step S704, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball cannot be rented, the payout control MPU 4120a, when not in communication with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, In other words, when the PRDY signal is held at a falling edge, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the fallen state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Remember. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 128, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read by the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. do. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. is set as the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on processing in FIG. 128, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM The EXS signal output setting information read by the lever, that is, the logic-maintained EXS signal is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Note that "maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held after falling), the logic LOW is maintained, and when the logic of the EXS signal is HI. One is to maintain its logic HI when (the EXS signal is held rising).

[14-9-1. Payment setting processing]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. This payout setting process is a process of setting to drive the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 70 to pay out game balls.

When the payout setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the drive command number DRV from the payout control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. 138 (step S710). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be put out by the payout motor 744, and has the same value as the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read out from the prize ball information storage area.

After step S710, it is determined whether or not the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). This determination determines whether or not the number of game balls to be put out by the payout motor 744 remains, based on the drive command number DRV.

When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 is zero, output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set ( step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

Following step S714, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and the actual ball count PB is read (step S718). This actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 . Although the detailed description will be given later, this count is performed by the count switch 751 shown in FIG. Based on the detection signal. The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the actual ball count PB is read out from the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S718, a value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB read out in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read out in step S716 is set to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV (step S720), The real ball count PB is set to 0 (step S722), and this routine ends. When the drive command number DRV and the real ball count PB are 0, at step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read at step S716 is set as the drive command number DRV as it is.

On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S724, the value 1 is subtracted from the drive command number DRV (decremented, step S726), and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counter switch 751 (step S728). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the input information is read from the input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counter switch 751. FIG.

When there is a detection signal from the count switch 751 in step S728, the actual ball count PB is incremented by 1 (step S730), and this routine ends. By incrementing the real ball count PB in step S730, the real ball count PB is counted up.

On the other hand, if there is no detection signal from the counter switch 751 in step S728, this routine is terminated. In this way, the payout control MPU 4120a decrements the drive command number DRV in step S726, and when there is no detection signal from the count switch 751 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the real ball count PB is not incremented. determines that one game ball could not be paid out because the game ball was not received by the concave portion 748a of the payout rotator 748 shown in FIG. Therefore, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the drive command number DRV to a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS in the above-described step S720 in order to pay out the ball that should have been paid out again. As a result, when there is no detection signal from the count switch 751 in the judgment of step S728, that is, when the real ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1, which is the one ball to be paid out, can be included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, since the value 1, which is the one ball to be paid out, can be rounded into the prize ball stock number PBS, a retry operation can be performed to put out the one ball to be paid out again. By performing this retry operation, it is possible to extremely reduce the risk of the game balls not being paid out to the player, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the non-paying out of the game balls.

[14-9-2. Ball removal setting process]
Next, the ball removal setting process will be described. In this ball removal setting process, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 70 is driven, and the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 69 are discharged. is.

When the ball removal setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 139 (step S740). This determination is performed based on the ball removal determination time updated in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball removal determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the aforementioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S740, the time management information is read out from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed. During the ball removal determination time, the payout motor 744 performs a ball removal operation. This ball extraction operation discharges the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 .

If it is determined in step S740 that the ball removal judgment time has not elapsed, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set so as to perform the ball removal operation (step S742), and this routine ends. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above payout control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the ball removal determination time has elapsed in step S740, the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set so as to end the ball removal operation (step S744). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S744, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is set to 0 (step S746), and this routine ends. This ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, as described above. A value of 0 is set when no game ball is discharged.

[14-9-3. Spherical movement setting process]
Next, a description will be given of the ball swaying motion setting process. This ball catching operation setting process is a process of setting to eliminate the ball catching state by the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG.

140, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the ball sticking determination time has elapsed (step S750). This determination is performed based on the ball sway determination time subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball-sticking determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S750, the time management information is read out from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball sway determination time has elapsed.

When it is determined in step S750 that the ball-sticking determination time has not elapsed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S752).

After step S752, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S754). This determination is to determine whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the home position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, as described above, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value is 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are 1. In step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, a ball-squeezing operation is performed. The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set to perform (step S756), and this routine is terminated. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above payout control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout motor 744 is set to stop the drive signal to (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S758, the ball-switching flag PBE-FLG is set to 0 as the end of the ball-switching motion (step S760), and this routine ends. This ball catching flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is being caught by the payout rotor 748. When the payout motor 744 is performing a ball catching operation, the value is 1, and the ball is caught. They are each set to a value of 0 when no gripping motion is performed (end of gripping the ball).

On the other hand, when the ball sticking determination time has elapsed in step S750, the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S762, an error status output to the CR unit 6 is set (step S764). Here, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that it is currently in a state where ball lending is not possible, the payout control MPU 4120a is not in communication with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, When the PRDY signal is held at a falling edge, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the falling state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set as the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. do. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 128, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read by the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. do. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. is set as the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on processing in FIG. 128, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM The EXS signal output setting information read by the lever, that is, the logic-maintained EXS signal is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. As described above, "maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained and the EXS signal is logic HI (the EXS signal is held high), it should remain logic HI.

Following step S764, the ball-switching flag PBE-FLG is set to 0 as the end of the ball-switching operation (step S766), and this routine ends.

[14-10. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, retry operation monitoring processing will be described. This retry operation monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not the retry operation of putting out the game balls that should have been put out is being performed normally.

When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. The detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S770).

After step S770, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S772). This determination is to determine whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the home position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, as described above, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the mismatch counter INCC A value of 1 is added (incremented, step S774). This mismatch counter INCC calculates the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotor 748 shown in FIG. 71 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. Normally, the number of game balls received by the recess 748a of the payout rotator 748 and paid out coincides with the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751, so the value becomes 0. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. The number of balls detected by the count switch 751 and the number of balls detected by the count switch 751 are monitored and judged by an inconsistency counter INCC as to whether or not inconsistent game balls are repeatedly put out. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. At step S774, the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area is incremented.

Following step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. Sometimes, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S776). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the counter switch 751 in the port input process of step S780 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the input information is read out from the input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counter switch 751. FIG.

When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is subtracted by 1 (decremented, step S778).

Following step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, it is determined whether or not the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability of one inconsistent game ball being put out by a retry operation is about one in several millions. A value of 5 is set as the threshold INCTH. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. , information used for this retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. With this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the value of the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration is restored to the value of the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored as the payout backup information. You can do it. As a result, in the determination of step S780, the monitoring of the game ball payout operation (retry operation) by the prize ball device 740, which was performed immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, can be continued from the time of power restoration. ing. Therefore, for example, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold value INCTH in step S780 immediately before an instantaneous power failure or power failure, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally. It can be determined that the game ball payout operation by the device 740 is in a normal state, and that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in a normal state by the determination in step S780 even when the power is restored. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold value INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is abnormal. It can be determined that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state by the determination in step S780 even when the power is restored.

If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH, a "retry error" is indicated. In order to notify, retry error information that displays the number "5" is set on the error LED indicator 860c, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110, and the state information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM (step S782).

Following step S782, a value 0 (initial value 0) is set to the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH, Triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor, it is initialized. The inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the RAM clear switch 4100e mounted on the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 is operated, triggered by the occurrence of this external factor. there is When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as described above, and issues the RAM clear notification command. is output to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, the upper left speaker 262 shown in FIG. 32, and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. It has become.

Following step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 (step S786), and this routine ends. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally. are set to the value 0 respectively when operating normally).

In addition, the payout control MPU 4120a stores the retry error information set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. In the command transmission process of step S566, a retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100, and in the LED display data creation process of step S564 in the same process, the display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860c is created. This information is stored in the output information storage area as LED display information, and based on the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process of step S548 in the same process, a drive signal is output to the error LED indicator 860c. The number "5" is displayed on the LED indicator 860c. The main control board 4100 having received the status command transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. A door frame side lighting blinking command for outputting a lighting signal for causing a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided in the frame to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment) is sent to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. output to cause a plurality of LEDs to emit light in a predetermined color. A hall clerk or the like who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 as described above so that the error LED indicator 860c mounted on the payout control board 4110 displays the number " 5” is displayed, it is possible to confirm that a “retry error” has occurred. As a result, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the hall clerk or the like can confirm the failure of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, poor contact of various connectors, and the like. This can be done very quickly compared to the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display contents of the error LED indicator 860c are not notified.

In addition, by intentionally setting the count switch 751 to a non-operating state, it is difficult to detect the game ball received by the recess 748a of the payout rotator 748 and put out, and the retry operation described above is forced to occur, Even if a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the game balls to be paid out by this retry operation is performed, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC becomes equal to or more than the mismatch threshold value INCTH, various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 , the hall clerk or the like rushes over to check the state of the pachinko game machine 1 . Then, the player who commits the fraudulent act has no choice but to stop the act so as not to be discovered, and cannot continue to acquire illegal game balls by the fraudulent act. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player who commits fraud is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH, that is, five balls. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the damage to the holes caused by intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751 .

Furthermore, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC is set when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. It is designed to be initialized when an internal factor occurs. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is prevented from being initialized when an external factor such as the operation of the error canceling switch 860a shown in FIG. 98 occurs. Therefore, even if the error canceling switch 860a or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a, the mismatch counter INCC will be forcibly initialized by such illegal acts. There is no

[14-11. Mismatch counter reset determination process]
Next, mismatch counter reset processing will be described. In this mismatch counter reset process, the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotor 748 and the number of balls detected by the count switch 751 shown in FIG. This is a process of determining whether or not to reset the calculated inconsistency counter INCC.

When the mismatch counter reset determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. step S790). This determination is performed based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the mismatch counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the aforementioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S790, the time management information is read out from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

If it is determined in step S790 that the mismatch counter reset determination time has not passed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the mismatch counter reset determination time is initialized (step S792). By this initialization, the initial value of 7000 seconds (about 2 hours) is set to the mismatch counter reset determination time.

Following step S792, a value 0 (initial value 0) is set to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S794), and this routine ends. The inconsistency counter INCC, as described above, is for calculating the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotator 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. , and since the number of game balls received by the recess 748a of the payout rotator 748 and paid out matches the number of balls detected by the count switch 751, the value is 0. Become. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. The number of balls detected by the count switch 751 and the number of balls detected by the count switch 751 are monitored and judged by an inconsistency counter INCC as to whether or not inconsistent game balls are repeatedly put out. In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability of one inconsistent game ball being put out by a retry operation is about one in several millions. Here, as described above, the pachinko game machine 1 is composed of the game board 4 and a frame such as the main body frame 3 to which the game board 4 is mounted. Since it is configured so that the game specifications can be changed, a payout control board 4110 for controlling the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. The power supply board 851 shown in 1 is provided on the frame side as a common function. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 monitors the inconsistency counter INCC, as described above, so as to determine whether or not the retry operation is repeated. In the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In the process of step S530 in the time process (setting of the RAM work area when the power is restored), the process is restarted from the stored inconsistency counter INCC when the power is turned on. Then, when the power is cut off and the game board 4 attached to the pachinko game machine 1 is replaced with a game board 4' having different game specifications from the game board 4 and the power is turned on, payout control is performed. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the substrate 4110 starts the process again from the mismatch counter INCC stored when the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko game machine 1 to which the game board 4' is mounted, the mismatch counter INCC of the pachinko game machine 1 to which the game board 4 before replacement is mounted is inherited as it is. For this reason, when a player plays the pachinko game machine 1 to which the game board 4' is mounted, the number of game balls that are inconsistent occurs with a probability of 1/several million, resulting in an inconsistency counter INCC. increases, and when the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4' in a short period of time. There is a risk that In other words, in a short period after the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4', the malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, etc. In spite of the fact that a retry operation has not occurred, there is a possibility that the retry operation may be suddenly determined as an abnormal operation. In this way, if the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4' and it is determined as an abnormal retry operation in a short period of time, the replaced game board 4' is new but is likely to break down. It may give to the player. The probability of one inconsistent game ball being put out due to the retry operation, which is one in several million, is determined by installing the pachinko game machine 1 of the present invention in the hall and operating it continuously during the opening hours of the hall for one week. 141, it is the same as the probability of one inconsistent game ball being put out due to the retry operation in the case of a retry operation. With a probability of 1, the value 1 will not be subtracted. Then, in one week, the mismatch counter INCC is incremented by 1, and the mismatch counter INCC becomes 1. In two weeks, the mismatch counter INCC is further incremented by 1, becoming 2, and 3. In the week, the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 to become 3; in 4 weeks, the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 to become 4; The value 1 is further incremented to the mismatch counter INCC, and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 5, which coincides with the mismatch threshold value INCTH. In other words, when five weeks have passed, the mismatch counter INCC matches the mismatch threshold INCTH. It is determined that there is no detection signal, and it is determined that there is a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the dispensing control board 4110, poor contact of various connectors, etc. In the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in 141, the number " 5” is set and set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Therefore, when the payout control MPU 4120a determines that the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination of step S790 in the mismatch counter reset determination process, the mismatch counter reset is repeated every 7000 s (about 2 hours). By forcibly setting the value 0, that is, forcibly resetting the inconsistency counter INCC in the processing of step S794 in the determination process, the increment of the inconsistency counter INCC that occurs with a probability of 1/several millions is reduced. Disabled. As a result, an error has occurred in the retry operation even though there is no malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, etc. It is possible to prevent setting (storing) of retry error information that conveys to the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

In addition, by intentionally inactivating the count switch 751, it is difficult to detect the game ball received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotator 748, and the above-described retry operation is forcibly generated. Even if the game balls paid out by the retry operation are fraudulently acquired, if the counter switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a short period of time, the value of the mismatch counter INCC will increase as described above. When the mismatch threshold value INCTH or more is reached, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 emit light, so hall clerk or the like rushes to check the state of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Then, the player who commits the fraudulent act has no choice but to stop the act so as not to be discovered, and cannot continue to acquire illegal game balls by the fraudulent act. On the other hand, if the count switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a long period of time so that the value of the mismatch counter INCC does not exceed the mismatch threshold value INCTH, the mismatch counter INCC will be reset every 7000 seconds (approximately 2 hours). Although it is reset, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player who commits fraud during this time is up to the mismatch counter INCC and the mismatch threshold INCTH, as described above, and the count switch 751 is intentionally set to Even if the non-operating state is repeatedly set for a long period of time, the number of game balls that can be obtained by a player who cheats can be extremely reduced.

[14-12. Error cancellation switch operation determination process]
Next, error cancellation switch operation determination processing will be described. In this error release switch operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the error release switch 860a shown in FIG. 98 is operated.

When the error release switch operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the error release switch 860a is operated, as shown in FIG. S800). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the error release switch 860a in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S800, the input information is read from the input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the error cancellation switch 860a. When the input information includes a detection signal from the error cancellation switch 860a, it is determined that the error cancellation switch 860a has been operated. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the error cancellation switch 860a in the input information, it is determined that the error cancellation switch 860a has not been operated.

If the error canceling switch 860a is not operated at step S800, this routine is terminated as it is. If the error canceling switch 860a is operated at step S800, error flag state confirmation processing is performed (step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information regarding the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether the retry operation is abnormal is checked. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormal, and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not abnormal (retry operation is normal). Since it is set, the payout control MPU 4120a confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1.

After step S802, state information setting processing is performed (step S804). In this status information setting process, based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the status information corresponding to the error flag is set to the above-described It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the built-in payout control RAM. As a result, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. A state command is created based on and transmitted to the main control board 4100 . For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, it indicates that an error has occurred in the retry operation. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100 .

The main control board 4100 that has received the retry error information transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. A retry operation error notification process is performed to notify that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the retry operation error notification announcement of "Please check the prize ball unit" and "Please check the harness of the payout control board" is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, the upper left speaker 262 shown in FIG. 32, and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. The hall clerk or the like is notified of this. Hall clerk, etc., who heard the error notification announcement of this retry operation, may have problems such as malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. can be confirmed very quickly compared to the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation is not played from the side speakers 130 , 130 , upper right speaker 222 , upper left speaker 262 and lower speaker 821 . Further, in the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 are caused to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment).

Following step S804, a cancellation setting process is performed (step S806). In this release setting process, based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, The CR unit 6 forcibly stops the content displayed by the error LED indicator 860c, which is a segment indicator already mounted on the payout control board 4110, or indicates that the ball can be lent. 98, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, the raised state is maintained, and the game ball rental device connection terminal board is connected to the payout control I/O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 869 to the CR unit 6. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the error LED indicator 860c has already displayed an error. In order to forcibly stop the number "5" that informs that it is a "retry error", the retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM is changed to "normal". Forcibly overwrite the information displayed with a figure "-" to notify that effect. In addition, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be rented, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the game ball rental device is connected from the payout control I/O port 4120b. Output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869 .

Following step S806, error flag initialization processing is performed (step S808), and this routine ends. In this error flag initialization processing, based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the error flag is reset. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether the retry operation is abnormal is 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the rising state, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set as the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 128, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read by the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. In this way, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to this internal factor when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the judgment of step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 in the process of step S786 of the same process, and the error release switch 860a is operated. Triggered by the occurrence of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0 and initialized. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set when the RAM clear switch 4100e mounted on the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. Similarly, it is initialized when this external factor occurs.

[14-13. Exchange of various signals with the CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 128 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, the signal processing during the payout operation by lending the ball will be explained, and then the input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be explained. Here, the number of game balls worth 200 yen (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and 25 balls worth 100 yen are dispensed twice) is used as the number of rental balls, The case of dispensing to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 shown in FIG. 19 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are stored in the input information read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. confirms the logic states of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal and the CR connection signal from the input information every 1.75 ms, which is the interrupt timer period.

[14-13-1. Signal processing during payout operation by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. When the PRDY signal is set to a logical state indicating that the payout operation is possible, as shown in FIG. , the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, raised and held, output from the payout control I/O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120, and as PRDY through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. and output to the CR unit 6 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player presses the ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. 17, the ball lending switch 365b is turned on. An operation signal is input from the frequency display plate 365 as TDS shown in FIG. The CR unit 6 to which this TDS is input pays out the number of game balls worth 200 yen to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 as the number of rental balls. BRDY, which is a ball request signal, is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). . This BRDY is input to the payout control I/O port 4120b as a BRDY signal.

The payout control MPU 4120a to which this BRDY signal is input is set to the lending request monitoring time HA (20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms in this embodiment) from the timing H1, as shown in FIG. 144(b). ) passes from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, a predetermined number of balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, and the amount is 100 yen) in one payout operation. ) is monitored to see whether or not BRQ, which is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out, rises.

Of the number of game balls worth 200 yen, the CR unit 6 first pays out the number of game balls worth 100 yen to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 as the number of rental balls. ), BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, and the signal is output to the CR unit 6. It is raised and held (timing H2). This BRQ is input to the payout control I/O port 4120b as a BRQ signal.

As shown in FIG. 144(c), the payout control MPU 4120a, when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the BRQ request acceptance ACK monitoring time HB (in this embodiment, 20 ms±1 ms.), in order to notify that one payout operation has started, the logic of the EXS signal is set to HI, that is, the raised state is maintained and the payout control I It is output from the /O port 4120b and output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H3).

As shown in FIG. 144(b), the CR unit 6, to which this EXS is input, waits until the lending instruction monitoring time HC (in this embodiment, set to 20 ms to 58 ms) elapses from the timing H3. , BRQ raised and held from the timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

As shown in FIG. 144(c), the payout control MPU 4120a performs one payout operation from the timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in this embodiment, set as the ball payout time) elapses. A predetermined number of rental balls, that is, the number of game balls worth 100 yen is put out to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 as the number of rental balls. When the payout monitoring time HD elapses, the EXS signal raised and held from the timing H3 is set to LOW logic, that is, held in a fallen state and output from the payout control I/O port 4120b, and as EXS, Output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

The CR unit 6 pays out the remaining 100 yen worth of game balls out of the 200 yen worth of game balls to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 as the number of rental balls. ), the BRQ is transferred from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board from the timing H5 until the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, it is set to a maximum of 268 ms). 869, output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a), the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

Similarly, the payout control MPU 4120a pays out the remaining 100 yen worth of game balls to the upper tray 301 or the lower tray 302 as the number of rental balls, as shown in FIG. 144(c). , the EXS signal raised and held is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b with its logic set to LOW, that is, held in the fallen state, and output as EXS via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. and output to the CR unit 6 (timing H7).

The CR unit 6 starts from timing H1 as shown in FIG. The raised and held BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

The above-described lending request monitoring time HA, BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, and CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF are controlled by the payout control shown in FIG. It is clocked in the timer update process of step S552 in the part power-on process (payout control part main process).

Note that the payout control MPU 4120a is not in communication with the CR unit 6 (BRDY logic is held LOW, that is, falling down), the PRDY signal that has risen from timing H1 and held is changed to LOW, that is, in a falling state, as shown in FIG. 144(d). It is held and output from the payout control I/O port 4120b, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it rises and is held), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and issued. It is output from the control I/O port 4120b and output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. "Maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held after falling), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI ( Maintain its logic HI when the EXS signal is held high.

In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for a circle twice, the game balls with the number of rental balls of 50 are put out to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302.例文帳に追加A setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6 is operated by a hall clerk or the like, and the number of game balls worth 100 yen is used as the number of rental balls. When set to be put out to the lower tray 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls worth 100 yen once, and the number of game balls worth 500 yen is set as the number of rental balls. When setting is made to put out to the upper tray 301 or the lower tray 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls worth 100 yen five times, and determines the number of game balls worth 1000 yen. When the number of rental balls is set to be paid out to the upper tray 301 or the lower tray 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls worth 100 yen ten times.

[14-13-2. Input signal confirmation processing from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 keeps the CR unit 6 from receiving the BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 even after the above-mentioned lending request monitoring time HA has passed. is output to the payout control board 4110, and even if the signal is not started or the above-mentioned lending instruction monitoring time HC has passed, the CR unit 6 connects the game ball lending device to the game ball lending device. Via the terminal plate 869, output to the payout control board 4110, even if the signal is not lowered, or even if the next request confirmation timing HE described above has passed, the CR unit 6 outputs BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the game If the signal is output to the payout control board 4110 via the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the signal is not started, or even if the above-mentioned CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF has passed, the CR unit 6 will be BRDY. is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and if the signal is not lowered, BRQ and Confirm whether BRDY is normal or not. Specifically, when the payout control MPU 4120a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), as shown in FIGS. , 200 ms±1 ms.), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, it is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 while maintaining the fallen state, and as PRDY , output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, set the logic of the EXS signal to LOW, that is, output from the payout control I / O port 4120b while maintaining the fallen state, and EXS , and output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J1).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down from the timing J1 to HI after a predetermined period of time JB (in this embodiment, it is set to 200 ms±1 ms) from the timing J1. In other words, it is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b while maintaining the raised state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J2 to LOW after the elapse of a predetermined period JC (set to 100 ms±1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J2. That is, it is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b while being held in the lowered state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down from the timing J3 to HI after a predetermined period JD (set to 100 ms±1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J3. In other words, it is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b while maintaining the raised state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from timing J4 to LOW after the lapse of a predetermined period JE (set to 100 ms±1 ms in this embodiment) from timing J4. That is, it is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b while being held in the lowered state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a, after the lapse of a predetermined period JF (set to 10000ms±1ms in this embodiment) from the timing J5, sets the PRDY signal held down from the timing J5 to the logic HI. That is, it is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b while being held in the raised state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6).

The above-described predetermined period JA to predetermined period JF are clocked in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

[15. Various control processing of the peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 97 will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150. FIG. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 148 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, and FIG. 150 is a rotation detection switch history creation processing. 2 is a flowchart showing an example of .

As shown in FIG. 100, the peripheral control board 4140 comprises a peripheral control section 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control section 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control section 4150 will be described. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, and rotation detection. Switch history creation processing will be described. The rotation detection switch history creation process is executed as one process of the operation unit information acquisition process in step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process to be described later. In this embodiment, as the priority of interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[15-1. Various control processing of the peripheral control unit]
[15-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing this peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs from the main control board 4100, shown in FIGS. 120 and 121 . , various commands such as commands relating to the control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be received.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. ) are compared, and effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms), is compared, and Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc are compared. The performance backup information (1 fr), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms), and the performance backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 4 (1 ms), are compared, and the contents of the comparison are compared. 101, the performance backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. While the performance backup information (1ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) is copied back to Bank0 (1ms) for hot start, when the compared contents do not match (i.e. , mismatch), a value of 0 is forcibly written into each of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, to perform a cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. (SRAM), and effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the second backup area 4150dc. When the contents of the comparison match, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), is stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. ) is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is stored in Bank0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. 0 is forcibly written to cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 101 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 100 to reset the peripheral control MPU 4150a. I try not to get caught.

Following step S1000, current time information acquisition processing is performed (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. In addition, in the current time information acquisition process, the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and adjusts the brightness of the liquid crystal display so that the brightness of the LEDs included in the acquired brightness setting information is obtained. Processing is performed to adjust the brightness of the backlight of the device 1900 and turn it on. As described above, the brightness setting information includes the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set brightness. and the luminance of the LEDs that are the backlights of the liquid crystal display device 1900 . Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LEDs included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%. Sometimes, the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the LEDs included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 are turned on. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is 80%, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on after adjusting the luminance based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. In this liquid crystal display device brightness setting process, the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1900 should not be performed at all. It's becoming This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is input from the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a. A value of 1 is set in the partial V blank signal interrupt process. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. there is

After step S1006, it is determined whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is established until the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to reset the peripheral control MPU 4150a. I try not to get caught.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1009, 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing is performed (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by the 1 ms interrupt timer being started is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, lamp data output processing is performed (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp driving board 4170 shown in FIG. 100 is performed. Here, serial I/O port serial transmission for the lamp drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the lamp drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the data shown in FIG. A game for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration substrates provided on the game board 4 and/or a plurality of decoration LEDs 3400a of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 shown in FIG. The board-side light emission data SL-DAT is created and set in a lamp data creation process, which will be described later. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is sent to the lamp drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to transmit 1 byte of the transmission shift register. data is started to be transmitted bit by bit. Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is transmitted, byte by byte, via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and In synchronism with the board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, transmission of 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board.

In the lamp data output process, DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 100 is performed. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. In 4150cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 53 is lamp data described later. It is created and set in the creation process. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the top address of 4150cab is sent to the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED serial signal via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I/O port. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK to the transmission shift register. Start transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port). 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab are transferred byte by byte to the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. , and by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port via the peripheral bus 4150ai, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port receives this written data. The data in the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, transmission of 1 byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, operation unit monitoring processing is performed (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the dial operation unit 401 is detected based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Rotation (direction of rotation) of the dial operation unit 401 and rotation (direction of rotation) of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 (for example, various information obtained by acquiring operation of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) ) history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Whether or not the unit 405 is operated is monitored, and whether or not to reflect the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the state of operation of the pressing operation unit 405 in the game effect is appropriately determined.

Following step S1014, display data output processing is performed (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source 4160a draws data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator in the display data creation process described later. Output from the device 1900 and/or the channel CH2 shown in FIG. As a result, various screens are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and/or the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 . In the display data output process, when drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is transferred to the liquid crystal display device 1900 and/or the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450. It is designed to cancel output to Although this makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, so-called dropped frames may occur. A speaker 821 provided on the body frame 3 and a speaker 821 provided on the door frame 5 are produced by a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. The mechanism is such that priority can be given to synchronization with performances such as music and sound effects from speakers 130, 222, and 262 that match various performances.

After step S1016, sound data output processing is performed (step S1018). In this sound data output process, sound data such as music and sound effects set in the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation process described later is output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. In addition, the sound data of the notification sound and notification sound are output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 4160c converts the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame-decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. in accordance with various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. In addition, notification sounds and notification sounds are also stereo-generated. It is played.

Following step S1018, scheduler update processing is performed (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series that constitute the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the number of screen data from the top screen data is transferred to the tone generator VDP 4160a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series that constitute the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the number of light emission data from the head light emission data is changed to light emission of various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which mode to use.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of the notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated to indicate what order of the sound command data from the top sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the first drive data is The pointer is updated to indicate the order of the drive data to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler updating process is forcibly instructed to the drive data that should be originally instructed.

Following step S1020, received command analysis processing is performed (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, which will be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. , various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac are analyzed. Various commands, shown in FIG. , various commands classified into normal figure synchronization effects related, various commands classified into normal electric role effects related, various commands classified into notification display shown in FIG. There are various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others.

After step S1022, warning processing is performed (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified into the notification displays shown in FIG. Various control data in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150, such as the set schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data. It is extracted from the copy area 4150ce and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of anomalies can be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly before the anomaly is resolved after the occurrence of one anomaly. can be done.

Following step S1024, RCT acquisition information update processing is performed (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update processing, the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition processing in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The time information stored in the time information storage unit is updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and based on the updated time information, the year, month, and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit. date is updated.

Following step S1026, lamp data creation processing is performed (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and out of the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data, based on the light emission data indicated by the pointer. , a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration substrates provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. The game board side emission data SL-DAT for output is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. A door for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. The side emission data STL-DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. It is set in the LED transmission data storage area 4150cab.

Following step S1028, display data creation processing is performed (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, is displayed by the peripheral control unit. 4150 of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and output to the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and Alternatively, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, sound data creation processing is performed (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It extracts from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and outputs it to the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and controls the built-in sound source to generate the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated in accordance with the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set in accordance with the output channel number. In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob 4140a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the values in 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume. Each is set so that the volume increases toward the volume 6. - 特許庁By controlling the built-in sound source VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, the sound data is serialized in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160c, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5. FIG. In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be controlled by the program. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 and 222 provided on the door frame 5 can be adjusted. , 262, the sound effects such as music and sound effects are reduced. ) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and/or the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, or the game state that is advantageous to the player is created. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of migration.

After step S1032, backup processing is performed (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, reception command storage area 4150cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and Effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is used as effect backup information (1fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 4150cb. High-speed copying is performed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac performs high-speed copying to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the first backup area 4150cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the top address of Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). 4150ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) in the first backup area 4150cb, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr ) up to the end address of Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 4150cb in sequence from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 4150cb. Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are successively stored by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are transferred to Bank4 ( 1fr) are copied in order from the first address.

In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 4150da shown in FIG. Effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), is transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db as effect backup information (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac at high speed. , and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the first backup area 4150db, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The contents up to the stored contents are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the first backup area 4150db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs the peripheral control DMA controller. Copying the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 4150db is specified as the request factor of 4150ac, and the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to Bank0 (SRAM ) up to the end address of the first backup area 4150db are copied in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 4150db. Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously transferred to Bank4 of the backup second area 4150dc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). SRAM) are copied in order from the first address.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as the completion of the steady-state processing of the peripheral controller (step S1038), and the process returns to step S1006 to set the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0. is set for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006. Thus, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing". This peripheral controller steady-state processing starts by setting the value 1 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral controller steady-state processing is being executed in step S1009, and starts 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010. , and step S1036, and finally in step S1038, the normal processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 to indicate completion of the normal processing of the peripheral control unit. It will be done. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the built-in tone generator VDP 4160a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval between the two is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[15-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 100, the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with this as a trigger will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 146 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

If the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral controller steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), Exit this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when no part-stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In some cases, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Since the peripheral controller steady-state processing is forcibly canceled halfway and the execution of the peripheral controller steady-state processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, in step S1009 of the peripheral controller power-on processing (peripheral controller steady-state processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the in-process flag SP-FLG, the fact that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. By setting the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the processing at the time of turning on (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is indicated by the peripheral control unit V blank which is this routine. By notifying the signal interrupt processing, it is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. It is determined whether or not it is completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V-blank signal is input after the V-blank signal is input.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activating a 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[15-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 145 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval between the two is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

If the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (incremented, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Of the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c are transmitted. A drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 4150caf is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. starts transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf are stored 1 byte each, the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and via the peripheral bus 4150ai to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port for writing, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port receives this write data. transfer the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, start transmitting the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and frame decoration drive amplifier board Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. In this case as well, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board. When the motor drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, first, the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c are configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. and the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. 101 is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the start address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first byte of the received game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to a register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the data written in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start sending byte data bit by bit. Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the rest of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag are transferred byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. , by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input or not, thereby detecting history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from various detection switches. , movable position history information, etc.) and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. It is possible to acquire the original positions, movable positions, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah.

Following step S1106, operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. For example, the rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation history information of the press operation unit 405, etc.) are created, and the operation of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. It is set in the unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai. The rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and whether or not the pressing operation unit 405 is operated can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai.

Following step S1108, backup processing is performed (step S1110), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is executed each time a 1ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Each time, Bank0 (1ms) to be backed up includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, and a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah. , and the performance information (1 ms) stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai is stored as performance backup information (1 ms) in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 4150cb by peripheral control. The DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1ms) in the first backup area 4150cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the top address of Bank 1 (1ms) of the first backup area 4150cb by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). 4150ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank2 (1ms) in the first backup area 4150cb, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1ms) to Bank0 (1ms). ) up to the end address of Bank2 (1ms) in the first backup area 4150cb in sequence from the start address of Bank2 (1ms) in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are successively stored by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1ms) are successively transferred to Bank4 ( 1ms) are copied in order from the first address.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. are doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V-blank signal, the peripheral control unit will not be affected by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt. After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production. In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source are implemented. The interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly in production lots of the substrate 4140 as well. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag due to slight changes in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[15-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 4100 start to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 1-byte (8-bit) information is loaded into the reception buffer by the substrate serial I/O port, and when this loading is completed, an interrupt is generated and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 148 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received, the peripheral 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I/O port built in the control MPU 4150a is taken in (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the 1st byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the 2nd byte of the main circumference serial data, and the 3rd byte of the main circumference serial data. is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value of the byte is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value ).

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they generate static electricity and generate noise. in a receptive environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 4150 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 4100, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 4100? is determining whether or not As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data between the main control substrate 4100 and the peripheral control substrate 4140 has been affected by noise and has changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main-circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the received command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. (step S1216) and terminate this routine. This received command storage area 4150cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumferential serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumferential serial data are Stored in the 4150 cac peripheral controller receive ring buffer. This "peripheral controller reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Remember. It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the status assigned as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the status assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data when storing in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. is stored in association with the mode assigned, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received is exceeded. Alternatively, in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is executed as it is. finish.

[15-1-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 103, a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110 is input via the main control board 4100. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing to be executed will be described. do. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal has not been input in this judgment, the routine ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If two macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the routine returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If the signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

If the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started in step S1304, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 4, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing , stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even if the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception waiting process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. ) stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup process, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

The high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. Copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. Then, a predetermined byte (for example, , 1 byte) of the received command storage area in Bank 1 (1fr) of the first backup area 4150cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa copies all of the received command storage areas in sequence from the top address, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and store in Bank0 (1fr) The contents stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank 0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank 0 (1fr) are successively specified by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). are copied in order from the first address of the received command storage area contained in Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 4150cb. Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the second backup area 4150cc. specified to be copied to the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr), and stored from the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). up to the contents of the received command are copied in sequence from the top address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and then the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Copy is specified, and the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is copied to a predetermined address. Bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied from the start address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second backup area 4150cc.

After step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clearing process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 101 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 100 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 4150a from being reset. .

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. In other words, it continues infinitely to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By endlessly continuing determination in this way, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can output a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. While the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the WDT clearing process is performed in step S1314 when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 145 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset immediately before the power failure occurs. It has become. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset because the WDT clearing process of step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[15-1-6. Rotation detection switch history creation process]
Next, rotation detection switch history creation processing executed as one processing of the operation unit information acquisition processing in step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 147 will be described. This rotation detection switch history creation process creates a history of detection signals from a pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b for detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401 shown in FIG.

When the rotation detection switch history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. Rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are read out from operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of RAM 4150c (step S1400). The rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are each 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" is bit ), the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a is stored as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST.

After step S1400, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b (step S1402). This determination is made when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, and one of the plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c arranged in a line at regular intervals on the driven gear 410 connected to the dial operating section 401 shown in FIG. When one rotation detection piece determines that the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 432a has changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, and when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, the one rotation detection piece rotates. It is determined that the optical axis of the detection switch 432a has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state. Further, when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, it is determined that one rotation detection piece has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state of the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 432b. When there is no detection signal, it is determined that one rotation detection piece has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state of the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 432b.

If there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a or from the rotation detection switch 432b in step S1402, the rotation detection switch detection history information is shifted (step S1404). In the shift processing of the rotation detection switch detection history information, when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST read in step S1400 is shifted to the most significant bits B7←B6, B6←B5. , B5.rarw.B4, B4.rarw.B3, B3.rarw.B2, B2.rarw.B1, B1.rarw.least significant bit B0. If there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST read in step S1400, the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1 , B1←least significant bit B0, and so on, from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

When the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is shifted in step S1404, the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is set to 1, while the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST is shifted. If shifted, the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST is set to 1 (step S1406), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, if there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a or there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b in step S1402, the rotation detection switch detection history information is shifted (step S1408). In the shift processing of the rotation detection switch detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation detection switch detection history information in step S1404 is performed. The switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is converted to the least significant bit B0 in such a manner that the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0. to the most significant bit B7, while if there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST read in step S1400 is shifted to the most significant bit B7←B6, B6.rarw.B5, B5.rarw.B4, B4.rarw.B3, B3.rarw.B2, B2.rarw.B1, B1.rarw.least significant bit B0.

When the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is shifted in step S1408, the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is set to 0, while the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST is shifted. If it is shifted, the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST is set to 0 (step S1410), and this routine ends.

In this manner, each time the rotation detection switch history creating process is executed, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7. , the least significant bit B0 is set to 1 or 0, so that the history of detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b can be created.

Next, from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST described above, it is determined whether the dial operation unit 401 is stopped (in other words, the dial drive motor 414 is out of step). 151 to 153, a method for determining whether the rotating state is clockwise or counterclockwise. FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the pair of rotation detection switches associated with clockwise rotation of the dial operation portion in the rotary operation unit, and FIG. 152 is a dial operation portion in the rotary operation unit. 153(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the pair of rotation detection switches associated with the counterclockwise rotation of the rotary operation unit; FIG. FIG. 153(B) is a list showing ON/OFF of a pair of rotation detection switches accompanying counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit. be.

As described above, each of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, " B” represents a bit.), and the history of detection signals from the rotation detection switch 432a is shown in FIG. 101 as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST. The history of detection signals from the rotation detection switch 432b is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST. remembered. Therefore, the dial operation unit 401 is stopped (in other words, the dial driving motor 414 is out of step), is rotating clockwise, or is rotating counterclockwise. In the case of judging whether the rotation is in the direction, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST is read out from the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and whether it matches the detection judgment value. or not. This detection determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b shown in FIG. 100, and is copied to the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 when the power is turned on. is read and used. The data preset as the detection determination value is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)", where the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. ing. That is, this determination is made by determining whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the detection determination value.

Specifically, when the low-order 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST are 1, the rotation detection switch 432a is set to the dial operation unit 401 continuously by four 1 ms timer interrupts. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST is 1, four 1 ms This means that the rotation detection switch 432b has detected the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401 following the occurrence of the timer interrupt.

Next, detection of the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 will be described. As described above, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 by detecting the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401. ing. 151 to 153, the rotation detection switch 432a is indicated as "A" and the rotation detection switch 432b is indicated as "B". Further, steps 1 to 4 shown below are four types of rotation positions of the dial operation unit 401 based on the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, respectively. , step 2, step 3, and step 4, and after moving to step 4, the process returns to step 1 again.

When dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect rotation detection piece 410c of driven gear 410 as step 1, as shown in FIG. Due to the shift to step 2 accompanying the clockwise rotation, the rotation detection switch 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432b and the rotation detection switch 432b detects rotation. The process proceeds to a step in which piece 410c is not detected. After that, due to the shift to step 3 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, and both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned to the rotation detection pieces. 410c is not detected. Then, due to the shift to step 4 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432a, and the rotation detection switch 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. The rotation detection switch 432b moves to the step of detecting the rotation detection piece 410c.

On the other hand, when dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. When the dial operation unit 401 is rotated counterclockwise to move to step 2, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432a, and the rotation detection switch 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. The detection switch 432b moves to the step of detecting the rotation detection piece 410c. After that, due to the transition to step 3 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, and both rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect rotation. The process proceeds to a step in which piece 410c is not detected. When the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise and the process proceeds to step 4, the rotation detection switch 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432b. Then, the rotation detecting switch 432b does not detect the rotation detecting piece 410c.

That is, the ON (detection of the rotation detection piece 410c)/OFF (no detection of the rotation detection piece 410c) operation of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b when the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise is shown in FIG. 2, both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are "ON" in step 1, and while the rotation detection switch 432a remains "ON" in step 2, the rotation detection switch 432b is turned "OFF". Thereafter, after both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned "OFF" in step 3, the rotation detection switch 432a continues to be "OFF" and the rotation detection switch 432b is turned "ON" in step 4. After that, the process returns to step 1 again, and the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both turned "ON".

On the other hand, the ON/OFF operation of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise is as shown in FIG. ON", and in step 2, the rotation detection switch 432b continues to be "ON", while the rotation detection switch 432a is turned "OFF". Thereafter, after both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned "OFF" in step 3, the rotation detection switch 432b continues to be "OFF" and the rotation detection switch 432a is turned "ON" in step 4. After that, the process returns to step 1 again, and the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both turned "ON".

When the dial operation unit 401 is stopped without rotating clockwise or counterclockwise, there is no change in detection from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. Switching of ON/OFF operation by 432a and 432b is completely eliminated.

In this manner, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b can detect the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 based on the ON/OFF states in steps 1 to 4 described above. When the dial operation unit 401 is operated by the operation of the player, it is detected that the dial operation unit 401 has been rotated by detecting ON/OFF switching of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. The direction of rotation can be grasped, and by detecting that the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are not switched between the ON/OFF states at all, it is possible to grasp that the dial operation unit 401 is in a stopped state. can be done.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a rotates the dial operation unit 401 by pressing the dial operation unit 401 with a finger or palm of the player's hand when executing control to rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise. When the rotation of the dial 401 is forcibly stopped, it is detected that the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are not switched between ON/OFF states, so that the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. It can be understood that the dial drive motor 414, which is a stepping motor, is out of step.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 4100 of FIG. 97 and the peripheral control board 4140 of FIG. 97 are provided. The main control board 4100 controls the progress of the game, and decides whether or not to give a profit to the player based on the game ball entering the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 in FIG. Various commands of FIG. 120 and FIG. is output in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. The peripheral control board 4140 draws various images on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and/or the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 based on control commands from the main control board 4100 to control the progress of the production. In the peripheral control unit steady process of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 145 and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process of FIG. The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 are composed of a liquid crystal panel and a backlight for illuminating the liquid crystal panel from behind.

This pachinko game machine 1 further comprises a brightness adjustment circuit 3425g in FIG. 117 and an LED current adjustment circuit 3425f in FIG. The brightness adjustment circuit 3425g is configured by electrically connecting a plurality of resistors in parallel. Specifically, the resistors SDR5 and SDR6 in FIG. 117 and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 in FIG. 117 are electrically connected in parallel. The circuit is configured by The LED current adjustment circuit 3425f can adjust the current flowing through the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 based on the combined resistance value of the combined resistance of the resistors SDR5 and SDR6 and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 that constitute the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g. It is possible.

In the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f, as the resistance value of the resistor increases, the change in the combined resistance value of the resistors SDR5 and SDR6 constituting the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value of the resistor. By reducing the amount of change in the amount of current flowing through the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 and reducing the amount of change in the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value of the resistor Even if the resistance value of the resistor fluctuates under the influence of temperature, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of change in the luminance of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the amount of change due to the fluctuation in the resistance value. there is Specifically, the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f changes the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 from the minimum resistance value of 0 Ω (zero Ω) toward the maximum resistance value of 100 Ω. The amount of change in the combined resistance value of the combined resistors of the resistors SDR5 and SDR6 constituting the luminance adjustment circuit 3425g and the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value is reduced. By reducing the amount of change to reduce the amount of change in the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, the resistors SDR5 and SDR6 and the brightness adjustment volume are affected by the temperature. Even if SDVR0 and SDVR0 fluctuate, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of change in the luminance of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the amount of change due to the fluctuation of the resistance value.

In this way, as the resistance value of the resistors increases, the amount of change in the combined resistance value of the resistors SDR5 and SDR6 and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 that constitute the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value of the resistors decreases. As a result, the amount of change in the current flowing through the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 can be reduced, and the amount of change in the luminance of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 can be reduced. In other words, as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is varied from the minimum resistance value of 0Ω (zero Ω) to the maximum resistance value of 100Ω, the combined resistance value with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 By reducing the amount of change, the amount of change in the current flowing through the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 can be reduced, and the amount of change in the luminance of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 can be reduced. As a result, even if the resistance values of the resistors adjusted by the operator of the manufacturer so that the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is adjusted to the brightness at the time of shipment, the resistance values of the resistors SDR5, SDR5, Even if SDR6 and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 fluctuate under the influence of temperature, the amount of change in the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the amount of change due to the variation in the resistance value will also be small. An increase in the amount of change in luminance of the 3450 backlight can be suppressed. Therefore, fluctuations in brightness of the backlight due to temperature changes can be suppressed.

In addition, this pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a brightness adjustment circuit 3425g in FIG. 117 and an LED current adjustment circuit 3425f in FIG. 117, which are fixed resistors, and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 of FIG. 117, which is a variable resistor, are electrically connected in parallel to form a brightness adjustment circuit 3425g. By varying the resistance value of , the combined resistance value of the resistors SDR5 and SDR6 and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can be varied. The LED current adjusting circuit 3425f can adjust the current flowing to the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 based on the combined resistance value from the luminance adjusting circuit 3425g.

The LED current adjustment circuit 3425f adjusts the amount of change in the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is varied from the minimum resistance value of 0Ω (zero Ω) toward the maximum resistance value of 100Ω. By reducing the amount of change in the combined resistance value of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450, the amount of change in the current flowing through the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is reduced. By reducing the amount of change in luminance, even if the resistance values of the resistors SDR5 and SDR6 and the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 fluctuate due to the temperature, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 can respond to the amount of change due to the fluctuation in the resistance value. It is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of change in the brightness of the backlight.

Thus, the relationship between the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is such that the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 varies from the minimum resistance value of 0Ω (zero Ω) to the maximum resistance value. As it is varied toward a certain 100 Ω, the amount of change in the combined resistance value with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 becomes smaller, thereby reducing the amount of change in the current flowing through the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450. The characteristic that the amount of change in the luminance of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 changes in a curvilinear manner (the characteristic curve shown by the solid curve in FIG. 118(a)). have. In other words, as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is varied from the minimum resistance value of 0Ω (zero Ω) to the maximum resistance value of 100Ω, the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 backs up with respect to the variable operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. Since the slope of the characteristic curve of the brightness of the light is small, the resistors SDR5 and SDR6 and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 are affected by the temperature. Even if the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the resistance values of the resistors SDR5 and SDR6, which are adjusted to have a brightness of Since the amount of change is also small, an increase in the amount of change in the luminance of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 can be suppressed. Therefore, fluctuations in brightness of the backlight due to temperature changes can be suppressed.

[16. example]
It goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and can be embodied in various forms as long as they fall within the technical scope of the present invention.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the relationship between the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is such that the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ranges from 0Ω (zero Ω), which is the minimum resistance value. As the resistance is varied toward the maximum resistance value of 100Ω, the amount of change in the combined resistance value with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 becomes smaller, resulting in the amount of change in the current flowing through the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450. is reduced, the amount of change in the luminance of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 is reduced in a curvilinear manner (shown by the solid curve in FIG. 118(a). However, the relationship between the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 varies from the maximum resistance value of 100Ω to the minimum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. As the resistance value is varied toward 0Ω (zero Ω), the amount of change in the combined resistance value with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 becomes smaller, and the current flowing through the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450. is reduced, and the amount of change in the luminance of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 is reduced. The current adjustment circuit 3425f and the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g may be configured respectively. Even with this configuration, as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is varied from the maximum resistance value of 100Ω to the minimum resistance value of 0Ω (zero Ω), the sub-unit for the variable operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 Since the slope of the characteristic curve of the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 3450 is reduced, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can be quickly brought close to the target resistance value of about 38 Ω, and the target resistance value is reached. When approaching to about 38 Ω, the slope of the characteristic curve becomes smaller as it approaches the target resistance value, and the operation amount for variably operating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is expanded as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 approaches the target resistance value. By doing so, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can be gradually brought closer to the target resistance value of about 38Ω, which facilitates adjustment. Therefore, fine adjustment of the brightness of the backlight can be easily performed. Further, as in the present invention, as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is varied from the minimum resistance value of 0Ω (zero Ω) to the maximum resistance value of 100Ω, sub-units for the variable operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 Since the slope of the characteristic curve of the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 3450 is small, the fixed resistor and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 are affected by the temperature, and the manufacturer's operator cannot adjust the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450. Even if the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 adjusted to the brightness at the time of shipment and the resistance value of the fixed resistor fluctuate, the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is affected by the amount of change due to the fluctuation of the resistance value. Since the amount of change in luminance is also reduced, an increase in the amount of change in luminance of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 can be suppressed. Therefore, fluctuations in brightness of the backlight due to temperature changes can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, and gaming machines other than pachinko gaming machines such as slot machines or It can also be applied to a fusion game machine (which performs a slot game using game balls) that fuses a pachinko game machine and a slot machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko game machine (game machine), 2... Outer frame, 3... Main body frame, 4... Game board, 5... Door frame, 130... Side speaker, 222... Upper right speaker, 262... Upper left speaker, 821... Lower part Speaker 400 Operation unit 401 Dial operation unit 405 Push operation unit 1100 Game area 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2101 Upper starting port 2102 Lower starting port 3420 Liquid crystal output board 3425 Sub-liquid crystal drive board 3425b Backlight power supply circuit 3425f LED current adjustment circuit (backlight current adjustment means) 3425g Brightness adjustment circuit (combined resistance means) 3430 Sub-liquid crystal drive board box 3430a Adjustment hole 3450... Sub liquid crystal display device (display means), 4100... Main control board (main control means), 4100a... Main control MPU, 4110... Payout control board, 4110b... Power failure monitoring circuit, 4140... Peripheral control board (effect control means) , 4140a... Sound volume control volume 4150... Peripheral control unit 4150c... Peripheral control RAM 4160... Liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160a... Sound source built-in VDP 4170... Lamp drive board 4180... Motor drive board SDR5... Resistor (resistor ), SDR6... Resistor (resistor), SDVR0... Brightness adjustment volume (resistor).

Claims (1)

a main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
a sound output means for outputting a notification sound for notifying an abnormal state of the game machine and an effect sound according to the progress of the game;
an image display means;
effect control means for controlling the sound output from the sound output means and the image displayed by the image display means based on the command received from the main control means;
player volume control means operable by the player to change the volume output from the sound output means;
In a gaming machine comprising
The effect control means has a plurality of sound setting units,
The plurality of sound setting units include sound data of a performance sound whose volume can be changed according to the operation of the player's volume adjustment means, and a notification that the volume cannot be changed according to the operation of the player's volume adjustment means. The sound data of the sound is set individually as sound data,
Synthesizing means for synthesizing the sound data set in the plurality of sound setting units, and synthesized volume value setting means for setting a second volume setting value after being synthesized by the synthesizing means,
The plurality of sound setting units are configured as data setting areas within one control element,
The one control element synthesizes the sound data set in the plurality of sound setting units to set the second volume setting value,
When the notification sound is output, the one control element synthesizes the sound data of the effect sound and the sound data of the notification sound,
A first volume setting value that can be changed according to the operation of the player volume adjustment means is set in the sound setting portion in which the sound data of the effect sound is set among the plurality of sound setting portions,
A first volume setting value of effect sound data set in the sound setting unit can be changed by a player operating the player volume adjustment means,
The effect sound or the notification sound is output from the sound output means at a volume reflecting the second volume setting value,
When the notification sound is being output, the effect sound is muted, and when the output of the notification sound is canceled, the output at the volume set by the player's volume control means is resumed. A gaming machine characterized by:

Images